gy ■lW^V■ ^ ,^^ ^^| »l(fe ^ ^gl' ^ iftlaiPa■ ^ g !^ i?-lWj.Jiii.^^^ 
 
 erman ikra 
 
 ^• ^j^vai vAimv - 'm mimiisimiitssf. 
 
 Eft filAaHrwiVwUM t L ( l l H I WW i w' » l iW Wn t »n! l i] p» LW'i « m" — i »»w 
 
 ■>. ^, 
 
 / 
 
 ^f?^t^^' 
 
 a a ' te * ax - w i*-»wj»'-K4 « tw*«w* M W!»w^- 
 
 '■K, JV.vI..A>r ".!?;■.. 
 
 
-■r-r-rf!C355T-iiB!rr" " 
 
 President Whjte Library, 
 Cornell University. 
 
arW39053°'""" ""'"^^^''y Library 
 olin.anx ^^ ^^' 762 531 
 
The original of tiiis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031762531 
 
CONDENSED 
 
 German Grammar 
 
 FOR COimES IND HIGH SCEOOIS iND FOR SftHNSTlllltnOS 
 
 IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ORTHOGRAPHY 
 OF THE PRESENT DAY 
 
 MAX S. MOLL 
 
 Among the original features are : — Three tables illustrating the order of 
 words in the sentence; also an Appendix dontaining 
 Paronyms of the Oeirman language. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ROCHESTER, N. Y. 
 1890. 
 
COPYRIGHT 1890. BY MAX S. MOLL. 
 
 PSEBS or JOHK F. SHIEH, BOCH^TBB, M. T. 
 
PREFACE, 
 
 We live in an age of great mental activity. More is now 
 required of the scholar than at any time before in the history of 
 mankind. The students of our universities and colleges are 
 overburdened with work, which state, if continued, must and 
 will serve to weaken the mental and physical power of the coming 
 generation. 
 
 Among the many studies pursued, that of languages is an 
 important one, and again, in this study, I consider that of the 
 living languages of the greatest importance — those languages 
 which are spoken by hundreds of millions of people, with whom 
 we are in constant connection, either in reference to commerce 
 or science. Nobody will gainsay that the German language is a 
 great factor in our country, and that the knowledge of it has 
 become a necessity for men and women of every vocation of life. 
 
 Under these circumstances we must ask : Is it not high time 
 to change the method of instruction of the German language, So 
 that students shall be able to make a practical use of it ? As 
 it is now, hardly one of them is able to speak the German 
 sufficiently, which result should and could be accomplished. 
 
 One of the main reasons for this shortcoming is the grammar 
 used in our colleges and schools. These grammars composed 
 after the style of the old Latin and Greek grammars, are bulky, 
 prolix and mostly so profound that the student is often unable 
 to decipher the meaning of the rules. Such a book must serve 
 to discourage even the most enthusiastic student, and make 
 the study tedious and wearisome. Besides, the material is so 
 scattered over three hundred pages or more, that the student 
 will never get a clear insight of the language. What does all 
 that mean ? It means the loss of something, which is the most 
 precious in the life of man, the most costly, because it can 
 never be restored — the loss of time. 
 
 In our generation of rapid progress it should be the highest 
 aim of scholars to simplify all the studies and to give them a 
 more practical tendency. Ours is a century of practice and 
 everything that serves to impede it must be removed. 
 
 For years I have been urged by my friends and pupils to 
 write a German grammar, specially adapted to Americans, and 
 to give them the fruit of my long experience as instructor of the 
 German in this country. But being too much occupied and 
 besides well aware of the difficulty of the task, I hesitated. 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 waiting for some one else to come forward to supply this urgent 
 want. But, as nothing of the kind appeared (except some short 
 grammars, which are only abridgements of the larger ones, and 
 which by their abridgement have lost the most essential parts of 
 grammar) and as the need for such a grammar became more 
 and more urgent, I deemed it my duty to enter the field and, 
 I may say, I have done all in my power to make this book what 
 it should be, viz : a treasury of practical rules and hints, by 
 which the student, in the shortest time possible, will obtain a 
 thorough knowledge of the German grammar and a clear insight 
 of the constructions and peculiarities of .the language. 
 
 The book has reference to all changes in orthography made 
 in the last years, and the material is so arranged that it can be 
 easily reviewed. I have made a new division of the nouns into 
 five declensions, so that every noun can be quickly classified, 
 and by putting all nouns which form the rules and exceptions in 
 rhyme, every child can commit them to memory in a very short 
 time. At the annual examination of the German class of Miss 
 Cruttenden's school, which is in my charge, I had the best 
 opportunity to observe the excellent working of my new division 
 and rules. Every given noun was without hesitation correctly 
 classified and declined. 
 
 Among the many other features not contained in any other 
 grammar are three tables fully illustrating the order of words in 
 the sentence. With the help of these tables every student will 
 be able to express himself correctly and to avoid the usual 
 blunders in constructing the sentences. The book has also an 
 appendix containing "IParonyms" of the German language, 
 which will prove of immense- value to the student. Some original 
 rules about the gender will also.be a great help. The reading 
 exercises could be used to the best advantage for conversation 
 and for oral translation. -For this reason they should be read 
 repeatedly and very carefully. 
 
 To avoid the scattering of the material, which is so confusing, 
 no lessons for practical work have been added. These lessons 
 are given in a little book which accompanies the grammar and 
 follows it step by step, and which is so arranged that the student 
 will obtain a clear and full comprehension of the subject, to 
 which each lesson has reference. 
 
 In sending this book into the world I wish to state that it 
 has given me more work than I had anticipated ;■ but I feel fully 
 compensated in the thought that it will serve to lighten the 
 burden of our students, and in doing so will make them happier. 
 
 Max S. Moll. 
 Rochester, N. Y., August, 1890. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 (The numbers refer to paragraphs.) 
 
 aber, aUtin, 288. 
 
 Accent, 91-95. 
 
 Accusative with adjectives, 191 ; 
 prepositions, 267-209, 271-274 ; 
 verbs, 225. 
 
 Adjectives, 180-191 ; compound, 
 104 ; comparison of, 185 ; de- 
 clension of, 186-189 ; derivation 
 of, 100 ; formation of, 67-7.3, 81; 
 formed from cardinal numerals, 
 279 ; formed from ordinal num- 
 erals, 280 ; governing the gen- 
 itive case, 190fl ; governing the 
 dative, 190^ ; governing the ac- 
 cusative, 191.; used as nouns, 
 183 ; used as adverbs, 184. 
 
 Adverbs, 231-247 ; comparison of, 
 
 232 ; compound, 106 ; of time, 
 
 233 ; of place, 235 ; of number 
 and order, 237 ; of comparison, 
 239 ; of mode, 241 ; of affirma- 
 tion and negation, 243 ; of inter- 
 rogation, 245. 
 
 altcin, 287. 
 Alphabet, 1. 
 anftott, 250. 
 
 Articles, 109-117 ; contracted, 117 ; 
 
 declension of, 110 ; definite used 
 
 as pronouns, 113 ; pronoun, their 
 
 declension, 114^115 ; use of, 
 
 111-113. 
 au*, 290. 
 au#er, 258. 
 
 Capital letters, use of, 2. 
 Cardinal numerals, 278a. 
 Characteristics of first declension, 
 
 130 ; of second decl., 136 ; of 
 
 third decl., 139; of fourth decl., 
 
 146; of fifth decl., 148. 
 
 Compounds of 3Jtann, 128«; of pre- 
 positions and other words, 276 ; 
 
 Compound, nouns, 103 ; adjectives, 
 104 ; verbs, 105, 214^215 ; ad- 
 verbs, 106. 
 
 Comparison of adjectives, 185 ; of 
 adverbs, 232. ' 
 
 Concrete nouns, division of, 119. 
 
 Conjugation, 193-216; notes to, 199- 
 202; auxiliaries of tense, 203- 
 205; first, active voice, 206 ; first, 
 passive voice, 207; second, 208; 
 third, 209; of modal auxiliaries, 
 210; of reflexive verb, 211 ; of 
 impersonal verb, 212; of impers. 
 reflexive verb, 213; of compound 
 verb separable and inseparable, 
 216. 
 
 Conjunctions, 286-292. 
 
 Consonants, pronunciation and use 
 of, 16-23 ; doubling of, 24-28; 
 compound, 29-39; similar sound- 
 ing, 40-51. 
 
 bag, 166, note. 
 
 Dative with adjectives, 190i ; prepo- 
 sitions, 257-263, 266 ; verbs, 
 224. 
 
 Declension of articles, 110; adjec- 
 tives, 186-189 ; nouns, 129-149; 
 foreign nouns, 148; numerals, 
 282-284 ; pronoun articles, 214- 
 215 ; personal pronoun, 151 ; 
 possessive pron., 160 ; demon- 
 strative pron., 167 ; relative 
 pron., 170; indefinite pron., 175- 
 177. 
 
 benit, 291. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Derivations of nouns, 99 ; of adjec- 
 tives, 100 ; of verbs, 101 ; of 
 «dverbs, 102. 
 
 bieSfeit and jenfcit, 251. 
 
 Diphthongs, 12-15. 
 
 Discriminate between, o and e, 9; 
 and c, 10 ; ii and i, 11; ai and 
 ei, 14 ; b and p, 41-42 ; b and t, 
 43-14 ; d), and j, 45-46 ; f, B, 
 and pi), 47; gS, 18, (f8, d^8 and y, 
 48; i 8, % and ff, 49-50; b8, t8 
 and g, 51 ; the suffixes ig and id^, 
 88-89 ; wann and h)enn, 247 ; 
 Iang8 andlangft, 253; wibei; and 
 wieber, 274. 
 
 Division of words into syllables, 107. 
 
 ein, as article, 110 ; as numeral, g81- 
 283. 
 
 entgegen. 259. 
 
 e8, 158. • 
 
 Examples, to first declension, 133; 
 to second declension, 136 ; to 
 third declension, 143 ; to fourth 
 declension, 146 ; to reflexive 
 pronoun, 156-157; to genitive of 
 personal pronoun, 153-154 ; to 
 possessive pronoun, 162; to com- 
 parison of adjectives, 185 ; to 
 first conjugation, 206-207 ; to 
 second conjugation, 208; to third 
 conjugation, 209; to conjugation 
 of reflexive verb, 211; of imper- 
 sonal verb, 212; of impersonal 
 reflexive verb, 213 ; to compound 
 verb, 215-216 ; to prepositions 
 governing the dative or accusa- 
 tive, 266-267. 
 
 Formation of the plural, rules about, 
 128. 
 
 Formation of words, 97. 
 
 Feminine nouns, 120^. 
 
 Foreign nouns, declension of, 148 
 
 gegen, 272. 
 
 Gender of nouns and rules about, 120. 
 Oenltive with adjectives, 190; with 
 
 verbs, 223 ; with prepositions, 
 
 249-255. 
 
 hahtn, 203. 
 halhtn, 252. 
 ftci#ett, 228. 
 Interjections, 297. 
 ieber, jeglt^er, 176. 
 itmant, Utttmann, 177. 
 IdngS, 253. 
 laffcn, 227. 
 man, 175. 
 inanci)er, 176. 
 
 SDtann, compounds of, 128if. 
 
 SCasculine nouns, 120i7. 
 
 Modal auxiliaries, 210. 
 
 Slodes, 198. 
 
 KTodified vowels, 7-11- 
 
 ndd)ft, 260. 
 
 Neuter nouns, IWc. 
 
 nicmani, 177. 
 
 Notes, to modified vowels, 7 ; to 
 doubling of consonants, 28 ; to 
 the letter 35, 47c; to sufllxes, 
 88-90 ; to declension of feminine 
 nouns, 132; to neuter nouns of 
 third declension, 141 ; to demon-, 
 strative pronouns, 1 66 ; to in- 
 definite pronouns, 178 ; to com- 
 parison of adjectives, 185 ; to 
 declension of adjectives, 186; 
 to conjugations, 196, 199-202; 
 to verbs, 226-230 ; to Iang8, 253. 
 
 Nouns, 118-149; concrete, 119 ; com- 
 pound, 103 ; derivations, 99 ; 
 gender of and rules about, 120 ; 
 with double gender, 121 ; with 
 no singular, 123; with double 
 singular, 124; with no plural, 
 125; with double plural, 126- 
 127; first declension of, 130- 
 133 ; second declension of, 
 135-136; third declension of, 
 138-143; fourth declension of, 
 145-146 ; fifth declension of, 
 148 ; proper, 149 ; numbers of, 
 122. 
 
 Numerals, 277-284. 
 
 06, 261. 
 
 ohnt, fonlier, 273. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Order of words in the sentence, see 
 
 tables, pp. 173 176. 
 Ordinal numerals, 278^. 
 Paronyms of the German language, 
 
 pages 137-172. 
 Plural, rules about the formation of, 
 
 128. 
 Position of verbs, rules about, 217. 
 Prefixes, 53; signification and use 
 
 of, 54-65. 
 
 Prepositions, 248-276; governing 
 the genitive case, 249-255 ; 
 dative, 257-263 ; dative or ac- 
 cusative, 265-269 ; accusative, 
 271-274; compounded with 
 other words, 276- 
 
 Pronunciation of vowels, 3 ; of mo- 
 dified vowels and diphthongs, 
 15; of consonants, 16-23. 
 
 Pronouns, 150-179; personal, 151- 
 158 ; possessive, 159-165 ; de- 
 monstrative, 166-168 ; relative, 
 169-171; interrogative, 172-173 ; 
 indefinite, 174-179. 
 
 Proper names, declension of, 149. 
 
 Readings exercises : pronoun ar- 
 ticles, 116; nouns of first declen- 
 sion, 134 ; nouns of second de- 
 clension, 137 ; nouns of third 
 declension, 144 ; nouns of fourth 
 declension, 147 ; possessive pro- 
 nouns, 165 ; relative pronouns, 
 171 ; interrogative pronouns 
 173; indefinite pronouns, 179; 
 adjectives governing the gen- 
 itive case, 190a ; adjectives gov- 
 erning the dative case, 190^; 
 adjectives governing the accusa- 
 tive case, 191 ; auxiliaries of 
 tense, 218 ; modal auxiliaries, 
 219; impersonal verbs, 220; 
 impersonal reflexive verbs, 221 ; 
 compound verbs, 222 ; verbs 
 governing the genitive case, 223 ; 
 verbs governing the dative case, 
 
 224; verbs governing the accusa- 
 tive case, 225 ; adverbs of time, 
 234 ; adverbs of place, 236 ; 
 adverbs of number and order, 
 238; adverbs of comparison, 240; 
 adverbs of mode, 242 ; adverbs 
 of affirmation and negation, 
 244 ; adverbs of interrogation, 
 246 ; , prepositions governing 
 the genitive case, 256; the 
 dative, 264; the dative or accu- 
 sative case, 270 ; the accusative, 
 275 ; numerals, 285 ; conjunc- 
 tions copulative, 293; conj. ad- 
 versative, 294; conj. causal, 295; 
 conj. subordinate, 296 ; inter- 
 jections, 298. 
 
 Biefiexives, pronouns, 156-157 ; 
 verbs, 211, 213, 221, 224</, 225*. 
 
 Relative pronoun, 169-171. 
 
 Rules, about the gender, 120; about 
 formation of the plural, 128; 
 about verbs, 199-202 ; about the 
 position of verbs, 217. 
 
 fomt, 262. 
 
 feiti, 204. 
 
 felber, fcIBft, 178. 
 
 ft*, 156. 
 
 fonbcr, 273. 
 fonbern, 289. 
 
 Sound of and ii, how to produce it, 
 
 7, note. 
 Speech, parts of, 108. 
 Stems, 98. 
 Suffixes, their use and signification, 
 
 66-87 ; notes to, 88-90. 
 Syllatjles, 52 and 53. 
 Syntax, 299-310. 
 Tenses, 197. 
 Transitive verbs, notes about, 226- 
 
 230. 
 ttauen, 230. 
 tro#, 254. 
 «m, 292. 
 um ttitten, 252. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Verbs, 192-230; compounds, 105; 
 division of, 192; conjugation of, 
 193-216 ; governing the genitive 
 case, 223 ; the dative case, 224 ; 
 the accusative case, 225; notes 
 to, 199-202, 225-229; list of 
 irregular, pages 125-133; rules 
 about the position of, 217. 
 
 »etftd)ern, 229. 
 
 t)on, 263. 
 
 Vowels, long, 3 ; short, 4 ; double, 
 5-6 ; modified, 7-11. 
 
 wann and loenn, 247. 
 toegen, 252. 
 
 tverben, 205. 
 tniber, 274. 
 
 Words, 96 ; division into syllables, 
 
 107 ; formation of, 97-102. 
 Words written with, capital initial 
 
 letters, 2; 00, 5a; ee, 5i; 00, be; 
 
 Oi, 13; \j after t, 23; 5^ as ini 
 
 tial, 30 ; bt, 33 ; 5Pf as initial, 34; 
 
 <P^, as initial, 35; % », 47; 
 
 1^8 having the sound of f, 48* ; 
 
 r, 48f; ig as suffix, 88; td^ as 
 
 suffix, 89. 
 Words written now witkoui ^ 
 
 after t, 22. 
 
 jufplge, 255. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The German Language is one of the oldest. Its develop- 
 ment has kept pace with that of the German people. Like all 
 languages it has different dialects. The difference between the 
 " High German " and the dialects is, that it gives to every vowel 
 the pure and clear sound which belongs to it. The Alphabet, 
 being the foundation stone upon which the structure of the 
 language is built, must be pronounced pure, free from all foreign 
 accent. Therefore, never compare the German letters with those 
 of the English alphabet, as : a is a ; e is e ; i is i ; J is z, etc., 
 but call them always by their German names. 
 
ALPHABET. 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 1. THE LETTERS AND THEIR CORRECT 
 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 German Letters. - Pronunciation. 
 
 a % ^ ^ ah (as in far), 
 b «, J^^ ba * 
 
 t ^, ^ /^ 
 
 tsa, 
 
 »v^ 
 
 pa, 
 
 b ®, yc?i^ 
 
 da, 
 
 q Q, ^ ^ 
 
 koo. 
 
 -'■'^ 
 
 a. 
 
 r 9t, ^ ^ 
 
 er, 
 
 \ % J'q/' 
 
 f, 
 
 f, 8 @y^ ^ ^ 
 
 s, 
 
 '^v/' 
 
 ga (hard). 
 
 t St, ^^ 
 
 ta, 
 
 **■// 
 
 hah. 
 
 u a «^^ 
 
 00, 
 
 \ ^, J q7 
 
 e, 
 
 33, ^ ^ fo. 
 
 N, (fowl), 
 
 ' V ^ 
 
 yut, 
 
 toSB, _^^^ 
 
 va. 
 
 \ S, .^^^r:^ 
 
 kah, 
 
 f X, ^ ^2?^ 
 
 iks. 
 
 I «, -^5^ 
 
 1, 
 
 'V^ 
 
 ipsilon, 
 
 nt5K, _^^ 
 
 m, 
 
 ,3.^/ 
 
 tset. 
 
 German Letters. Pronunciation. 
 
 O, 
 
 * The unmarked " a " has the English sound. 
 
USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 3 
 
 3. USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 
 
 Capital letters are given : 
 
 a. To every noun and to all other words used as nouns : 
 ®er SSRonn, the man ; ber 5Retc^e, the rich ; ba8 (Serene, the 
 beautilul ; bag Jiefett, the reading ; bag „9Benn" unb ba« „2lber", 
 the " if " and the " but " ; (ber Wcm ber ba8 "SBentt" unb iaS) 
 „2lber" erfanb, the man. who invented the " if " and the " but "). 
 Also to adjectives connected with the words, „cttt)a8,'' something ; 
 „t)tet," much ; „tlt^t8," nothing ; etttaS ®ii)oneg, something beau- 
 tiful ; Otet ®Ute8, much good ; nt(f|tg ®d^tec^te8, nothing bad. 
 
 b. To the first word of a sentence. 
 
 c. To the first word after a period ; also after interrogation 
 and exclamation points, if they close the sentence ; also to the 
 first word in direct speech after a quotation mark. 
 
 d. To adjectives and ordinals having the article, and 
 standing after the proper noun : SBtl^elm ber @rfte, WilUam the 
 Pirst ; griebrtlf) ber ®ro|e, Frederick the Great. 
 
 e. To pronouns which refer to the second person, especially 
 in letters and titles. 
 
 /. To adjectives derived from proper names of persons and 
 those derived from cities in „er" : Me ©rtmitt'fc^en Wox6)tXl, the 
 fairy tales of Grimm ; bcr SiJlnCt "Som, the cathedral of Cologne. 
 
 All other words are written with small initial letters, 
 especially : 
 
 r. Substantives taking the meaning of other words and 
 used as : 
 
 a. Prepositions : angeficf)tg, in face (view) of ; befjufS, for 
 the purpose of ; fraft, in virtue of ; tlttltete, by means of ; tro^, 
 in spite of, etc. 
 
 b. Conjunction : fatiS, in case. 
 
 c. Indefinite numerals : ein btStfien, etn mentg, a little ; ein 
 ^jaar, a few. 
 
 d. Adverbs : attfangS, in the beginning ; tette, partly ; 
 IttorgenS, in the morning ; abenbS, in the evening, etc. 
 
 ,?. In other connections : mir ift angft, I am afraid ; boS 
 t[t fc^abe, it is a pity ; t^ bin Wttleng, I am willing ; fie pit ^au8, 
 she keeps house ; in ftanb fe^en, to enable ; er nimmt teil, he takes 
 part, etc. 
 
4 VOWELS. 
 
 2. All pronouns (except those in 2. e.) and numerals, as : 
 man, one ; jcmanb, somebody ; tttemanb, nobody ; jeber, ein jegtt^crr 
 every one ; etnev, one ; fetner, no one ; ber etne, the one ; ber, bte, 
 bag anbere, the other ; atte, all ; etlic^e, eintge, mand)C, some ; etwaS, 
 something ; nicE|t8, nothing ; Otele, many ; bte librtgen, the rest ; 
 \>a.^ meifte, the most ; ber ttamlic^e, the same ; ber erfte, le^te, the 
 first, last ; ber na(i)fte, the next. 
 
 3. All adjectives derived from proper nouns in \\6), as ; 
 amerifontfc^, American ; romifd), Roman, etc. 
 
 VOWELS. ©clbfHrtttte* 
 
 3. Vowels are either long or short ; otherwise their sound 
 never changes. They are long : 
 
 a. When doubled : ^ttttr, hair, (like a in far) ; ^tti, bed, 
 (garden), (like a in fate) ; -SoOt, boat, (like o in note); i and U 
 never double. 
 
 b. When followed by 1^ : ©trt^l, steel ; 9JJc^l, flour ; i^n, 
 him ; Sl>l)n, wages ; Stttl^I, chair. 
 
 c. In open syllables : 3Jta4er, painter ; Ie=ben, live ; ©t=bet, 
 bible ; Io=ben, praise ; mu=tig, courageous. 
 
 d. „t" is also long when followed by silent e : licbett, love ; 
 OiCl, much. 
 
 4. They are short : 
 
 a. Before double consonants : SaH, ball ; Satf, lac, (like o in 
 frock) ; gett, skin, (like e in fell) ; fttd, still, (like i in still); Oott, 
 full, (like u in dull); 3JJutter, mother, (like u in put). 
 
 b. Before two or more dissimilar consonants : ©attS, sand ; 
 §elD, hero ; §itt, shepherd ; gotft, forest ; 8uft, air. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. (Long vowels). 
 
 2trt, Sar8, S«rt,'[§rtr5, 
 
 $crb, 
 Srcbs, sRagb, SKonb, 5^apft, 
 
 ^fcrb, 
 nftc^ft, nebft, ftct«, ®cf)h)crt, 
 
 ©bft, 
 2:roft, a3iigt, jurt, ^ropft. 
 
 manner, perch, beard, rosin, 
 
 hearth, 
 crab, maid-servant, moon, pope, 
 
 horse, 
 next-to, with, always, sword, 
 
 fruit, 
 comfort, bailiff, tender, provost. 
 
MODIFIED VOWELS. O 
 
 c. Final unaccented C is pronounced very short, like e in met, 
 thus : SJa'me, name ; Sie'be, love. 
 
 5. Words written with double vowels : 
 
 a. With rtrt : 3lat, eel ; 3Iar, eagle ; 2laS, carrion ; ^aar, hair ; 
 iPaar, pair ; and :paar, a few ; ®aot, hall ; ©aat, seed ; Staat, 
 state. 
 
 b. With ec : Stltce, avenue ; 2lrmee, army ; Seere, berry ; S3eet, 
 bed in garden ; S^auffee, turnpike road ; %tt, fairy ; grtfaffee, 
 fricassee ; Oaleere, galley ; ®elee, jelly ; ^ttt, host, army ; 
 tter^eeren, devastate ; -3bee, idea ; Saffee, coffee ; Sanapee, canopy ; 
 ^tee, clover ; l?rafee(, a brawl ; 8ee, lee ; Icer, empty ; StOrec, livery ; 
 ^orbeer, laurel ; WttX, ocean ; Wo\6)tt, mosque ; ^orree, Spanish 
 leek ; 5Reebc, roadstead ; 9teeber, owner of ship ; fl^Kl, squint ; 
 @d^nce, snow ; See, lake or sea ; ©eele, soul ; @|)eer, spear ; Sleer, 
 tar ; %i)tt, tea. 
 
 c. With 00 : Soot, boat ; 9JJoor, marsh ; 3JtooS, moss. 
 
 6. Discriminate between : Slate, eels and Sl^Ie, awl ; 9lar 
 and 2lr, are, n.; Slrmee, army and 9lrme, arms of body ; f)eer, host 
 and ))tX, hither ; leeren, to empty, and lefjren, to teach ; SKeer, 
 ocean and Hte^r, more ; 9?eebe, roadstead and 9?ebe, speech ; ©eett, 
 lakes and fe^en, to see ; 2Jioor, marsh and 3Jto^r, moor ; SDSoageit, 
 scales and SGBagett, wagon. 
 
 MODIFIED VOWELS. Uitttaute. 
 
 7. a. 3t, % itsi long sound is like ai in fairy ; its short sound 
 like ' a ' in fflt. Long : Siir, bear ; SSater, fathers. Short, flatter, 
 pi. of Slatt, leaf ; (ilter, comp. of olt, old. 
 
 b. O, 0* has almost the sound of u in urn. Long : 5be, 
 desolate ; 6ofe, bad. Short : ©Otter, pi. of ®Ott, god. 
 
 ^. U, it,* has no equal sound in the English language, it is 
 pronounced like the " u " in the French word " plus ". Long in 
 iiber, over ; 53ritber, pi. of Sruber, brother. Short in [)ilbf(f), pretty ; 
 
 fUIIen, to fill. 
 
 *NoTE. — To produce the sounds of and U, point the mouth 
 and pronounce e and t. 
 
 8. Modified vowels are not doubled in the plural of a noun in 
 which the vowel is double in the singular : 3lfer, pi. of SlaS ; ©iile, 
 pi. of ®aal. 
 
MODIFIED VOWELS. 
 
 tt 
 
 9. Discriminate between : 
 
 St^re, ear of grain and 
 
 Sd&ViV., pi. of mt 
 gftrfe, heifer 
 
 ®rftte, bone of a fish " 
 ®eh)ft^r, guarantee 
 
 l^ftngft, 2. pers. of l^ttngen, 
 
 hang 
 t&lttx, comp. of Mt, 
 
 cold 
 Irt^men, to cripple " 
 
 Sftrc^e, larch " 
 
 M&xt, story, aJtft^re, 
 
 horse " 
 
 fagen, to saw " 
 
 rftd^en, to revenge " 
 
 diabiv, pi. of stab, wheel " 
 @ct)tt)ftr, abscess " 
 
 ft&i)ten, to temper " 
 
 toft^rcn, to last " 
 
 St&He, pi. of ©tall, stable " 
 (Strange, pi. of Strang, 
 
 rope " 
 
 roft^r^aft, durable " 
 
 S<l^e, tough 
 
 @^re, honor. 
 Sceren, pi. of Scere. 
 ?5crfe, heel ; 33erfe, verses. 
 ®rcte, abr. of Sfiargarete. 
 ©ewetjr, gun. 
 
 §eng|"t, stallion. 
 
 Setter, wine-press. 
 
 tCl^men, to cover with loam. 
 
 Scrrfie, lark. 
 
 SJJcere, pi. of STOeer, ocean. 
 @Cgen, blessing. 
 SRcd^en, rake. 
 9tceber, owner of a ship. 
 [cE)toCr, heavy. 
 
 ftef)Ien, to steal, 
 wc^ren, to resist, 
 ©telle, place. 
 
 ©trCttge, severity, 
 me^r^ft, capable of defend- 
 ing one's self. 
 3c^e, toe. 
 
 10. Discriminate between : 
 
 ^dfe, pi. of §of, court and §efe, dregs. 
 
 ^oHe, hell " ^Clle, clearness. 
 
 SiJrbe, pi. of Sorb, basket " Scrbe, notch, 
 
 tonnen, to be able " fennen, to know. 
 
 Idfen, to loosen " Icfcn, to read. 
 
 aJid^re, carrot " SJteere, oceans. 
 
 @<»^ne, pi. of @o[)n, son " (Scl^ne, sinew. 
 
DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 tl 
 
 11. Discriminate between: 
 
 Siil^ne, stage and 
 
 ©iingen, to dung " 
 
 ©iinM, presumption " 
 giirft, prince 
 
 .fftr, for 
 Oerftd^t, rumor 
 ftt^I, cool 
 fft^n, bold 
 
 Sttfte, coast " 
 
 Iftgen, to lie 
 
 milffen, to be forced " 
 rfi^men, to praise " 
 
 f^Jttten, to rinse " 
 
 ©iiben, south " 
 
 Zifiix, door " 
 
 ■ iDttft, waste 
 Bttge, pi of 3ug, train " 
 •> Buget, rein 
 
 Sietie, bee. 
 
 Singen, to hire. 
 
 SDitifel, spelt. 
 
 0lrfte, ridge (house sum- 
 
 mit). 
 Dier, four. 
 
 ®erid)t, court, mess. 
 Siel, quill ; keel. 
 Sten, resinous wood, 
 aHfte, box. 
 Itegen, to lie (on), 
 mtffett, to miss. 
 Siiemen, strap. 
 \pUlm, to play, 
 fieben, to seeth. 
 'ititV, animal. 
 aStlift, whist. 
 3iege, goat. 
 3iegel, brick. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. ^otfpeUaute. 
 
 13. The Diphthongs are: rti {atji), ei ; these have the 
 sound of i. Ex. : Saifer, emperor ; Mai, May ; ettt, a. 
 
 rttt has the sotind of ou in mouse. Ex : SD'iauS, §au8. 
 
 Hu and CU have the soupd of oy in oyster. Ex. : SKSufe, pi. 
 of 3Jiau« ; §(iute, pi. of §aut, skin ; fieute, to-day. 
 
 13. The following words are writtpn with at: ^at, bay; 
 Sotern, Bavaria ; §at, 'shark ; §atn, grove ; Sat, quay ; Satfer, 
 emperor ; 8aib, loaf ; 8at(^, spawn ; Sate, laymen ; Safai, footman ; 
 Wai or Wtat) ; aWatb, Maiden ; SWailanb, Milan ; Wlain, river 
 Main ; ajjaittj, city Mayence ; Wtai^, maize ; ajjotflf), mash ; 9?atn, 
 green boundary of fields ; Statlttunb, Raymond ; 8tat, ray (fish) ; 
 9taife, jackdaw, (bird) ; Sotte, string on instrument ; SBatb, woad ; 
 SGBatfe, orphan ; ^Otf, ingot. 
 
8 CONSONANTS. 
 
 ai ei 
 
 14. Discriminate between : 
 
 8atb, loaf and 8etb, body. 
 
 Iat(^en, to spawn, " 8ei(^en, pi, corpses. 
 
 'iSlain, main, " mein, mine. 
 
 9toin, " retii, clean. 
 
 (gatte, " ©cite, side. 
 
 SBatfe, " SGSetfe, m. sage ; f. mode. 
 
 15. Be careful in the pronunciation of the modified vowels 
 and diphthongs. Do not say befe for biJfe ; fier for ftir ; f(^Cn 
 for jc^on ; Incite for petite ; bctt[(^ for betttf^ ; SBeimt for ©ftunte. 
 
 If in doubt whether a word is spelled with e, or ft ; eu or fiu, 
 find the root, or the singular of the word ; thus : tfinger from 
 Irtng ; mftc^ttg from Wta^t ; 8«nber from 8<tnb ; SWrtufe from 
 SKaug; §aute from §aut. 
 
 CONSONANTS. Ttitlautc. 
 
 16. Consonants are not always pronounced alike, but their 
 sound changes, according to their position. The following 
 consonants belong to this class : 
 
 17. ©, C, has the sound of j (ts) before d, e, t t), el). Ex. 
 Siifar, Seber, Sirfular, S^ru8, Sexton. The hard sound of k, 
 before a, 0, U, OU, and before consonants. Ex. Safe (ba§) ; 
 Sobej; Surator; Soufin; (Slaret. 
 
 18. ®, 9, has the sound of g in go at the beginning of a 
 word or syllable, thus : ®olb, gut, Iii=gen. 
 
 19. g takes the sound of (^ in tt^ at »the end of a word or 
 syllable, if immediately after „\," thus: Siinig — Sotlt^ ; giitig — 
 giitic^ ; but : Soni^fltll, giiti=9er, with hard g. „ng" has the sound 
 oi'ng' in long, thus : lattg ; brittflen. 
 
 20. ® takes the sound of „3" as in the French word " je I, " 
 
 in the following words : ®elee, gentat, ®ente, genteren, ©enbarm, 
 generiia, Cogc, 8ogt8, logteren. 
 
 31. ^ as a sign of lenghtening the vowel is silent, and used 
 only in stem syllables, especially such as either begin with % 
 
DOUBLING OF CONSONANTS. 9 
 
 as jE^al, 5tl)0n, or whose last letter is t, nt, tt, r ; as : fa^(, l?'0^l, 
 fiit)t, 9ia[)m, taljm, Itin, Sla^n, Dt^r, fetjr. Before other consonants 
 it is found in the words : ge^be, 2Jiat)t), ®rat)t, 9Jci[)f. 
 
 33. ^ after ,,2" has been dropped in the following words : 
 Sttem, S3litte, STcit, 3lntett, beteiOgen, Urteit, SSortetl, 2;au, STeer, 
 2:ier, teuer, Berteibigen, ©igentum, and all other words ending in 
 turn : Ungetiim ; SJiut and all words ending in mut : f^twt/ ©'"*/ 
 Oerat, Sot, got, SERiete ajiet, 9Jot, notigcn, ^ate, 9?at, raten, SHatfel, 
 rot, 9tdte, 3tute, Slurm, Wert, SBert; SBirt, S[But. 
 
 33. The following words still retain the I) after X : 
 S^at, 2:f)on (clay), 2::^or, Z\}van, SE^rane, 2:f)ron, ST^at, l^un, 
 X^nv, Untert^an and proper names and foreign words, as : Sert^a, 
 Sai^ebrale. 
 
 DOUBLING OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 34. They are doubled in stena syllables with a short vowel, 
 noi ending with several dissimilar consonants. Ex : fif)Clttett, (to 
 sound), @[f)att, fd)attt, but fiJ)alten, (to rule), with one I, because 
 the stem syllable ends with two dissimilar consonants, viz.: 
 \ and t. But, are the dissimilar consonants due to inflection, 
 then the consonant is doubled : fotttt, fottttft ; but Sunft (with 
 one tl only). In the word fotinft „\i" is the sign of the 2d person 
 singular ; but in Sunft „ft" belongs to the stem, hence the „lt'' is 
 not doubled. 
 
 35. No doubling of consonants occurs after a long 
 vowel or modified vowel and after diphthongs : fam, regen, bieten, 
 rufen, Ofen, 8a!en, 9toum, ©eij, tjeijen, Shreus- 
 
 36. (f and %t (which stands for !f and Jj) never occur 
 after I, m. It, r: @(f)atf, ©alj, §oIs, franf, ©c^enf, ft'rons, SBert 
 §era, arjt. 
 
 37. The doubling is also avoided in short monosyllables, 
 as : Ob, att, bin, biS, ba6, be8, e§, gen, f)in, in, tm, man, mil, ob, con, 
 ttas, wea, weg. 
 
 38. The doubling is dropped in compound words : 
 aSatnug instead of SBattnul ; bennoi^ instead of benttnoc^ ; 5Kittag 
 instead of SUJitttag ; @iJ)iffa^rt instead of @cE)ifffaI)rt. 
 
 Note. — The consonant of an accented final syllable when 
 lengthened is doubled, as : Sliintgtn, =gtttnen ; 3Itt8, 4<fe ; 
 iOer^altntS, m^i. 
 
10 COMPOUND CONSONANTS. 
 
 COMPOUND CONSONANTS. 
 
 29. &f), Hf, has the guttural, hawking sound after a, 0, U^ 
 au, : SBai), 8oc^, 53uc^, 9taU(i). After other vowels and diphthongs 
 it has the softer, more palatal sound, as in : t(^, Ittid^, Vti6). 
 
 30. &t)f <J), in the beginning of a word is pronounced : 
 
 a. Like „S" in : S^aoS, E^arafter, S^amaleon, g^atbiia^ 
 g^arfrettag, S^lor, S()erub, S[)oIera, &)ov, S^oral, S^orift, (5^oro=^ 
 graphic, S^reftomat^te, S^rte, Shrift, S^rom, diromattfd), S^ronif,. 
 S^ronotogie, S^ronometer, ifironift^. 
 
 6. Like <S(i), ]6) in : S^atfc, (f|amotS, S^ampagner, (S^ompignon, 
 Stance, li^angieren, S^arabe, Sfjaritd, (5t)artoari, S^arlatan, diarmant, 
 Sfiarpie, E^aui'fee, S^ef, Sfiemtfette, c^coalereSf, (S^tfane, S^tffre, 
 S^tgnoit, S^trurg. 
 
 c. Like the d) in t(^ : Sf|emie, S^imare, S^tna, S^tnefe. 
 
 31. d>§ has the sound of f : !©aif)8— ©ay, |^ud)8— guf. 
 
 32. a stands for ff : 9iocfe— 9tc)fte, 6arfen— batfett. 
 
 33. I>t : this compound consonant is a shortening of the 
 syllable „bet" and occurs only there, where the stem syllable ends 
 in b, as : gefant^t from gefent>Ct. The e is dropped and the b 
 is silent. The following words are written with bt : fanl>te (from 
 fenben), ftanlJte (mcnben), ia9t (labert), beiuanftt, •33en)an5)tni8, 
 gcteant»t, @eiDanl>t^ctt, oertoaitJJt, SBermani»ter, gefanJJt, ®efanJ>ter, 
 berei>t (eloquent), but 33ereJ)fanttett (eloquence). @tai>t (city) 
 and all its derivations. 
 
 34. ^f, ^f. In pronouncing this comp. consonant press the 
 lips closely together before uttering the f, something like ph in 
 camphor. 
 
 The following words are written with ^f at the beginning : 
 ^fab, path ; ^tlff^- priest ; ^fa^t, post ; ^falj, Palatinate ; ^fonb, 
 pledge ; ipfaime, pan ; ^fant, parsonage ; ^fau, peacock ; ^feffe ', 
 pepper ; ^fetfe, pipe ; ^fetl, arrow ; ^fercf), dung ; '^JSferb, horse ; 
 ^fiff, whistle ; ^ftttgften, pentecost ; ^fifirif), peach ; ^flattje, 
 plant ; 'iPftafter, plaster, pavement ; 'iPflaUltie, plum ; ^flege, 
 nursing ; WW' duty ; ^ftod, pJug ; 'iPflug, plow ; ^forte, gate ; 
 'iPfofte, post ; ^fote, paw ; ^ffiem, punch ; 'iPfropf, cork ; ^friinbc, 
 prebend ; ^fu^I, pool ; pfui, fye ; ^funb, pound ; ^fuf(i)er, 
 botcher ; ^fU^e, pool. 
 
SIMILAR SOUNDING CONSONANTS. 11 
 
 35. ^tf, ptf, is pronounced like f. As initial it occurs in the 
 following words : 'ip^antafie, 'ip^antaft, ^l^armaceut (jeut), ^f|tlan« 
 t^rop, ^l^tlofop:^, ^f)iole, ^^tegma, ^^oSp^or, ^t)otograpf)te, 'ip^rafe, 
 ^^^fil, ^l^l^fiognomte. Otherwise ipi) occurs only in the word 
 (Spl^eu, ivy, and the foreign words ending in fopf), grop^. 
 
 36. Sm, Utt is pronounced like Sw, to: Quol— toal ; 
 Quelle— toetle. 
 
 37. ®<ft, fcb like sh : S3u[d^, fc^on. 
 
 38. H, sz (es-tset) like sharp ^ : mu|, 3Jiu|e, t)ei^en. 
 
 39. ti like 5t (tse) : 9totton— 'iJJajion. 
 
 SIMILAR SOUNDING CONSONANTS. 
 
 40. " Write as you speak," is the fundamental rule of 
 German Orthography. This can be done where the sound is 
 distinctly audible ; but it often occurs that the last sound cannot 
 be clearly distinguished. In such cases the word should be 
 lengthened, thus : $an& (sounds like §ont), $ani)e ; ^let^ 
 (sounds like S(ett), SletJet ; (S(|uf>, ©(^ufje ; guf} (not U8) giifec ; 
 3Jiau§ (not %) StRiiltfC. The similar sounding consonants are : 
 
 41. ft and <>. The sound of p is often heard in words 
 written with b and vice versa.. With b are spelled : 2lbt, abbot ; 
 Srbfe, pea ; $erbft, autumn ; ^iibfi^, pretty ; ftYebS, crab ; Dbft, 
 fruit. With If are spelled : ^apft, pope ; ^ropft, provost ; §aupt, 
 head ; 3)?0p8, pug-dog ; 9top8, rape seed. 
 
 43. Discriminate between : 
 
 ftacfett, to bake and padm, to pack. 
 
 JBader, baker " ^Mtx, one who packs. 
 
 aSa^re, bier " ^Paare, pi. of ^aar, pair, 
 
 ftar, bare, cash " 5Paar, pair ; paar, a few. 
 
 25a|, base (music) " ^a|, a pass, 
 
 ©aft, bast " ^a^t (paffen), to fit. 
 
 . 25etcr, one who prays, " Jpetev, Peter. 
 SSein, leg " ^etii, pain. 
 
 SSlatt, leaf " ^latt, flat. 
 
 - IBo^le, plank " ^jjole, a native of poland. 
 
 fto^ren, to bore " 5)Soren, pi. poTes. 
 
 ftraffen, to brace " ^raffen, to gluttonize. 
 
 Dfter, upper " D^Jer, opera, 
 
 rau&en, to rob " 9tau<)en, pi. caterpillars. 
 
12 
 
 SIMILAR SOUNDING CONSONANTS. 
 
 43. 5 and t. According to the new orthography we write : 
 jTob, death, and all its derivations, as : STobbett, deathbed ; 
 tobmiibe, tired to death ; tbbltc^, mortally, etc. But, tot, dead ; ber 
 Sote, the dead ; toteit, to kill ; Jotfi^lag, homicide ; STotengraber, 
 gravedigger, etc. With t also ; Srot, Srnte, @(f)ttert, gcfii)eit. 
 
 44. Discriminate between : 
 
 Sai>, n. bath and 
 
 bteSer, honest " 
 
 53ol)en, m. ground 
 Sun>, m. band, union 
 ®aube, f. stave 
 Sei(^, m. dike 
 ®t(fe, f. thickness, 
 Sir, thee, 
 ®rttre, third 
 Sorf, n. village 
 @ll^e, n. end 
 (Sell), n. money 
 §aW»e, f. slope 
 
 5?bl>er, m. bait 
 letDen, to suffer 
 SWarlJer, m. marten 
 9)tanl»el, f. almond 
 il5ui)er, m. powder (face) 
 dit9t, f. a speech 
 fetl> (2. pers. pi. of fittl) 
 
 are. 
 @eil>e, f. silk 
 aBal)e, f. calf (of the 
 • leg) 
 
 bat, imp. of bitten, beg. 
 
 •93tcter, m. bidder. 
 
 Spten, pi. messengers. 
 
 bunt, colored. 
 
 ^aube, f. dove. 
 
 S^eii^, m. pond. 
 
 ^Me, f. malice. 
 
 2^ter, n. animal. 
 
 S^rttte, pi. steps. 
 
 2;orf, m. turf. 
 
 Silte, f. duck. 
 
 ®elt! inter), is it not so ? 
 
 ^alte, 1. pers. pres. of fatten, 
 
 keep. 
 Soter, m. cur. 
 tetten, to lead. 
 SJiarter, f. torture. 
 SDiantel, m. mantle. 
 ^Uter, m. turkey. 
 diatt, pi. of 9tat, counselor. 
 
 [ett, since. 
 @ette, f. side. 
 
 SBate, f. shallow place in 
 water. 
 
 iff and g and i» 
 
 45. Many Germans give to the letter g in some words (see 
 below) a softer guttural sound, somewhat like the di) in jDoI^^ ; 
 also the sound of i (t)) in a great many words (besides those 
 mentioned in T^1[ 19, 20). While we prefer to give to that 
 letter its natural hard sound (like g in go), except in those 
 
SIMILAR SOUNDING CONSONANTS. 
 
 13 
 
 words coming under the rules of TIT 19, 2°, we deem it necessary 
 to call the attention of the student to this usage and to those 
 words, whose only difference lies in the one letter C^ or g 
 and which, if pronounced alike, must mislead the student. 
 Therefore 
 
 46. Discriminate between : 
 
 aniadjen, to smile and 
 
 upon 
 SBnOf, n. book 
 
 (Sttfjen, pi. oaks, eit^en, 
 
 to guage 
 g(U(ft, m. curse " 
 
 gebciU^t, convex 
 QaUft, f. yacht 
 Weiftcn, to creep " 
 
 fta(J)en, to crash " 
 
 Catf^e, f. a pool " 
 
 2odf, n. hole 
 maOftr f. might 
 9kd>en, m. skiff 
 reJ^en, m. to rake " 
 
 9ted)en, m. rake ; rack " 
 rei(J)en, to reach " 
 
 fa(J>te, slowly " 
 
 fied^en, to languish " 
 
 Zti(S), m. pond " 
 
 SBai^e, f. guard 
 ttarfjen, to watch " 
 
 SBoi^e, f. week 
 3etd)en, n. mark, sign " 
 lXoex(tf, across, askance " 
 
 Slnlaflen, pi. pleasure- 
 grounds. 
 
 S3ug, m. shoulder, (of 
 animal). 
 
 etgen, own. 
 ^hlQ, m. flight, 
 gefieugt, bent. 
 
 3a9b, f. hunt, 
 frtegeii, to obtain. 
 Srajjen, m. collar. 
 Safle, f. site, position. 
 809, n. (Mar.) log. 
 Sfficiflb, f. maid-servant, 
 imoen, to gnaw. 
 regen, to stir, 
 ategen, rain. 
 dtuQitt, m. a dance, 
 fagte, said. 
 fiegetl, to vanquish. 
 'H-ttQ, m. dough. 
 SBajje, f. scale, 
 toafletl, to venture. 
 SBoge, f. wave. 
 Setgen, to show. 
 3wer5, m. dwarf. 
 
 f?, f; S, t>; m> Pif* 
 
 47. g, f ; 33, ; ^^, pi), have the sound of f. 
 
 fl. SB, l>, at the beginning occurs in the following words : 
 SSater, father ; 25ei(c^en, violet ; 23cr8, verse, and all words 
 beginning with UX-- ; 33etter, cousin ; 23te^, cattle ; titcl, much ; 
 
14 SIMILAR SOUNDING CONSONANTS. 
 
 Uter, four ; 33Iie|, fleece ; SSogel, bird ; S3ogt, bailiff ; SSoIf, people ; 
 DoH, full, and all words beginning with t)0(I=; Cofltg, entirely; 
 t)Ott, from ; BOr, before, and all words beginning with Bor= ; tiorber, 
 anterior, fore- ; Ooni, in front. 
 
 b. SS in the middle of the following words : f^eoel, misdeed ; 
 ©etiotter, godfather , 3"f effi^t, confidence ; jUOorberft, before all. 
 
 c. 25 at the end only in 6i'at), brave. 
 
 Note. — „33" never occurs before a consonant except in the 
 word SSIie^ ; also not before U and ii in all German words. 
 
 48. To avoid mistakes in words, having the sound of these 
 consonants in groups as above, we refer to the following rules : 
 
 a. Stem syllables in g and I retain these letters before f, 8, 
 thus : ffugS, quickly ; stem : glug, flight ; ^ftcffet, chopped straw ; 
 stem : l^arfeit, to chop ; SltiiJS, a bow of courtesy ; fatdfen, to 
 bow ; stem : fiitdcn, to break by bending ; SledS, fiedfcn, blot, to 
 blot ; stem : Sled, fleden ; ftrodS, straightly ; stem : ftrad. In the 
 genitive of some nouns as : 9JJtttag8, S^abofS. Also in abridged 
 compound words, as : inag'8, (formog e8) ; fcig'8, (for fage e8). 
 
 b. d>§ is used in : Sl^fe, axle ; 9ld)fet, shoulder ; ®UC^86oum, 
 box (tree) ; 39itl^[e, box, rifle ; 3)ad)§, badger ; SDeiC^fet, neap ; 
 bredlfeln, to turn ; ©rerflfler, turner ; ©be^fc, lizard ; i^ec^fer, vine- 
 shoot ; %iOi.^%, flax ; W6i\t, sinew ; ^ni)%, fox ; ©eWttl^S, plant ; 
 §e(^fc, knee-joint ; 8ad^§, salmon ; 8u^8, lynx ; DcE)8, ox ; ©ai^fen, 
 Saxony ; fSdlftfc^, Saxon ; fcd^S, six ; 2Ba^8, wax ; toad)fen, to 
 grow ; aStSei^fel, a change ; tte^fetn, to change ; SBtl^fe, blacking ; 
 totclfen, to black ; 2Bu(f|8, growth, 
 
 c. tt (x) is used in the following German words : 3l)Ct, ax ; 
 gaye, trick, (mostly used in plural, gayetl) ; t^trftem, fixed star ; 
 ,^Cye, witch ; Suy, share in a mine ; SJiof, Max ; 9Jtf, water sprite ; 
 9iiye, water-nymph ; Df^oft, hogshead ; %^t, tax ; STeyt, te~xt ; 
 and in many foreign words used in the German language. 
 
 49. ®, f, has a soft and hard sound. 
 
 a. It is soft at the beginning of a word or syllable, before 
 a vowel : fo — zo ; fiebctl — zeeben ; SRofe, §iiufer. Also at the end 
 
SYLLABLES. 15 
 
 •of words which are abridged by dropping the end i, substituting 
 it by an apostrophe, thus : ttietf (for ttetfc), wise ; §af (for §afe), 
 ihare. The soft sound is always indicated by (long) f or ®. 
 
 d. It has the hard hissing sound of the English s before 
 consonants : ©tlobe, slave. 
 
 c. @, f, takes the sound of sh before p and t at the beginning 
 of a word or syllable : ®^)iet— ©C^^Jtel (shpeel) ; Oerfte^en— Oer= 
 f (f)te^en. But if the word ends in fte, ften, or fpe, fpen, the f retains 
 the sound of s, thus : erfte, SBefpe, toften, 3Befl3en. 
 
 50. The hard sound is indicated by : 6, % ff. , 
 
 a. By § at the end of a word or syllable : e§, U^, §au8. 
 This 8 is called „@^Iu^ 8" (final s) find is a substitute for f at 
 the end of a word or syllable. 
 
 i. By fs if preceded by a long vowel : aj?u|e, bii|eit, or at 
 the end after a short vowel : SBi% ^a% inu|. 
 
 c. By If only in the middle of the word, if preceded by a 
 short vowel : 28affer, aJteffer, ©tffen, gloffen, miiffen. 
 
 51. As 8 after b and t at the end of a word or syllable, is 
 •either the result of inflection or a suffix, it can be easily distin- 
 guished from fj, which is always part of the stem. The following 
 examples will explain : 8Qtti>§fne^t— Stted)t be« ?anb8 (8 is here 
 the result of inflection, Genitive case), servant of the land 
 (common foot soldier) ; but : 8aiijcnf'ne(f)t— Snc(f)t ber Sanje, 
 lance-bearer ; ^abinett^rat— 9tat be§ ft'abinettS, privy-counselor ; 
 •(8 of inflection) ; but, 9?C^h)enI, net-work ; SortntJjS (8 of inflec- 
 tion) of Corinth ; but, ^roDttlJ, province ; berettg, (berett with 
 suffix 8) already ; but, 9teij, charm. 
 
 Remember especially QUfWdrtS, upward ; tOXXo'dvtS, foreward ; 
 and all words with the end syllable „ttiart§"; nirgenl*^, no-where ; 
 ftet§, always. 
 
 SYLLABLES. 
 
 53. Syllables are either stem, prefix, or suffix. 
 53. Prefixes : ab, an, ant, be, ent, er, evj, ge, mt^, un, ur, 
 t)er, jer. The prefixes ab, an, ant, have always, and 6r3,"un, ur, 
 
16 PREFIXES. 
 
 mostly the accent. Examples : afe'fc^reiben, to copy ; Sttt'bettfen, 
 remembrance ; Stttt'lDOrt, answer ; ftclo^'nen, to reward ; etttfa'gen, 
 to renounce ; Ctbltn'bcn, to grow blind ; @tj'fetnb, arch-enemy ; 
 QCben'fen, to remember ; tttifilei'ten, to mislead ; tttt'batlfbar, 
 ungrateful ; ttt'alt, ancient ; »>Crge'ffen, to forget ; jetf(^nei'ben, 
 to cut (to pieces). 
 
 SIGNIFICATION AND USE OF THE PREFIXES. 
 
 54. ab, expresses .separation from. It is separable fiom 
 the verb : rtftfdinetbcn, to cut off ; ttf) [d^netbe a6, I cut off. 
 
 55. itit, before verbs is separable : «tttbla)en, to blow ; ii^ 
 blafe an. 
 
 56. f>C, inseparable ; intransitive verbs compounded with 
 it become transitive, thus : Weinetl, to cry ; bftoetnctl, to bewail ; 
 Wac^en, to wake ; beX0a6)m, to guard 
 
 57. cut, inseparable ; denotes depriving or taking away ; 
 entne^men, to take from ; Ctttrei|en, to tear from ; cnt[agctt, to 
 give up. 
 
 58. ev, inseparable ; expresses : producing, acquisition ; 
 etfc^affen, to create ; Ctlangeit, to acquire ; Ctfe^en, to com- 
 pensate. 
 
 59. ®tj, denotes : first, a high degree, like the English 
 "arch"; ©tjettgel, archangel ; ©rjfd^efm, great rogue ; Ctjbumm, 
 extremely stupid. 
 
 60. ®C, in substantives denotes continuation, collective- 
 ness : ©Clad), continual laughing ; ©ClDol!, clouds. It is also 
 used as augment in forming the past participle io verbs, thus : 
 lefeii, gelefen ; trtnfen, gctrunfen. 
 
 61. tUiBf acts as negative like the English mis- or dis-; 
 Wlfeberfte^cn, misunderstand ; SWlfetaut, discord. 
 
 63. tttt is prefixed to substantives, adjectives, adverbs and 
 to any participle past. It has the power of a negative, like the 
 English in-, im-, un-, thus : Uttgebulb, impatience ; ttttgtitdtid}, 
 unlucky ; tttttpttg, inactive ; Mttgebiinben, unbound. 
 
 63. Ut, denotes that which is primitive, primeval as : 
 Urgrunb, first cause ; Utfa^, axiom ; Utrfraft, primitive force. 
 
SUFFIXES. 17 
 
 64. »tt is inseparable, denotes depriving, taking away ; 
 t>eva6)ten, to despise ; \>CVlkxtn, to loose. 
 
 65. itV signifies separation of parts, destruction : JCtfc^net* 
 ben, to cut to pieces ; jetbrc(|en, to break to pieces. 
 
 SUFFIXES, THEIR USE AND SIGNIFICATION. 
 
 66. The suffixes are : bar, d)en, e, et, et, en, er, ^aft, ^ett, 
 id), tc^t, tg, in, ifdi, fett, lein, (id), ling, ni8, fat, fam, fel, fc^aft, fte, te, 
 ten, teft, turn. 
 
 67. fmv and fAttt form adjectives from verbs and from 
 abstract substantive stems, thus : banft»ftt, thankful, from banfett, 
 to thank ; f^Jarfilttt, saving, from fparen, to save ; frtebfrtm, 
 peaceable, from Stiebc, peace. 
 
 68. ifl forms adjectives from abstract substantive stems, as : 
 mutig, courageous, from SfJiut, courage ; jomig, angry, from 
 3ora, anger. 
 
 69. tf<ft forms adjectives from nouns and from names of 
 nations, countries and places, thus : 33teb, thief, btebiff^, thievish; 
 amertfanlfi^, American ; rSmif^, Roman. 
 
 Note. — All adjectives formed from foreign words have the 
 sufifix i\d), as : Iogif<^, logical ; ^)oetif<f>, poetical ; gigantift^, 
 gigantic. 
 
 70. idft suffixed to stems of concrete nouns forms adjectives, 
 thus : Sdvi\i), bufdli^t, like a bush ; 2:^ran, t^raui«J)t, like train oil. 
 
 71. Il(^ forms adjectives and adverbs from nffuns, as also 
 adverbs from adjectives, thus : fiintgU^, royal, from Itontg, 
 king ; l^etmUj^, privately, from §eim, home ; ttjafirli^, truly, 
 from toa'ijV, true ; fal[(f)nrfj, falsely, from falfc^, false. 
 
 73. Ctt forms adjectives from concrete nouns, thus : gotbCIt, 
 golden, from @oIb ; Wotlett, woolen, from SOBofle. 
 
 73. Adjectives whose stem ends in I, n, ^, receive an addi- 
 tional r between e and n, to make them more euphonious, thus : 
 fta^tettt, of steel ; tf)OnCttt, of clay ; gtafettt, of glass. 
 
18 SUFFIXES. 
 
 74. C, tftitf felt, form abstract nouns from adjectives : 
 ©tcirfe, strength, from ftarf, strong ; @d)on()eit, beauty, from 
 fc^OH. beautiful ; ©auberfClt, cleanliness, from fauber, clean. 
 
 75. Ci, forms abstract nouns from concrete nouns and from 
 verbs, thus : -3S9Cl'^i/ huntsmanship, from ^^Sger, hunter ; SSoX' 
 barcl, barbarism, from ©arbor, barbarian ; ^m^ilCi, hypocrisy, 
 from l)m6)tln, to dissemble. 
 
 76. djCtt, Ic'tn, form diminutives from nouns : <So^nH}61t, 
 from So^n, son ; SSa6)lCin, from Sacf), brook. 
 
 77. Ct forms masculine nouns : 
 
 a. from substantive stems, thus : ©C^ftfCt, shepherd, from 
 ®(J)0f, sheep ; S^ttUv, quarreler, from ^ant, quarrel ; 9iaubCt, 
 robber, from 9taub, robbery. 
 
 d. from verbial stems, thus : SJJalCt, painter, from tttftlen, to 
 paint ; ^^iigCt, hunter, from jftgeit, to hunt. 
 
 Note. — tt also forms the comparative when sufifixed to an 
 adjective, thus : fcf)on, f(f)onet ; retdE), xd^Ct. 
 
 78. itt suffixed to masculine appellations of persons gives 
 them the feminine gender ; thus : SiJIttg, king, Sotltgitt, queen ; 
 §irt, shepherd, ^trtltt, shepherdess; Setter, teacher, Se^rerln, 
 female teacher. 
 
 79. King forms nouns from substantive and adjective stems, 
 whose vowel or diphthong is then modified ; thus : ^(luptlittfl, 
 chief, from §aupt, head ; ©ttttftUttg, favorite, from ®unft, favor ; 
 ^filngUttfl, a youth, from jutig, young. 
 
 80. ttiS. Nouns ending in ntS are formed : 
 
 a. from substantives, whose vowel is modified, thus : 
 Sftnbnig, covenant, from Suttb, league ; ^JltmerttiS, from 
 Summer, grief ; 3Serft<lnbnl§, comprehension, from SBerftanb, 
 sense. 
 
 d. from verbs with prefixes : Cfjeugctl, to produce, SrjeugltiS, 
 product ; i»etriibeu, to afflict, iSetriibttiS, affliction. 
 
 c. from adjectives, the following nouns : ?5itlftertti§, darkness, 
 from ftnfter, dark ; ®et)etmtti§, a secret, from ge^eim, secret ; 
 ®Iei(^ni§, simile, from gleic^, similar ; f^aulttiS, putridness, from 
 faul, putrid. 
 
SUFFIXES. 19 
 
 81. ()(tft, forms adjectives : 
 
 a. from nouns, thus : fiiltb^rtft, sinful, from ©iinbc, sin ; 
 tugenb^ttft, virtuous, from Slugenb, virtue ; f)3a^^ftft, jocular, 
 from, @pa|, joke. 
 
 b. from verbs : lilgetl^rtft, mendacious, from lugen, to lie 
 f^teal^^aft, talkative, from fi^tta^ett, to chatter. 
 
 83. f^ttft forms : a. abstract nouns : greunbfrfjttft, friend- 
 ship, from gt^eunb, friend ; 3^einbf<I)ftft, enmity, from getnb, 
 enemy. 
 
 b. collective nouns : ©rUberfji^aft, 'fraternity, from Sruber, 
 brother ; SJitterfji^aft, knight-hood, from 9tttter, knight. 
 
 _ 83. f<ll, \t\, form nouns from verbial stems, thus: Sabfrtl, 
 refreshment, from Ittl^ett, to refresh ; 9^(itfct, riddle, from tittett, 
 to guess. 
 
 84. tunt forms : a. collective nouns : S^rifteittttltt, Chris- 
 tianity. 
 
 b. abstract nouns from adjectives and verbs : S'Jdi^tttltt, 
 wealth, from Xtx6), rich ; ^rrtttMl, error, from trrett, to err. 
 
 85. Uttg forms abstract nouns when added to transitive 
 verbs, thus : Sctefirung, instruction, from bele^retl, to instruct ; 
 ©rso^Ittng, tale, from erjafilen, to tell. 
 
 86. tC, ttn, tcft, form the past tense of the regular verbs : 
 td^ fiebte, I loved ; bu lernteft, thou did'st learn ; Xok fpteltCtt, we 
 played. 
 
 87. \tt forms the superlative when added to the adjective : 
 
 fdionfte, beftc. 
 
 NOTES TO SUFFIXES. 
 
 88. Discriminate between the suffixes IQ and icfj. With 
 ig we write ; 
 
 a. The following nouns : @ffi0/ vinegar ; ^Otltg, honey ; 
 Saftg, cage ; Sbtttg, king ; MtumiQ, vermilion ; ^fenttifl, penny ; 
 JRetfig, spray-wood ; 3^ifi9' green-finch: 
 
 b. Adjectives and adverbs formed by the suffix tg : luftifl, 
 merry ; mttl^ttg, mighty ; tjSufig, frequently. (See 1" 68.) 
 
20 ACCENT. 
 
 c. Adjectives formed from stems ending in „t": l^ett'tg, holy ; 
 ttotl'tfl, woolly ; abel'ig, noble. 
 
 89. With i^ we write : 
 
 a. The following nouns : Sottt<ft, vat ; ®riQi(i>, ticken ; 
 (5ftrt(^, plaster-floor ; jjci^nrit^, ensign-bearer ; ^^ttii^J, pinion ; 
 5)ebcricft, wild raddish ; ^iVSXA^, Henry ; £rant«^, crane ; 
 8attt<!^, lettuce ; 'iPfirfii^, peach ; Jlep^tt^, carpet ; WiAtn^, 
 tyrant ; 3n'tnt(i^, linen tick. 
 
 b. All adjectives and adverbs formed with the suffix „Ii<I)": 
 e^rlti!^, honest ; l^a|It(ift, ifgly ; fiirsttli^, lately. 
 
 90. The suffix tt^t has one exception, viz : ^rebtgt, sermon, 
 being derived from ^rebtgeil, to preach. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 91. Syllables are either accented or not. In words without 
 prefix the stem is accented : fe'^en, to'c^en, SRu'tter, ©a'rteti. 
 
 93. t\ at the end of a word always has the accent, except in 
 compound nouns, which have the accent on the stem of the first 
 member ; also in numerals the accent is on the first syllable. 
 Examples : Srennerei', garberci', ^artci', ajialerci', ^oltjci', 
 anbcl' ; but, Sa'(t«33rennerei, lime-kiln ; jmet'erlei, bret'erlet, etc. 
 
 93. ic always has the accent : fpajic'ren, fomponU'ren. 
 
 94. Foreign words adopted by the German language have 
 the accent with very few exceptions On the final syllable : 
 ©efant', ©enerd', OfftSi^'r 5Watf)emattf' ; but, ©o'ttor, Sa'ntor, 
 ^rofe'ffor, ©ramma'ttf. 
 
 The exceptions in „or" change the accent in the plural, thus : 
 SDofto'rcn, ^anto'ren, 'iprofeffo'ren. 
 
 95. Prepositions prefixed to verbs, take the accent. (For 
 exceptions see ^214-15.) 
 
 WORDS. 
 
 96. Man speaks, expressing thereby his thoughts. Speech 
 is a combination of single words, and the correct combination of 
 
DERIVATIONS. 21 
 
 such words makes language beautiful. The combination of 
 single words into sentences is called Construction, SBotrts 
 fttgtttt0. Grammar teaches us the structure of words and how 
 to use them. 
 
 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 97. Words are : a. Stem ; b. Derivation ; c. Compound. 
 
 98. STEMS. 
 
 a. Noun ; Scvg, SaE, §nttb, mountain, ball, dog. 
 
 b. Adjectives : fci^bn, gut, btittb, beautiful, good, blind. 
 
 c. Verb : fet}en, finbett, ge^en. to see, to find, to go. 
 
 d. Adverb : ttun, fd)nelt, fe^r, now, quick, very. 
 
 DERIVATIONS. 
 
 99. Nouns with : i^en, e, et, er, ^ett, in, f'ctt, letn, ling, mut, nis, 
 fat, [et, f(^aft, turn, ung and with the augment '®C'. Examples : 
 8anb(J)cn, from 8anb ; ®iite, goodness, from gut ; SKalerei, 
 painting, from ^Dialer ; ©deafer, shepherd, from @iJ)af ; SinbfjCit, 
 childhood, from Sinb ; 8dWitt, lioness, from giJtte ; ©telfeit, 
 vanity, from ettel ; graulcln, miss, from grau ; grembUtt^, 
 stranger, from fremb ; ©auftlttttt, gentleness, from fouft ; 
 SenutniS, knowledge, from fcnuett ; @c£)eufal, monster, from 
 (Sdieu; ^iicEfCl, chopped straw, from ^(fett ; ©iirgfi^rtft, warranty, 
 from biirgen ; ^eitigtum, sanctuary, from ^ettig ; ©rfdiaffttttg, 
 creation, from erf(J)offen ; ©ffaug, song, from fiugcu. 
 
 100. Adjectives with bor, en, ern, l^oft, t(|t, tg, tfd), ItdE), fam. 
 Examples ; fru^t&at, fruitful, from gru(f)t ; gotbett, golden, 
 from ®olb; bletCttt, leaden, from ©let; jag^ttft, timid, from 
 jogcn; Xtmx^i, granular, from Sfom ; flet^ig, diligent, from ■ 
 poetif<^, poetical, from 'iJJoet ; fiSniglid), royal, from 
 miillf rtttt, toilsome, from 3)iUf)e. 
 
 101. Verbs with n, en, e(n, tgen: buttertt, to chum, from 
 :©Uttcr ; fifc^Ctt, to fish, from gtfc^ ; grUbelu, to speculate (reason), 
 from ®rube ; retUtfJCtt, to clean, from rein. Also with the folltjw- 
 ing prefixes : be, ent, cr, ge, mt^, ber, ytx. 
 
22 DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. 
 
 102. Adverbs with ^aft, li^, ItngS, 8: tmttfaU, sickly, 
 from tvant ; enblidi, finally, from @nbe ; bltnbling^, blindly, 
 from bltnb ; tet(#, partly, from Stett. 
 
 COMPOUNDS. 
 
 103. Nouns; 
 
 a. Noun and noun : ^au^^XitT, domestic animal. 
 l>. Adjective and noun : SoIt=@tnn, coldness (of the 
 mind). 
 
 c. Verb and noun : 8efe=S3u(f), reading book. 
 
 d. Preposition and noun : ^Ot^^dt, time of yore. 
 
 104. Adjectives : 
 
 a. Adjective and adjective : aIt=ntobtf^, old-fashioned. 
 d. Noun and adjective : turm=^Oi^, high as a tower. 
 
 c. Verb and adjective : lerit^begierig, desirous of 
 
 learning. 
 
 105. Verbs : 
 
 a. Adjective and verb : gut^etlen, to approve. 
 
 d. Preposition and verb : auf=geben, to give up. 
 
 c. Adverb and verb : n)teber=fommen, to come again. 
 
 d. Noun and verb : ^OUS=]^dten, to keep house, to 
 
 economize. 
 
 106. Adverbs: 
 
 Dor=geftern, day before yesterday ; ntmmer=me^r, never- 
 more ; tmmer=tDa^renb, continually. 
 
 DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. 
 
 107. Words have one or more syllables. Monosyllables 
 cannot be divided. The division of polysyllables is as follows : 
 a. A consonant between two vowels goes with the next 
 syllable ; thus : aSa=ter ; ge=gen ; lo-ben. 
 
 d. Two consonants between two vowels : one goes with the 
 first and the other with the second vowel : SSaUtcn ; j^tn^ger. 
 
PARTS OE SPEECH. 23 
 
 Exceptions are the compound consonants, because they denote but 
 one sound ; as : i^, l>t, <>f), f(f>, ft, tJ|. They go with the 
 following syllable : 9ta=(^e, revenge ; @td=l>te, cities ; '^Xt^'p^ti, 
 prophet ; %^A^^> pocket ; ?5ii=6e, feet ; be4^a4i=gen, to prove by 
 action. 
 
 c. d becomes I t ; thus : baMett. 
 
 d. S and J always go with the following syllable : Slt=$U8, 
 luxury ; ^et=jen, to heat. Also p^ after m and r : !ttm=:>>fen, to 
 fight ; ^aX'p^tn, carp ; but : tiop'ftn, to rap. 
 
 e. Compound words are divided according to their construc- 
 tion and derivation ; thus : £)in=au§, out ; berg^att, up hill ; 
 9lt=ntO=[p^O=re, atmosphere. 
 
 PARTS OF SPEECH. 28dttctif(affctt* 
 
 108. The German language has ten parts of speech, viz : 
 
 1. ®e[(f)Ie(f)t«tt)ort, article. 
 
 2. ^auptoort, noun. 
 
 3. giirtoort, pronoun. 
 
 4. (Stgenf^aftSttJort, adjec- 
 
 tive. 
 
 5. ^E'tWort, verb. 
 
 6. UmftanbSmort, adverb. 
 
 7. aSeri^altntSttJOrt, preposition. 
 
 8. 3tt^toort, numeral. 
 
 9. 53tnbett)Ort, conjunction. 
 10. @m|)finbung8»ort, interjec- 
 tion. 
 
 ARTICLE. mc^OfUm^tifOVt. 
 
 109. The article always precedes the noun, thereby distin- 
 guishing it as such and denoting its gender. It is never accented. 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLES. 
 110. 
 
 Definite. 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 fern. 
 
 neut. 
 
 for 
 
 ■ all genders. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 bcr 
 
 bie 
 
 baS 
 
 
 bie 
 
 the 
 
 G. 
 
 bc8 
 
 ber 
 
 bc§ 
 
 
 bcr 
 
 of the 
 
 D. 
 
 bem 
 
 bcr 
 
 bem 
 
 
 ben 
 
 to the 
 
 A. 
 
 ben 
 
 bte 
 
 bag 
 
 
 bte 
 
 the 
 
24 
 
 
 
 USE OF 
 
 THE ARTICLES. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 fern. 
 
 
 neut. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 etn 
 
 eine 
 
 
 etn 
 
 a 
 
 G. 
 
 etne8 
 
 enter 
 
 
 ettteS 
 
 of a 
 
 D. 
 
 etncnt 
 
 etner 
 
 
 etttcm 
 
 to a 
 
 A. 
 
 etnen 
 
 eine 
 
 
 eiit 
 
 a 
 
 USE OF THE ARTICLES. 
 
 111. All nouns standing for individuals of a whole species 
 must be preceded by the article : bet SD'ieitf^, the man ; bte 3Jiau8, 
 the mouse ; ettt §ait8, a house. 
 
 Also adjective nouns connected with the preceding noun, 
 viz.: fjrtebtnc^ ber @ro|e, Frederick the Great ; iliapoleon ber Srfte, 
 Napoleon the First. 
 
 113. Proper nouns and concrete nouns do not take the 
 article : Settjamtn iJranftin erfanb ben Sligableiter, Benjamin 
 Franklin invented ihe lighting-rod ; ®oIb tft ein ^Uictd, gold is a 
 metal. But if they are preceded by an adjective, the article is 
 required : ber atte benjamin ffranfltn, etc. ; baa gelbe @oIb, etc. 
 
 113. The definite articles ber, bte, baS, can also be used 
 as pronouns, instead of : btefer, m. ; bie[e, f. ; btefeS, n., this ; or : 
 toeldier, m. ; luelc^e, f. ; loelti^eS, n., who, which. In this case they are 
 accented. 
 
 114. The pronoun-articles are decHned as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 m. f. 31. for all genders. 
 
 N. ber bte baS bte 
 
 G. beffen (be|) beren beffen (be|) beren, whose ; berer, of those. 
 
 D. bem ber bem benen 
 
 A. ben bte bo8 bte 
 
 115. The shorter form „be^" is used only in compound 
 words, as : be6^a(b, beSlDCgen, etc., and by poets, as : "jDe^ ru^me 
 ber blut'ge2;^rann filf) nt^t;" lit'ly : " Of that, the bloody tyrant 
 shall not boast." (Schiller „35ie SUrgfc^aft.") 
 
USE OF THE ARTICLES. 
 
 25 
 
 116. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 THE PRONOUN ARTICLES. 
 
 . 1. !Der Snabe, l>et e8 getl^an 
 i)at, ^etp Uarl 
 
 2. ©a8 Sutf), ^^^§ i^ gefauft 
 ]^abe, ift fe^r intereffant. 
 
 3. 2>a§ ift bag Stnb, ^e^en 
 SJater geftorben ift. 
 
 4. SfiBo ift ber §err, 9em @ie 
 5)08 ®elb gaben ? 
 
 5. ©ev 3Waim, Hctt bu liebft 
 
 6. ^ier ift bie !Damc, *ie 
 bi^ net- 
 
 7. @« ift bie grau, i>cren 
 SRann oerunglitdte. 
 
 8. Unb erjeige @nabe bem 
 toufenbften ©efc^Ic^te, }>evcv Hie 
 ntirf) liebeit. 
 
 9. Sin g3aum be§ Ceben8 ift 
 fiel>encn, Oic fie ergrcifen. 
 
 10. 9Ji(^t imineV Sic finb un= 
 fere greunbe, Hie unS fiJimeidieln. 
 
 1. The boy wAo has done it, 
 is called Charles. 
 
 2. The book (which) I have 
 bought, is very interesting. 
 
 3. This is the child, whose 
 father died. 
 
 4. Where is the gentleman 
 whom you gave the money ? 
 
 5. The man {whom) you love. 
 
 6. Here is the lady, that 
 called you. 
 
 7. It is the woman, whose 
 husband met with an accident. 
 
 8. And show kindness unto 
 the thousandth generation of 
 those, who love me. 
 
 9. A tree of life is she to 
 them, that lay hold upon her. 
 
 (Proverbs.) 
 
 10. Not always those are our 
 friends, that flatter us. 
 
 CONTRACTED ARTICLES. 
 
 117. The definite articles are sometimes contracted and 
 compounded with several prepositions in the following manner : 
 @r fi^t rtttt (an bem) Matiier. He sits at the piano. 
 
 2ttt'§ (an bag) f^euer ftetlen. To put by the fire, 
 
 ©id^ ttUf'S (auf bag) Srtnfen legen. To take to drinking. 
 @r ift l&eim (bet bem) ^riifibentcn. He is with the president. • 
 iSie gingen i»ttt<ift'§ (burc^ 'iiVA) geuer. They went through the fire. 
 (5r ftarb fiit'§ (fiir hai) 33aterlanb. He died for the fatherland, 
 ©ie ift ittt (in bem) §aufe. 
 ^arl ging itt'g (in baS) Sweater. 
 @r reifte iifecr'^ (iiber ba3) 2JJeer. 
 (58 war uttt'g (urn baS) 3a^r 1500. 
 3fi^ fommc »om (Don bem) ©ebirge. 
 ©ie gefien jtttn (ju bem) SCnig. 
 5Die ^nber ge^en jur (ju ber) ©c^ule. 
 
 She is in the house. 
 Charles went to the theatre. 
 He traveled over the ocean. 
 It was about the year 1500. 
 I come from the mountains. 
 They go to the king. 
 The children go to school. 
 
26 NOUN. 
 
 NOUN, ^aupmovt. 
 
 118. A noun is a word denoting a thing, either real or unreal. 
 Nouns for real things are called : 2Befen=5Jonteit, Concreta ; those 
 for unreal things : Segriff^ttamen, Abstracta. 
 
 119. The concrete nouns are divided in : 
 
 a. Stgennamcn, proper nouns ; ®eorg, 9toc^efter, 2lmerifa. 
 d. ©attunggnamcn, common nouns : ^auS, 9Jiau8, Sant. 
 r. ©toffnamen, material nouns : ®o(b, SBSaffer, Wiiii). 
 d. Sommelnamen, collective nouns : Slrmee, §eer, ^ecbe. 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 ISiO. Nouns have a threefold gender ; 
 
 mcJnnltl^, masculine : ber SJianti, man ; ber Sliger, tiger ; ber 
 
 2;t[4 table. 
 icetbUd). feminine : bte S'rau, woman ; bte OaitS, goose ; bte 
 
 U{)r, watch. 
 fatf)lilf), neuter : baS ^inb, child ; bag ^ferb, horse ; bag §0U8, 
 
 house. 
 
 RULES ABOUT THE GENDER. 
 
 It is impossible to classify with exactness the nouns of the 
 German language in regard to the gender. Sometimes the 
 gender is so arbitrary, that the grammatical gender is in direct 
 contradiction to the natural gender of the noun. (See rules. 
 Feminine i.) 
 
 Compound nouns take the gender of the last member, thus : 
 Die §au8=2^^itl' ; the first member being neuter the second 
 feminine. 
 
 While thus the gender can be learned by practice and expe- 
 rience only, the following rules, which should be committed to 
 memory, will nevertheless prove a great help. 
 
RULES ABOUT THE GENDER. 27 
 
 a. MASCULINF. 
 
 1. All nouns denoting a masculine either by nature or appel- 
 lation ; as : ©ruber, brother ; SDtaler, painter ; 8ti»e, lion ; ®raf, 
 count ; except those to which the diminutive suffixes „ijtn" or 
 „tetn" are added, which are then neuter, as : ber Sruber, baS 
 Sriiberiiftctt ; ber Z\\i), ba8 S:ifd)Iein. 
 
 2. All names of seasons, months and days. 
 
 3. All nouns in "rttt," as : Srttt and gatt 
 
 Are masculine, except : baS 5BeItalI ; 
 Those nouns in fttttt, in ftttfl and Uttfl ; 
 As : ^avm, ©efrtttg and @d)metterlitt0 ; 
 
 Then all in rtft, tjj, ttfl and tttm ; 
 As : ZaQ, and SiJnig, S?rU(J and SBtttrm ; 
 
 Remember : all in (tU^ and ClXtVA 
 Are masculine, as : ©trdUCf^ and 35ttttttt ; 
 
 Forget not : ^>f, f(i), and id). 
 As : to^f and ^x\d) and 2:eppi(^ ; 
 
 And all that end in ; d, ^, ttfe ; 
 Except : ba6 ©ecf, bag @(iicE, 
 bag ©d^od, ba8 ®tucE, 
 bag gletfd), bag 9Je^, bie gju^. 
 And lastly those that end in : Ctt 
 Are masculine, as : ber SefCtt, ber Sogett. 
 But these except : bag Sllmofen, bag ©eden, bag Slmen, 
 bag ijiillen, bag Siffen, bag Safen, bog (Syamen, 
 bag Sc^en, bag SCBaWen, bag ^d^tn, bag SBefen, 
 and verbal substantives, as : bag Sefett. 
 
 b. FEMININE. 
 
 1. All nouns denoting a feminine either by nature or appel- 
 lation, as : Sc^mefter, sister ; SJialerttt, paintress : SiJlDttl, lioness : 
 ®roftn, countess. Exceptions : bag iffieib, bag ffrauenjimmer, 
 woman ; bag f^iiulein, miss ; bag S!Jiabd)en, girl. 
 
 2. All nouns ending in t, ct, te, in, ton, ^ett, Mt, fc^aft, ung, ur ; 
 Examples : StumC, flower ; SruderCi, printing house ; aJietobie, 
 melody ; ^trtitt, shepherdess ; SfatiOtt, nation ; @(f)bnO*tt/ 
 beauty ; ©auberfCit, cleanliness ; ?5reunbfd)(»ft, friendship ; 
 ^offnttttfl, hope ; ©^JUr, trace. 
 
28 RULES ABUUT THE GENDER. 
 
 Exceptions : SDer ^ur, floor ; ber Sprung, crack ; ba8 ^et 
 fd^aft, signet ; and all names of nationalities in „i" are mascu- 
 line, as : ber ^reu^e, Prussian ; also the following words : 
 
 SDer Slffe, 
 
 Sote, Sube, 
 
 grbe, 
 
 5«effe, 
 
 ^obe, 
 
 ape, 
 
 messenger, lad. 
 
 heir 
 
 nephew, 
 
 boy. 
 
 5Der ft'ofe, 
 
 §ofe, gtiroe, 
 
 9ttefe, 
 
 golfe. 
 
 9?abe, 
 
 cheese, 
 
 hare, lion. 
 
 giant. 
 
 falcon. 
 
 raven. 
 
 .and those with double singular, (see 124). 
 
 The following in i are neuter : bo3 Slugf, eye ; bn§ Sttbc, end ; 
 baS Srbe, heritage ; and all adjective substantives in „e" as ; baS 
 @Ute, the good ; tlX?i <S6)om, the beautiful, etc. 
 
 3. All names of rivers in e, el, er, as : bte (StbC ; bie SOiofel ; 
 bte SBefct. 
 
 C. NEUTER. 
 
 1. All nouns with the augment „®e," are neuter, as : baS 
 
 Oe^or, baSi Oebaube. 
 
 Exceptions. The following are masculine : ®ebraud), use ; 
 ©ebante, thought ; @enu|, use, pleasure ; ®eru(^, smell ; ®efang, 
 song ; ©efc^mad, taste ; ®eftanf, stench ; ®eWtnn, gain. 
 
 Feminine are ; ®ebit^r, fee, due ; ©eburt, birth ; ®ebulb, 
 patience ; ®efal)r, danger ; ®eftatt, figure ; ©eWtttt, power, force 
 
 2. All nbuns ending in „ii)en" and „tetn": baS §iinbd)en ; bo8 
 fjtfdileiu. (All masculine and feminine nouns to which these 
 suffixes are added take the neuter gender.) 
 
 3. All names of metals, except : ber <Sta% steel ; ber STombaf, 
 tombac ; ber QlXlt, zinc. 
 
 4. All names of countries and cities are neuter, except : bte 
 ©C^lDeij, Switzerland ; and all those ending in „et," which are 
 feminine, as : bte 2:itrtCt, Turkey. 
 
 5. Neuter are all nouns in : tum, fat, [el, except : ber Stei^tum, 
 wealth ; ber 3^rrtum, error ; bte Slc^fel, shoulder f bte ©eii^fet, neap. 
 
 6. All derivations of numbers in „et,'' as : ba8 jDrtttel, third 
 part ; baS 33iertel, fourth part. 
 
 7. All other words used substantively are neuter, as : baS 
 @(^bne, the beautiful ; baS Sptelett, playing ; bag DJtettl unb ©ettt, 
 (the) mine and thine ; bog aSenn Uttb baS 2lber, the 'if and the 
 'but.' 
 
NOUNS WITH DOUBLE GENDER. 
 
 29 
 
 DOUBLE GENDER. 
 
 121. The following nouns have two genders of different 
 meaning : 
 
 ber 9l{)3, incubus, 
 
 ber Sanb, volume, binding, 
 
 ber Saucr, peasant, 
 
 ber Sunb, union, turban, 
 
 ber S^or, choir (body of 
 
 singers), 
 ber (Srbe, heir, 
 bie SrfenntntS, knowledge, 
 
 ber ^lur, floor, 
 
 ber ®ei^el (also ©eifel) hostage. 
 
 bie @tft, (SOittgift) gift, 
 
 ber §aft, the hold ; bie §aft, 
 
 custody, 
 ber §ar5, the Hartz (mountain), 
 ber §eibe, heathen, 
 ber ^ut, hat, 
 ber Siefer, jaw, 
 ber SEunbe, customer, 
 ber Setter, leader, 
 ber StRangel, defect, 
 bie OJiarf, a coin ; a boundary, 
 ber SJiarfct), the march, 
 ber aJiaft, mast, 
 ber Tlt\\tX, surveyor, 
 ber SReiS, rice, 
 ber ©tfiilb, shield, 
 ber @(i)h)obe, Swabian, 
 ber ®c{)tDUlft, bonabast, 
 
 ber See, lake, 
 
 ber S^Jroffe, scion, sprout, 
 
 bie Steuer, tax, 
 
 ber ®ttft, pencil, tack. 
 
 bie mp, alp. 
 
 ba§ iBanb, ribbon, bond. 
 
 baS Sauer, cage. 
 
 ba« -SSunb, bunch, bundle. 
 
 baS S^or, choir (part of 
 
 church), 
 ba8 Srbe, heritage. 
 ba§ ©rtennttttS, sentence. 
 
 judgment, 
 bie i^Iur, fields, 
 bie ®eipe(, lash. 
 baS ®tft, poison. 
 
 ixxi ^Ci^t, ephemera. 
 
 baS |)ar5, rosin. 
 
 bie ^etbe, heath. 
 
 bie §Ut, keeping. 
 
 bie liefer, fir-tree. 
 
 bie ^unbe, information. 
 
 bie Seiter, ladder. 
 
 bie SD^angel, rolling press. 
 
 bag Wad, marrow. 
 
 bie aJiarfd), marsh. 
 
 bie SlJiaft fattening. 
 
 bag SJfeffer, knife. 
 
 bag 9?ei8, sprig. 
 
 ba6 @(^tlb, a sign-board. 
 
 bie @if)tt)a6e, cockroach. 
 
 bie @cf)ft)Utft, swelling (on the 
 
 body), 
 bie @ec, sea. 
 bie @pro[fe, rundle. 
 ba6 ©teuer, helm. 
 baS @tift, bishopric, cloister. 
 
30 NOUNS WITH DOUBLE GENDER. 
 
 Double Gender — Continued. 
 
 ber 5i;aubc, deaf man, bie SToufie, dove, 
 
 ber SEeil, part (but a whole) ; 
 
 volume, ba§ S^etl, part (of a whole), 
 
 ber 2:^or, fool, ba« Sl^or, gate, 
 
 ber aSerbtenft, gain, bo8 33erbten[t, merit, 
 
 bie 2Be{)r, defence, bag SBe^r, dam, enclosure. 
 
 132. Nouns have two numbers, viz.: Singular, ©nja^t; 
 Plural, aJJetirja^t. 
 
 Sing.: aHann, ^rau, Stnb. Plural : Sfianner, grauen, ^nber. 
 NO SINGULAR. 
 
 133. The following nouns have no singular: 53einfteiber, 
 trowsers ; Sttem, parents ; (Stnfunfte, income ; f^ttften, lent ; 
 ©efiitlc, rents, revenues ; ©ebriiber, brothers (in commerce) ; 
 ®ei(^tDtfter, brothers and sisters ; Soften, cost ; ?eute, people, folks ; 
 aJJanen, departed spirits ; 5Ko[ern, measles ; Dftem, easter ; 
 ^fingften, pentecost ; 9ianfe, intrigues ; STriimmer, ruins ; 38et^= 
 na^ten, Christmas. 
 
 DOUBLE SINGULAR. 
 
 124. Some nouns have a double (a shorter and a longer) 
 singular : grig or gel[en, rock ; griebe or griebeit, peace ; guttfe or 
 gunfen, spark ; ©ebontc or @eban!en, thought ; ©laube or ©laubcu, 
 belief ; §OUfe or §aufett, heap, crowd ; 9fame or 9JamCIt, name ; 
 ©l^abe or S^oben, damage, loss, pity ; ©ante or ©amen, seed ; 
 (Stored or ©t^reden, terror, fright ; SCBillc or SSiQen, will. 
 
 Note. — These words belong to the first declension and take 
 'Ctt§' in the genitive singular. 
 
 NO PLURAL. 
 
 125. Certain nouns have no plural as : 
 
 a. All material nouns, like : ®olb, 9Ktt(^, f^Ietf^. 
 
NOUNS WITH DOUBLE PLURAL. 
 
 31 
 
 b. Most of the abstract nouns, as : §a|, hatred ; Stebe, love ; 
 SDantbarfcit, gratitude. 
 
 c. All adjective and verbal-nouns used with the neuter 
 article, as : bag ®ute, baS ®(^bne, baS @e^cn, baS S[jen. 
 
 d. Also the following collective nouns : ©eftnbe, servants ; 
 Oefinbet, rabble ; 'iPtibet, mob ; 33te^, cattle ; and those ending 
 in turn, as : §cibcntutlt, heathenism. Also denominations of 
 measure, weight and number after a numeral, as : brei ^futlb, 
 three pound ; t)ier gup (not f^ii^e), four foot (not feet) ; \ii)i> 3oII, 
 six inch, (not 3"^'^ inches) ; JtDet '^aar, two pair. But we say : 
 fUnf Stlett 5£u(^, five ells of cloth ; j^et SDfetlett, two miles ; bret 
 3a^rC, Ctcr SJionatC unb acfit ^Eage ; three years, four months and 
 eight days. 
 
 DOUBLE PLURAL. 
 
 136. The following nouns have a double plural of different 
 meaning : 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 SSanb, bet and ba6, of ber : SBfinbe, volumes, of ba§ : 
 
 SBanf, bie, 
 Sogen, ber, 
 Jbruber, ber, 
 
 ®ing, ba§, 
 
 ®eft^t, bag, 
 §ol3, bo8, 
 
 Sic^t, ba«, 
 Ort, bet, 
 ®au, bie. 
 
 Sonte, benches, 
 Sogett, sheets (of paper), 
 iBriibet, brothers (in family) 
 
 !5)ingc, things, 
 
 @eft(i)tc, visions, 
 
 e, species of wood. 
 
 ©d^ilb, ber and baa, of ber: 
 E^or, bet and baS, of bet : 
 jLiid), bag, 
 SBott, baS, 
 
 Son, ber, 
 
 8i(^tc, candles, 
 
 Ortc, countries, regions, 
 
 ©due, sows, 
 
 @(f)ilbf, shields, of baS 
 
 S()Oten, fools, ofbil8 
 
 s:u(^e, cloths, 
 
 SBottc, words (in connec- 
 tion), 
 ^otte, inches, 
 
 S3Snbcr, ribbons and 
 SBanbc, bonds. 
 Satl!en, banks. 
 iBogen, bows, arches. 
 ©cBtiiber, brothers (in 
 
 commerce). 
 ®iiigcr, arme Singer, 
 
 poor things, 
 ©efti^tcr, faces. 
 §0t3cr, pieces of 
 wood. 
 
 8id)tcr, lights. 
 
 Ottct, cities, villages. 
 ©Illicit, wild sows 
 boars. 
 : ©C^Kbcr, sign-boards. 
 : jE^orc, gates. 
 Siicticr, kerchiefs. 
 SBottct, words (with- 
 out connection. 
 3Dnt, tolls, duties. 
 
PLURAL. 
 
 ©entmalc, 
 
 33ettfmater 
 
 ©emac^e, 
 
 @emad)er 
 
 ©eioanbe, 
 
 ©ewanbcr 
 
 Sanbe, 
 
 ?onber 
 
 Ziiak, 
 
 Scaler 
 
 32 RULES ABOUT THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 
 
 137. Some nouns have a double plural, without changing 
 their meaning : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 bag ©enfmal, monument 
 baS ©emac^, apartment 
 baS ®emanb, robe 
 ba§ 8anb, land 
 ba§ 3;^al, valley 
 The plural form in „t" is used only in poetry. 
 
 138. Rules about the formation of the plural: 
 
 a. Many nouns retain the form of the singular in the plural,, 
 which is then indicated only by the change of the article. Most 
 of these words end in : el, Ctl, er, (f)en, tcin. Examples : ber 
 goffet, spoon ; btc Siiffel, spoons. 'Ber SBagen, wagon ; bie SBageii,. 
 wagons ; ber SPittter, painter ; bie SDioter, painters ; bad Wdbiftn, 
 girl ; bie SJiabc^eil, girls ; ba8 griiuletn, miss ; bie groutetn, misses. 
 
 d. The plural is often formed by the modified vowels : a, i), ii ; 
 thus : s. 3Sater, p. SSciter ; s. Dfen, p. Cfen ; s. ©ruber, p. Sriiber. 
 
 c. Again it is formed by appending the suffixes : e, It, en, er,. 
 thus : s. Zi\i), p. STifdic ; s. Slume, p. Slumen ; s. grau, p. grauen ;. 
 s. Stnb, p. Hinbet. 
 
 (/. Or it is formed by both, modified vowel and suffix, thus ; 
 s. Sanb, p. Sftnbc ; s. 8anb, p. Sftnbct ; s. ®o()n, p. So^nc ; . 
 s. SBudj, p. Stti)cr. 
 
 e. Compounds of 9Rattn, man, take either "'JOJanner, 
 men," or "Seute, people," in the plural. The plural with SeUtC: 
 is collective, while the plural with SJJiinner refers to the male 
 sex only, thus : S^elCttte, married people ; but : ^ijimannev, . 
 husbands. 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE NOUN. 
 
 139. Nouns are subject to a declension. They stand in four 
 different cases (^atle), in both, singular and plural. The cases . 
 are : 
 
 erfter ^aU, 
 
 Nom. 
 
 h)er? 
 
 who ? 
 
 jroetter 5"ot(, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 weffen? 
 
 whose ? 
 
 britter gall. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 h)cm? 
 
 to whom ? 
 
 Dterter ^att. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 wen? 
 
 whom ? 
 
FIRST DECLENSION. 33 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 130. To this declension belong all polysyllabic masculine 
 and neuter nouns ending in unaccented Cl, Ctt, (V ; the neuter 
 diminutives in : <^f1t, Icitt ; the feminine nouns : 3Jiutter and 
 S£o(i)ter, and the nouns with a double singular, (see 124). 
 
 Exceptions : ©er SSmx, Bavarian ; ber ^auer, peasant ; bet 
 Saffer, Caffre ; ber SSetter, cousin ; ber aSuSfet, muscle ; ber ©tai^el, 
 sting, and all words ending in ter. 
 
 130. The characteristics of this declension are : ^ in 
 Genitive singular, and It in Dative plural ; but nouns ending in It 
 take no additional It in plural. The vowel is often modified. 
 
 132. Note. — The feminine nouns of all declensions are 
 invariable in the singular. 
 
 EXAMPLES : 
 
 133. SINGULAR. 
 
 Masculine.. Feminine. Neuter. 
 
 N. ber SSatei? Soffcl aSagctt ; bie ajiutter ; bog ajJcibiJiCtt grSuleitt. 
 G. beg 33oter§ Soffel^ Se8agen§ ; ber TOutter ; beg aRabcE)en§ ^^riiuIeinS. 
 D. bem 93ater Sijffel SBagen; berSKutter; bem9)?abc^en grftuletn. 
 A. ben 25ater 86ffet 2Bageu; bie abutter ; bag 3J?abc^en griiufeitt. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. bie 3Sater CSffel SOBogen ; bte SKtltter ; bie SOJabc^en ^rautetn. 
 G. ber asjlter Siiffel SOBagen ; ber SJJiltter ; ber ^JJabcfien grSuIein. 
 D. ben asatertt gijffeln SBagen ; ben aJJitttertt ; ben aJfabc^en graulein. 
 A. bie 33ftter Soffel SBagen ; bte SWiitter ; bie SD^abi^en j^rauletn. 
 
34 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 134. NOUNS OF FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 gel^rcr Io6t ben 
 
 1. ®er 
 ®(J)iiter. 
 
 2. ®ie Soiltei- unfereS ®art= 
 ner§ t)at ben ©ptegel jerbrocEien. 
 
 3. ©e^ort biefeS aWefjer betnem 
 (3f)rem)Sruber? 
 
 4. Silm, eS get)ort meiner 
 abutter. 
 
 5. §aft bu, (^ben @te) bem 
 aSogel frifiieS SEBaffer gegeben ? 
 
 6. Sr fprang iiber ben ©roben. 
 
 7. ®te 9?bmer fanbten nad| 
 ©etp^i, urn ba8 Dra!el ju bcfra= 
 gen. 
 
 8. !Dte f(^iDebenben ©Srten 
 ber ©emtramtg toavm berit^mt. 
 
 9. 2)te gtuget ber Slbler ftnb 
 breit. 
 
 10. ©ie ©i^Uter fct)ulbcn il^ren 
 8e^rem 9ld)tung. 
 
 11. !Die @eier ftnb StaubdiJgel. 
 
 12. atap^aet unb 9tuben8 maren 
 gro^e aJJater. 
 
 13. 3n btefem 53ttc^tem [inb 
 fd)one 9JJ(iriI)en. 
 
 14. S)er ©efang ber aSogletn 
 ift liebtt^. 
 
 1. The teacher praises the 
 scholar. 
 
 2. The daughter of our gar- 
 dener has broken the mirror. 
 
 3. Does this knife belong 
 to your brother ? 
 
 • 4. No, it belongs to my 
 mother. 
 
 5. Have you given the bird 
 fresh water ? 
 
 6. He sprang over the ditch. 
 
 7. The Romans sent to 
 Delphi to consult the oracle. 
 
 8. The hanging gardens of 
 Semiramis were famous. 
 
 9. The wings of eagles are 
 broad. 
 
 10. The pupils owe respect 
 to their teachers. 
 
 11. The hawks are birds of 
 prey. 
 
 12 Raphael and Rubens 
 were great painters. 
 
 13. In this little book are 
 beautiful fairy tales. 
 
 14. The singing of the little 
 birds is delightful. 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 35 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION, 
 
 135. To this declension belong only masculine and feminine 
 nouns. 
 
 a. All masculine nouns ending in e : ber Sowc, ber |)afe. 
 Also the following : 
 
 Sater 
 
 Bavarian 
 
 bear 
 
 
 harbor 
 barbarian 
 
 59utgar 
 bulgarian 
 
 czar 
 
 ginf giirft 
 finch prince 
 
 fop 
 
 fellow 
 
 ®raf 
 count 
 
 §ufar 
 hussar 
 
 fiageftolj ^etb 
 
 old bachelor hero 
 
 §err 
 gentleman 
 
 inhabitant 
 
 Sorfar 
 corsair 
 
 Sattf 
 calif 
 
 Samerab 
 comrade 
 
 cossack 
 
 Sump 
 scamp 
 
 9Jarr 
 fool 
 
 8cu 
 lion 
 
 9J?amcIuf 
 mameluke 
 
 man 
 
 moor 
 
 3Jionarif) 
 monarch 
 
 gtero 
 nerve 
 
 ox 
 
 
 prince 
 
 polypus 
 
 ^atriarcf) 
 patriarch 
 
 butler 
 
 fool 
 
 Sljrann Tartar . 
 tyrant Tartar 
 
 33ago6unb 
 vagabond 
 
 iBafatl 
 vassal 
 
 unb 
 and 
 
 33orfa^r 
 'ancestor. 
 
 b. All masculine nouns of foreign derivation in : ant, 
 aft, at, ent, et, grap^, if, ift, it, log, nom, op, ot, fop^. Examples : 
 ©efant, ^^antftft, Stbootrtt, ©tubcttt, ^oii, <SknoQvapf}, 
 mt^oiit, ^ianift, 3efuit, ZiftolOQ, Iftrottom, ^^tlant^ro^, 
 3fbtot, ^f)ttofot>ft. 
 
 c. All feminine nouns in : c, et, et, er, te, in, ton, l^ctt, !ett, 
 fc^aft, Ung, ur. Examples : ©lume, flower ; @(f|atmel, reed-pipe ; 
 ©ptnbel, spindle ; itHV, liver ; iOfelobie, melody ; SotDttt, lioness, 
 SJatlott, nation ; Segeben^ett, event ; Sletntgfeit, trifle ; ©gen- 
 
 f(Q(tft, quality ; SSerfaffttttg, constitution ; 9Zatttt, nature. 
 
36 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 Also the following feminine : 
 
 anfidit, 2ln[talt, Slntwort, 3lrbett, art, Srut, 
 View, institution, answer, work, kind, brood. 
 
 path, 
 
 San!, 
 bank, 
 
 Sibltotfie!, 
 library, 
 
 ■ Surg, 
 castle. 
 
 glut; 
 flood ; 
 
 gabrtf, 
 
 factory, 
 
 journey. 
 
 ?5trma, 
 firm. 
 
 Sorm, 
 form, 
 
 grac^t, 
 freight, 
 
 grou, 
 wife. 
 
 respite, 
 
 Oebii^r, 
 fee. 
 
 ©eburt, 
 birth. 
 
 3a(i)t; 
 
 yacht ; 
 
 ©efa^r, 
 danger. 
 
 ©egenb, 
 region. 
 
 ®Iut, 
 heat. 
 
 Sagb 
 hunt. 
 
 ©eftalt, 
 
 figure. 
 
 burden. 
 
 8tft, _ 
 cunning. 
 
 5Karf, 
 mark. 
 
 milt, 
 
 Oewott ; 
 force ; 
 
 9Jad)rtd)t, 9fa(f)ttgaa, 
 information, nightingal 
 
 3iotia, 
 e, notice. 
 
 9Jonn, 
 rule, 
 
 duty, 
 
 ■iperfon, 
 
 person, 
 
 pest. 
 
 ^Oft, 
 post. 
 
 ^roBinj, 
 province, 
 
 @^t(f)t ; 
 layer ; 
 
 Qual, 
 torment, 
 
 9?epubtt!, 
 republic, 
 
 ®aat, 
 seed. 
 
 <Si^ar, 
 multitude. 
 
 @d)tu^t, 
 ravine. 
 
 @d)Ia(f)t, ©i^rift, 
 battle, writing, 
 
 (Sd)ulb, (Sttrn, ®ud)t ; 
 debt, forehead, passion ; 
 
 S^at, Jbiir, Sradjt, STrift, SBa^I, 
 
 deed, door, mode of dress, pasturage, election, 
 
 clock, 
 
 ajocon,^ 
 vacancy, 
 
 SDelt, 
 world. 
 
 time. 
 
 mi- 
 
 number. 
 
 d. All adjective nouns : ber Orofee, bev 9?eid)e, bag ©c^one. 
 
 136. The characteristics of this declension are : tt or Ctt 
 
 in the genitive and all other cases, l/oth singular and plural. 
 
 (The feminine nouns are invariable in the singular). 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 37 
 
 EXAMPLES: 
 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 ber 8dwc 
 
 ^err; 
 
 bte ffllume 
 
 «anf 
 
 golDttt. 
 
 G. 
 
 be8 Siiwctt 
 
 5>eiTn ; 
 
 ber ^lume 
 
 Sanf 
 
 gowin. 
 
 D. 
 
 bem gdwctt 
 
 |)errtt ; 
 
 ber Slume 
 
 «onf 
 
 Comtn. 
 
 A. 
 
 ben 8o»ett 
 
 |)en-tt ; 
 
 bte Stume 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 San! 
 
 goiDtn. 
 
 N. 
 
 bte Soroett 
 
 §errett ; 
 
 bte 5Blumett 
 
 Sanfctt 
 
 ^orointten 
 
 G. 
 
 ber Siiroett 
 
 §en-ctt ; 
 
 ber ©lumen 
 
 Santett 
 
 goftinttett 
 
 D. 
 
 ben Softett 
 
 §eiTCn ; 
 
 ben S3Iumett 
 
 SBanUn 
 
 gomtnttcn 
 
 A. 
 
 bte SoiDCtt 
 
 ^errcn ; 
 
 bie Stumett 
 
 SSanUu 
 
 Sdininttcn 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 137. 
 
 NOUNS OF SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 1. ©te SroIIen bc§ Bmn 
 [tnb fe^r fc^arf. 
 
 2. S)a8 'ipferb wurbe »on bem 
 Sdtoen jerriffen. 
 
 3. SDte ftetne 5KauS befrette 
 ben Somen. 
 
 4. £)te §aut ber dJto^ven ift 
 fd)mars. 
 
 5. Tlan erjcifilt fiiJ) Btele 2lnef= 
 boten Don bem f^urftcn ^Bismartf. 
 
 6. Sin 9Jarr mo^t otele 9Jar= 
 rcn. 
 
 7. mi6)t bte ©tarfe beS .tdr= 
 :per8, fonbern bie beS ©eifteS ma(f)t 
 ben 9Jienfi^en jum §errn ber 
 <Srbe. 
 
 8. 2)ie SRaben 6ra(!^ten bem 
 ^ro^j^etcn @Iio8 @^)eifc. 
 
 9. 'iptoto mar ein @(f)iiler be8 
 SSeifen ©ofrateS. Seibc roaren 
 gro|e ^^iIofop£)cn unb fatten 
 @cf)u(en, meld^e Slfabemien ge= 
 nonnt murben. 
 
 1. The claws of the lion are 
 very sharp. 
 
 2. The horse was torn by 
 the lion. 
 
 3. The little mouse deliv- 
 ered the lion. 
 
 4. The skin of the moors is 
 black. 
 
 5. They tell many anec- 
 dotes of prince Bismarck. 
 
 6. One fool makes many 
 fools. 
 
 7. Not the strength of the 
 body, but that of the spirit 
 makes man the master of the 
 earth. 
 
 8. The ravens brought (to) 
 the prophet Elijah food. 
 
 9. Plato was a disciple of 
 the sage Socrates. Both were 
 great philosophers and had 
 schools, which were called aca- 
 demies. 
 
38 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 10. 35te ^^ramtbett fte^en 6et 
 2am in 3faWten ; in t^tten wur< 
 ben bic ^Uiumiett bcr ^bnige unb 
 ou^ anbere Setd^en betgefe^t. !Die 
 SBanbe ber STotentammertt finb 
 mtt .§terogtt)|3^ett bebecft. 
 
 11. !Dic Ueberfd^memmungen 
 be8 9ctt8 tnac^en tgljpten frucf)t= 
 bor. 
 
 12. Slteyanber ber ®ro|e ge= 
 teann oiele @^Iaif)t<n. (Seine 
 ©olbaten folgten i^m wttlig bur(^ 
 SBiiften unb iiber 90?eere. 
 
 10. The pyramids are (stand) 
 near Cairo in Egypt : in them 
 were entombed the mummies of 
 the kings, and also othercorpses. 
 The walls of the catacombs were 
 covered with hieroglyphics. 
 
 11. The inundations of the 
 Nile make Egypt fertile. 
 
 12. Alexander the Great won 
 many battles. His soldiers fol- 
 lowed him willingly through 
 deserts and over seas. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 138. To this declension belong masculine, feminine and 
 neuter nouns, viz. : 
 
 a. All monosyllabic masculine nouns, except the 18 enumer- 
 ated in Second Declension (135 a.), and the 11 in Fourth 
 Declension (145). 
 
 d. All monosyllabic neuter nouns, except the 4 in Fourth 
 Declension. 
 
 c. All polysyllabic masculine and neuter nouns, not enume- 
 rated in the other declensions. 
 
 d. All feminine nouns, except those of the Second Declension 
 and Tluttex and Zodjttt. 
 
 139. The characteristics of this declension are : Singular : 
 § or ti in genitive ; t in dative. Plural : t or tt in nominative, 
 genitive and accusative ; Cll or Cttt in dative. Most all take the 
 modified vowel in plural. The t of the dative singular is 
 dropped, if the noun is preceded by a proposition, thus : Sine 
 Kette Bon ®otb (not ®oIbe) ; a chain of gold. 5Ktt $ut unb Stod 
 (not §ute unb ©tOcEe) ; with hat and cane ; but : 2Jfit bem §ute 
 in bcr §anb ; with the hat in (the) hand. 
 
 (The feminine nouns are invariable in the singular.) 
 
 140. All masculine nouns of this declension form the 
 plural in t except the following, which take Ct : ®ei|"t, spirit ; 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 39 
 
 ®0tt, God ; 3rrtum, error; 8etb, body ; Tlaxm, man ; Drt, place ; 
 9tanb, edge ; 9iet(^tum, wealth ; @traU(f), shrub ; SBoIb, forest ; 
 SBurm, worm. (Drt takes also e, see 126.) 
 
 141. All neuter nouns of this declension form the plural 
 in C except the following, which take CV : 
 
 3la8, 
 carrion. 
 
 atmt, 
 
 office, 
 
 «ab, 
 bath. 
 
 Stlb, 
 
 picture 
 
 Sanb. 
 ;, ribbon. 
 
 Statt, 
 
 leaf, 
 
 Srett, 
 
 board, 
 
 book. 
 
 SDorf, 
 village, 
 
 Sanb.* 
 land. 
 
 roof. 
 
 S)en!moI,* 
 monument, 
 
 ©, ^ad), da% gelb. 
 
 egg, shelf, barrel, field. 
 
 room, 
 
 ©emiit, 
 mind. 
 
 sex. 
 
 @etb. 
 
 money. 
 
 @efi(^t, 
 face. 
 
 ©efpettft, ©emanb,* 
 apparition, garment, 
 
 @ta8, 
 glass. 
 
 ®Heb, 
 
 ®ut, 
 
 ®rab, 
 
 
 @ra8. 
 
 limb. 
 
 possession, grave. 
 
 
 grass. 
 
 §aupt, 
 head. 
 
 §au8, 
 house. 
 
 wood, 
 
 hen. 
 
 §orn. 
 
 horn. 
 
 ^ofpttal 
 hospital, 
 
 Capital, 
 capital. 
 
 /top of a\ 
 \ column. / 
 
 Salb, 
 
 calf. 
 
 Sorn. 
 corn. 
 
 Sletb, 
 
 dress. 
 
 2iaut, 
 herb. 
 
 8ti^t,* 
 light. 
 
 hole. 
 
 ^fanb. 
 
 pawn. 
 
 manl, 5jjeft, 
 
 mouth (anfmal.) nCSt 
 
 3iob, 
 
 wheel. 
 
 9tet8, 
 
 twig. 
 
 5Ranb, 
 edge. 
 
 ©c^ilb, @(^tot, 
 sign-board, lock. 
 
 @d)h)ert, 
 
 sword. 
 
 valley. 
 
 9itnb. 
 
 heifer. 
 
 kerchief. 
 
 people. 
 
 aSBort,* 
 word, 
 
 Sffietb, 
 
 woman 
 
 Stub. 
 , child. 
 
 *NoTE.— ©entmal, ®cmai^, ®ewanb, 8anb, Zl)al take also „e" 
 (see 127.) ; also ^olj, St^t, Slud), aSBort, (see 126). 
 
 143. All feminine nouns of this declension form the 
 plural in C. 
 
40 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 143. 
 
 N. ber ^bntg, 
 G. be8 SdnigS, 
 D. bent Sontgc, 
 A. ben Siinig, 
 
 ®etft, 
 ®eiftc§, 
 Oetfte, 
 ®eift, 
 
 N. bie Sonigc, ©etftcr, 
 
 G. ber Sontge, ©etfter, 
 
 D. ben Sdnigcn, ®et)'tctr», 
 
 A. bie 5fbntgc, ©etftct, 
 
 bo« «Pferb, SSu6). 
 beS ^ferbcg, S3uc^e«, 
 bem 'ijjferbe, Suii|C. 
 bo8 ^ferb, S3u4 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 bie ^aiib, 
 ber §anb, 
 ber §anb, 
 bie §onb, 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 bie §anbe, bte 'ipferbe, SUd^ct. 
 ber §dnbe, ber ^ferbc, SS&6)€V. 
 ben ^anbcn, ben ^ferbcn, 53Uc^cttt. 
 bie §anbe, bie '^pferbe, Sitter. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 144. NOUNS OF THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 1. ©08 Siad) meinf § §oufe)8 
 ift ^ij^er al8 bie ®<ld)C»r otter 
 anbern §<lufcr tm 'Dorfe, 
 
 2. Sd^ meite gem tm §aufe 
 eine§ greunbeS. 
 
 3. S)a8 ©eftet^ beS §irf^C§ 
 ift ^5rad)tig. 
 
 4. 3in S33inter |tnb bie Stage 
 lurj unb bie 31dtf)tc tang. 
 
 5. SCBir finb an einem STogc 
 geboren. 
 
 6. jDie §unbe bemac^en uitfere 
 
 7. 3n gro|en Stftbtctt gibt 
 e8 Diete ®tcbc. 
 
 H. Bie -Stftttct fatten oon 
 ben Srtumctt. 
 
 9. aWeine Sttem teben auf 
 bem iiianbe. 
 
 10. 3m iSommer ge^en toir 
 anf'g !i*anb. 
 
 1. Ttie roof of my house is 
 higher than the roofs of all 
 other houses in the village. 
 
 2. I like to stop at the house 
 of a friend. 
 
 3. The horns of the stag 
 are splendid. 
 
 4. In winter the days are 
 short arid the nights long. 
 
 5. We were born on the 
 same day. 
 
 6. The dogs guard our 
 houses. 
 
 7. There are many thieves 
 in large cities. 
 
 8. The leaves fall from the 
 trees. 
 
 9. My parents live in the 
 country. 
 
 10. In summer we are going 
 to the country. 
 
FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 41 
 
 11. ©te ^alaftc ber Sbntgc 
 finb l^errtti^. 
 
 12. jDte SBtnbc retnigen Me 
 1i!uft oon fc^abti(|en ©ilnftctt. 
 
 13. ®ie S^toftne unb ©ftnfc 
 fi^JDimmen auf bent 2:cic^e. 
 
 14. jDte ^&i)M ber wttbett 
 5liere ftnb fd)orf unb ^art. 
 
 15. Sluf ^ofien 33ergett tft tm= 
 nier ©ifince. 
 
 16- (Sr gibt fetnen ^nbetn 
 etne gute Srste^ung. 
 
 11. The palaces of the kings 
 are magnificent. 
 
 12. The winds purify the air 
 of noxious vapors. 
 
 13. The swans and geese 
 swim on the pond. 
 
 14. The teeth of wild ani- 
 mals are sharp and hard. 
 
 15. On high mountains is al- 
 ways snow. 
 
 16. He gives his children a 
 good education. 
 
 FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 145. To this declension belong : 
 
 a. All nouns ending in OV, as : 3Do!tOtr, ^rofeffOJr. Excep- 
 tions : ©ettrop^or, 5Eaftor, 9Jfatabor, aJieteor, which belong to the 
 third declension. 
 
 3. The following 31 masculine and neuter nouns : 
 
 Sli)n,* m. Sluge, n. Sauer,* m. SBttt, n. Sorn, m. 
 ancestor, eye, peasant, bed, thorn. 
 
 ®amon, m (Snbe, n. §emb, n. ^n\dt, n. (a)3orn, m.f 
 demon, end, shirt, insect, spur. 
 
 Gaffer,* m. ^onful, m. Sorbeer, m. 9)iaft, m. §erj, n. 
 Caflfre, consul, laurel, mast, heart. 
 
 9Jiu§M, ra. 9Jac^bar,* m. Dijv, n. ^apagei,* m. ©d^merj, m. 
 muscle, neighbor, ear, parrot, pain. 
 
 ^fau * m. ^falm, m. @ee, m. ©pajj* m. ©todiel, m. Sfaat, m. 
 pea-cock, psalm, lake, sparrow, sting, state. 
 
 Ungar, m. Untert^an,* m. ^Better, m. ^m?i, m. ^kvat m. 
 
 Hungarian, subject, cousin, interest, ornament. 
 
 f Plural of @)JOm is @^)orett. 
 
 *3l^n, ©auer, I'affcr, SflaH^bax, ^apaget, '^[au, <Spa^, Untert^an 
 are also used with the second declension. 
 
42 
 
 FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 146. The characteristics of this declension are: 8 or e& 
 in genitive ; some take C in dative singular ; but all take 
 tt or Ctt in all cases of plural. §erg takes Ctt§ in genitive and 
 en in dative singular. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. ber ©ouer, ©oftor, ^falm, ba8 D\)V, §erg. 
 
 G. be8 ®auerS, ©oftorg, ^fatmeS, beg D^rcg, §erjett)8. 
 
 D. bent SSamt, jDof'tor ^falmc, beitt Di)te, ^erjcn. 
 
 A. ben Saner, ©oftor ^fa(m, bo8 D^r, ^erj. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. bie Saucrn, ©oftoren, 'ipfalmen, bte D^rcn, ^ergett. 
 
 G. ber Sauertt, Softorctt, ^falraen, ber Dl^rett, ^erjen. 
 
 D. ben :33auern, ©ottoren, ^fatmen, ben D^rctt, ^ersett. 
 
 A. bie ©auertt, Softorcn, ^fatmctt, bie O^ren, ^ergcn. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 147. 
 
 NOUNS OF FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 1. 1)ie garbe t^rer Slugett ift 
 grou. 
 
 2. jDte ©to^eltt manc^er 
 Onfeften tjerurfadien oft gro^e 
 
 ' <Srf)nier5Ctt. 
 
 3. Unfere 3lt)nctt toaren Un= 
 tertfianen ber englif(!^en trone; 
 Wtr ober finb freie Siirger ber 
 S3eretntgten ©taotcn. 
 
 4. llbant) ift etne ©tabt im 
 ©taate 9Jeu 3)orf; fie ift bie 
 §an)3tftabt beS ©toatcS. 
 
 5. Seine 9?ofe o^ne ©orncit. 
 
 6. Sie H'affertt leben in 3Ifrtfa 
 unb bie Ungaren in (Suro^ia. 
 
 1. The color of her eyes is 
 gray. 
 
 2. The stings of some in- 
 sects often cause great pain. 
 
 3. Our ancestors were sub- 
 jects of the English crown ; but 
 we are free citizens of the 
 United States. 
 
 4. Albany is a city in the 
 State of New York ; it is the 
 capital of the State. 
 
 5. No rose without thorns. 
 
 6. The Caffres live in Africa 
 and the Hungarians in Europe. 
 
FIFTH DECLENSION. PRONOUN. 43 
 
 7. !iDer @o^n unfereS ^aftorS 
 fturbe 5um S'onfut crnamtt. 
 
 8. !Cte 'iPfalmCtt finb ein Sletl 
 ber Stbel 
 
 9. ®ie ^a^jagetett lonncn 
 fpre^en lernen. 
 
 7. The son of our pastor 
 was appointed consul. 
 
 8. The psalms are a part of 
 the iBible. 
 
 9. The parrots can learn to 
 speak. 
 
 FIFTH DECLENSION. 
 
 148. This declension comprises : 
 
 a. Masculine and neuter nouns adopted from modern 
 languages. They take S in genitive singular and § in all cases 
 of plural: thus: ber Sorb, be§ 8orb§, bte Sorbg ; ber.Soufiit, bee 
 Soufin^, bte SoufinS. 
 
 b. Neuter nouns of Latin derivation in rtl, il and those which 
 end in ittttt, or did so originally. They take § in genitive 
 singular and iCtt in all cases of plural ; thus : Sapttrtl, Sa|)ttal§, 
 ta|)ttalicn. goffil, gofftIS, g^offiltctt; ©tublum, ©tubiumS ; 
 ©tubicn ; ^rinjilJ (turn), ^rinji^g, '^xxsxix^Xt^. 
 
 149. Declension of proper names. 
 
 Masculine proper names with the article are declined like the 
 feminine nouns of the third declension (see 143) ; and feminine 
 proper names like the feminine nouns of the second declension 
 (see 136). Without the article they take either §, itt§, or Ctt§ in 
 the genitive singular, .thus : ffiart^, SJfartl^og, SfJJartettS, %tX%tXi^. 
 Proper names of countries and cities, etc., take § in genitive 
 singular : Slmerifal, 9io(f)efter§. 
 
 PRONOUN. I^iittoott. 
 150. Pronouns stand in place of nouns, or refer to them. 
 
44 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUN 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS, mt^onlittft mttvovtet. 
 
 151. Declension: 
 
 
 
 FIRST 
 
 PERSON. 
 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 id), 
 
 I. 
 
 
 N. toix, 
 
 we. 
 
 G: 
 
 metner, (meitt), 
 
 of me. 
 
 
 G. unfer, 
 
 of us. 
 
 D. 
 
 nttr, 
 
 to me. 
 
 
 D. un8, 
 
 to us. 
 
 A. 
 
 nttii), 
 
 me. 
 
 
 A. uitS, 
 
 us. 
 
 SECOND PERSON. 
 
 •N. bu, @te, thou, you. N. 3^r, @te, ye, you. 
 
 G. betner, (bein), Qf)rct, of thee, of you. G. (Surer, -S^rer, of you. 
 
 D. btr, Qifiim, to thee, to you. D. @U(^, ^'^nen, to you. 
 
 A. bl6), @te, thee, you. A. Suc^, @te, you. 
 
 THIRD PERSON. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 mcii.. 
 
 er he 
 
 feiner (fetn) of him 
 
 ifint ] „ , to him 
 p4 
 
 i^n 
 
 him 
 
 fern. 
 
 fie 
 t^rer 
 
 she 
 of her 
 to her 
 her 
 
 neut. 
 
 fetner (fetn) 
 
 irif* 
 
 It. 
 
 of it. 
 to it. 
 it. 
 
 PLURAL FOR ALL GENDERS. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 fie 
 i^rer 
 
 ri"* 
 
 they, 
 of them, 
 to them, 
 them. 
 
 153. The second person: Ju, J>citt<t, Vxx, t>it^ is 
 
 used : in poetry, worship, in addressing a child, or any person 
 with whom we are very familiar ; otherwise we use the words : 
 
 153. The genitive form mcitt, *Citt, fein, is the 
 
 older form, mostly used by poets : „93ergt| tttetn ntd)t," forget 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUN. 45 
 
 me not ! „§eut' i)ab' id) »Citt geba(f|t," (@ot^e). To-day I 
 have thought of thee. „2i5a8 !ann er ttjun unb toaS bebarf man 
 feitt?" (@(f)ttter). What can he do and who has need of him ? 
 
 154. Where the genitive feinet is used reflexively, the 
 word f clbft is added : (Sr f(f)onte fetner f elfeft ntcfit ; he did not 
 take care of himself ; but : er fdjonte f etttetr ntd)t ; he did not 
 spare him (another person). 
 
 155. If mcitt, l>Citt. S^r, feilt, iJjt are compounded 
 with : ^alben, toegetl, widen, the syllable et is put between them ; 
 by ttttjCt and CUVCV only t : thus : meinetf)albcn, for my sake ; 
 as for me ; betnCtmegen, O^retoegen, for thy, your sake ; 
 feinetoitlen, t£)rftwttlen, for his, for her sake ; unfcrt^alben, for 
 our sake ; euretoegett/ for your sake ; tl^retttiegen, for their sake. 
 
 156. The word flcQ of the third person dative and accu- 
 sative is used, where the action is reflexive, thus : tX faufte ftd) 
 etnen §ut, he bought himself a hat ; |le tt)iberfpra(| fid) , she 
 contradicted herself ; tX Itc| t^n »or fitf) fommen, he admitted 
 him into his presence ; ftc f(J)Iugen fl«J) 3Rann gcgen SRann, they 
 fought hand to hand ; (Ht'ly : man against man). 
 
 157. Reflexives for the first and second person 
 
 singular and plural are used as follows : with id) take Wilt or 
 Ittijift ; with *U take V\X or Jid) ; with ®ie take fid) ; with \0\X 
 take Utt§ ; with %\SX take Cttt^ ; thus : id) faufe Wit, I buy 
 (for) myself ; id) tt)afd)e tttid) ; I wash myself ; 5tt ftiirft *it, 
 or : ®ie roerben fitft tue^e t^un ; you will hurt yourself : ^aft 1>U 
 Dicft or ^aben Sic fifft gut amiifiert? did you enjoy yourself i 
 23Sit fiaben \xn^ mtt i^m unter^alten ; we have conversed with 
 him. §abt SO*^ *«•!) gebabet ? did yo bathe yourselves ? 
 
 158. The neuter of the third person "CIS " is also used : 
 
 a. As pre-announcement of. the subject : ©3 tft etn ®Ott, 
 instead of : @tn @ott iff. 
 
 b. Before impersonal verbs : C§ regnet, it rains ; eS ftopft, 
 there is a knocking. 
 
46 
 
 POSSESSIVE. 
 
 c. Before reflexive verbs : e8 ^ungert mt(^, I am hungry ; t% 
 friert miiJ), I am cold. But we can also say : mt(^ ^ungert ; mic^ 
 friert, etc. 
 
 d. ®S can be compounded with the preceding word, thus : 
 SBaS gtbt'« ? (gtbt eg). What is the matter ? ^c^ fami'g (fann e8) 
 nt(f)t bcgreifen ; 1 cannot comprehend it. SSJill er'8 (er eg) nt(f)t 
 laufen ? Will he not buy it ? 3ft'g (tft eg) tlt^t |o ? Is it not so ? 
 
 POSSESSIVES. ©cMttttjeigCttJe iJ^iittodirtct. 
 159. The possessive pronouns are : 
 
 FIRST 
 
 PERS. 
 
 SECOND PERS. 
 
 THIRD PERS. 
 
 
 
 masc. /em. 
 
 neui. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 mein, 
 my. 
 
 bein, 3^r, 
 thy. your. 
 
 fein, i^r, 
 
 his. her. 
 
 fein, 
 his. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 unfer, 
 
 our. 
 
 euer, 3f^r 
 your. 
 
 t^r, i^r, 
 their, their. 
 
 i^r. 
 their. 
 
 160. Their declension is : the singular like the indefinite 
 article (110) and the plural like the adjective, first declension, 
 (see Wt). 
 
 161. Connected with a noun they agree with it in gender, 
 number and case : metn Sruber, my brother ; meine^ ^ruberg, of 
 my brother ; metnCt 55rUber, of my brothers ; metnc SJiutter, my 
 
 mother ; metnct Mwitvc, of or to my mother ; metnen ©(^tteftern, 
 
 to my sisters ; fetnc S^ber, his pen ; (^eber is fern., hence : feinc); 
 i^rCS §aufeg, of her house, (§aug is neuter, hence : xifCt^, gen. 
 of neuter. 
 
 163. If not connected with a noun, but only referring 
 to the same, they take, according to the noun to which they refer, 
 either the masculine ending CV, or feminine t, or neuter ^ \ 
 thus: sing, masc: metnct, beinct, 3^rct, fetnct, t^rct; fem.: 
 meinc, beine, 3^rc, fetnc, il^re ; neut. : meiniJ, being, fetnS, t^r§. 
 Plur. masc. unferet ; fem.: unfere ; neut.: unfercS, etc. 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE. 
 
 47 
 
 If used as predicates they are not declined : 30fein tft bte 
 ©d)anbe, the shame is mine. Ser ^e(f)er tft betn. The cup is 
 thine. (Sch.) 
 
 163. Instead of: @§ tft meiner, betne, [etn§, etc., we can also 
 say : c8 tft ber, bte, baS meintge, beintge, fetnige, tijrtge. uiifrtgc, 
 «urtge, i^rtge. 
 
 164. To emphasize a possession more strongly the 
 
 word " etgcn own" is added ; thus : ttidn dgenct Sruber, my own 
 brother ; beinc etgettc ©(^tcefter, thy own sister ; feiii etgene^ Stnb, 
 his own child, etc. 
 
 165. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 1. aSera gef)()rt btefct diod? 
 imasc.) (58 tft meittcr. 
 
 2. 3ft ba8 feinc U§r ? (/m.) 
 ^\t\n, e§ tft metnc. 
 
 3. ^6) ^aht ein Sud) {neut.) 
 ^efunben. i*a6 fel^en, ob e« meinS 
 ift. 
 
 4. Sin §unb {masc.) tft geto= 
 tet toorben. ^% mag unferct fetn. 
 
 '5. ©n §aug {neut.) brennt 
 w ber SItnton @tra|e. (S§ totrb 
 ioci) m6]{ unfereS fetn ? 
 
 1. To whom belongs this 
 coat ? It is mine. 
 
 2. Is that his watch ? No, it 
 is mine. 
 
 3. I have found a book. 
 Let me see, if it is mine. 
 
 4. A dog has been killed. 
 It may be ours. 
 
 5. A house on Clinton street 
 is on fire. I hope it is not 
 ours. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVES. ^ltttt>cifcttt>e f^ilttooirtet. 
 
 166. The demonstrative pronouns are : biefer, m., biefe, 
 f., biefea, n., this ; jener, m., jene, f., jene§, n., that ; folclier, m., 
 ■fotd)c, f., fotd)e8, n., such a one ; berjentge, m., biejentge, f., ba8= 
 jentge, n., that one ; berfelbe, m., btefelbe, f., baSfetbe, n., the same ; 
 and the accented definite articles. (See 113.) 
 
 Note. — The accented neuter article „1>H^" employed as 
 ■demonstrative instead of biefer, etc., can be used for all genders, 
 both singular and plural ; thus : ba8 ift niein SSater ; ba3 finb 
 «teine ©c^weftem ; finb ba8 beine Sinber ? 
 
48 
 
 RELATIVE. 
 
 167. Declension. 35tefcr, jener, foli^er are declined like the 
 definite articles (110); berjentge, berfelbe, like the adjectives of the 
 second declension (187). 
 
 168. If SoldfCV is followed by „t\n," or by an adjective, it 
 drops the last syllable in all genders and cases : foli^ eilt SOtaitn, 
 such a man ; fold) etneS SWantteS, such a man's ; fotcf| fd)one ^^a^^ 
 such beautiful woman ; fold) HugeS Stub, such clever child. 
 
 RELATIVES. lS8cjic(|Ctt»e l^^uttoottev* 
 
 169. The relative pronouns are : h)e(d)er, m., meli^e, f., 
 lDeId)e8, n., who, what, which ; \DCt, who ; IJ)03, what ; and the 
 accented definite articles (113). 
 
 170. Declension. SBel^er, loeti^e, mld)t^ are declined like 
 the definite articles ; tter is declined as follows : N. tott, ttiaS ; 
 G. Weffen (roep), whose ; D. went, to whom ; A. tten, maS, whom,, 
 what. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 171. 
 
 1. IDer aWann, 5 en icft ge- 
 fel}en f)obe. 
 
 2. 'Der |)unb, tvelUfet mid) 
 gebtffen t)at, ffiurbe erfi^offcn. 
 
 3. Stnb l><Ȥ bie gtfc^e, 
 toel(f|e bu gefangen ^aft? 
 
 4. asset »<»§ t:^ut, ^em t[t 
 nid^t ju Irouen. 
 
 5. aBrtS id) tt)ia, i>rt§ tl^ue 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. The man (whom) I have 
 seen. 
 
 2. The dog which has bitten 
 me was shot. 
 
 3. Are these the fish, (whicK) 
 you have caught ? 
 
 4. .SV who does //%«/, (^m) is 
 not to be trusted. 
 
 5. What I will, (/■/4a/) I do. 
 
 6. @r ttitpe nid)t, Wa^ er 
 t^utt fodte. 
 
 7. SBctt ®ott Itebt, KCtt ftroft 
 cr. 
 
 8. SBcS (meffcn) «rob id) effe, 
 *e6 (beffen) Ctcb ii^ finge. 
 
 6. He did not know, what 
 (to do) he should do. 
 
 7. Whom God loves, (him\ 
 he chastens. 
 
 8. Whose bread I eat, his 
 song I sing. 
 
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. INDEFINITE. 49 
 
 INTERROGATIVES. «yr<»flenl>e S'iittodttet* 
 
 173. The interrogative pronouns are : Wer? who ? loaS? 
 what? teas fiiretn? m.; erne? f.; etn? n.; what kind? what sort 
 of a ? toelc^er, m.; mli)i, f.; toelc^eS, n.; which ? what ? 
 
 173. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1.. SBer^t bag get^an? ©n 
 Rmbt. 
 
 2. aSSaS fur etn Snabe? ©n 
 Heiner Snabe. 
 
 3. 2BeIc^erffnabe?2>cttnobe 
 ^at eg get^an. S)er @o^n beg 
 ©artnerS. 
 
 4. SBag i^aft bu 3erbrocEien? 
 Sine SToffe. 
 
 5. SBaS fur eine Saffe ? ©ne 
 irbene. 
 
 6. SBelc^eSlaffe? S)tea(te^or= 
 jettontoffe. 
 
 7. SBem foO tc^ btefen Slpfet 
 geben ? 
 
 8. 3BeffenSud|tft bag? 
 
 9. SBen foC ic^ mtt mtr ne^= 
 men? 
 
 1. Who has done that ? A 
 boy. 
 
 2. What (kind of a) boy ? A 
 little boy. 
 
 3. Which boy ? This boy 
 has done it. The son of the 
 gardener. 
 
 4. What have you broken? 
 A cup. 
 
 5. What (sort of a) cup ? An 
 earthen one. 
 
 6. Which cup ? The old por- 
 celain cup. 
 
 7. To whom shall I give this 
 apple ? 
 
 8. Whose book is this ? 
 
 9. Whom shall I take with 
 me ? 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 Unibeftitttinte ^uvtoovUv, 
 
 174. The indefinite pronouns are: tttatt, one, they; 
 iC^etf iCQli(tfeX, every, every one ; jcittttttl*, some one, some- 
 body ; jCtXtltttttttt, everybody, all men ; }ti(tttAttI>, no one, 
 nobody ; fcltft, ^ClbcV, self ; and the indefinite numerals : aU(, 
 all ; einiQC, etUOfe, some ; ettva^, something ; tClttCt, no 
 one ; Ittattdie, some, many ; tneffVete, several ; nid^tS, 
 nothing ; i>i6l(, many ; t»CtliQC, few ; etc. 
 
 175. Ittittt is used only in the nominative case. 
 
50 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 
 
 176. icftCK, j|egli(!t)er, ntanitfn have a threefold gender 
 and are declined like the definite articles (110) ; ttt<ttt(I|(tr before 
 „etn," (often also before adjectives) drops the last syllable in all 
 genders and cases, and is not declined. 
 
 177. uman9, ie^etmann, nieman'o are undeciined, 
 
 except in genitive singular when they take § or C^. 
 
 178. fCltȣt, fcldft are used only in connection with a 
 person, noun, or pronoun. 
 
 Note. — All these pronouns and numerals are written with 
 small initial letters, except at the beginning of a sentence, 
 (see 3). 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 179. indefinite pronouns. 
 
 1. 5Kan [agte mir. 
 
 2. SBa8 iDirb man baju fogen? 
 
 3. 3eber, (jegltdier) tl^ue roaS 
 rec^t tft. 
 
 4. ®tb jiebem, (jeglic^em, ie= 
 bermann) baS ©cine. 
 
 5. ^Jetttonb, ntemanb tear 
 l^ter. 
 
 6. S8 tft ntt^t jebermanns 
 ©oci^e. 
 
 7. ^ennen @te jemanb in 
 biefer®efeUfd)aft? 
 
 8. 3^ tenne niemonb. 
 
 9. Si) felber ^abe e8 get^an. 
 
 10. @r mirb c8 felbft t^un. 
 
 11. gr t^t e8 oon fclbft. 
 
 12. ©clbft ift ber ajtann. 
 
 13. ©ntge woHen e8 nii^t gtau= 
 ben. 
 
 14. ©tttdie jwanjtg SOteilen ent= 
 fernt. 
 
 15. Slfle finb ^ier. 
 
 16. StloaS l^at mid) gefto^en. 
 
 17. 9itcf)t8 tann miif). ab^alten. 
 
 18. aJiandjer erntet, ber ni(f)t 
 fiiet. 
 
 19. 3Jian(i) guter SUfann. 
 
 20. aRaniJ) \d)6mi Sinb. 
 
 Somebody, nobody was 
 is not everybody's 
 
 It 
 
 1. I was told, (one told me). 
 
 2. What will people say to it ? 
 
 3. Let every one do what is 
 right. 
 
 4. Give to every one his 
 due. 
 
 5. 
 here. 
 
 6. 
 forte. 
 
 7. Do you know any one in 
 this company ? 
 
 8. I know no one. 
 
 9. I have done it myself. 
 
 10. He will do it himself. 
 
 11. He did it voluntarily. 
 
 12. Self do, self have. cProv.) 
 
 13. Some will not believe it. 
 
 14. Some twenty miles dist- 
 ant. 
 
 15. All are here. 
 
 16. Somethinghaspricked me. 
 
 17. Nothing can hinder me. 
 
 18. Many a one reaps, who 
 does not sow. 
 
 19. Many a good man. 
 
 20. Many a beautiful child. 
 
ADJECTIVES. . 51 
 
 ADJECTIVES. ei8mf(J»rtft§tt>dttet. 
 
 180. The adjectives denote the quality of a thing. They 
 are : 
 
 a. betfiigenb, (attributive) when preceding the noun : ber gute 
 a«ann. 
 
 b. au8[agenb (predicative) when following the noun : ber 3Jiann 
 ift gut. 
 
 181. Their formation (see 67-73 and 81). 
 
 183. They agree with the noun in gender, number and case : 
 gutctr 3J?ann, gute ^^rau, gute§ ^%b ; gutc ^Wanner, {N.pl.); 
 gutet grauen, {G.pl.) ; guten fftnbern, {D.pl.). 
 
 183. They are written with small initial letters, but when they 
 include the noun, they become nouns themselves and are written 
 with a capital letter, thus : ber fletne Snabe ift tronf ; the little 
 boy is sick ; ber ^letne ift frant ; the little one is sick. 
 
 184. Most adjectives can be used as adverbs, thus : ber 33oget 
 fingt fC^Ott, the bird sings beautifully. 
 
 185. The comparison of the adjective is called : „@tetgerung," 
 and the different degrees : „@tufen" (steps). There are three 
 „@tufen": erfte (1.) ®tufe, positive ; jmeite (2.) Stufe, comparative ; 
 iritte (3.) Stufe, superlative. The comparative is formed by 
 the ending „er"; the superlative by „ft." Some are compared 
 irregularly. 
 
 
 E3 
 
 cami 
 
 )les: 
 
 
 1. ©tufe. 
 
 2. ©tufe. 
 
 
 3. @tufe. 
 
 
 Hein 
 
 fteiner 
 
 
 fleinft or 
 
 am fteittften. 
 
 ebel 
 
 ebter 
 
 
 ebctft " 
 
 om ebelften. 
 
 gut 
 
 beffer 
 
 
 beft " 
 
 am beften. 
 
 grog 
 
 grower 
 
 
 groBt " 
 
 am grb^ten. 
 
 ¥^ 
 
 pl^er (not l^Bc^i 
 
 er) pc^ft " 
 
 am tjoc^ften. 
 
 Note. — With 
 
 the positive 
 
 use 
 
 " Wte, as " ; with the compara- 
 
 tive " a{8, than" : 
 
 ; thus : er ift fo att t»le ic^, he 
 
 is as old as I am ; 
 
 er ift alter aU id), 
 
 , he is older 
 
 than 
 
 I am. 
 
 
52 DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 First Declension. 
 
 186, The adjective without the article takes the endings of the 
 
 same. 
 
 EXAMPLES : 
 
 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 
 masc. fern. 
 
 neut. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 grower 
 
 ajiann altc grau 
 
 ft^bncS 
 
 Mnb. 
 
 G. 
 
 gropett ' 
 
 *=(«) 9Jtannc3 altet grau 
 
 fc^onen (8) 
 
 Mnbe3. 
 
 D. 
 
 gro|em 
 
 aJianne alter grau 
 
 [c^bnein 
 
 Sinbe. 
 
 A. 
 
 gro^en 
 
 ajiann a(tc grait 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 fc^bnc^ 
 
 tinb. 
 
 N. 
 
 gro|c 
 
 gjiiinner atte grauen 
 
 f^bnc 
 
 Sinber. 
 
 G. 
 
 gro^et 
 
 SJiannet alter grauen 
 
 [c^oner 
 
 Sinber. 
 
 D. 
 
 grogen 
 
 iDfiinnern altett grauen 
 
 fc^bnen 
 
 Sittbern. 
 
 A. 
 
 gro|c 
 
 SOfianner altc grauen 
 
 f^bnc 
 
 tinber. 
 
 
 *NOTE.— 
 
 -With nouns of second declension "§" 
 
 is more 
 
 euphonious, thus : gro|eg (Slefanten. 
 
 Second Declension. 
 187. The adjective preceded by the definite article, or by a 
 pronoun or numeral, which is declined like the definite article. 
 EXAMPLES : 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 
 
 The great man. 
 
 Our great men. 
 
 N. 
 
 ber grope SJiann 
 
 unfere gro^Ctt aWiinner. 
 
 G. 
 
 be« gropctt SJianiie^ 
 
 unjerer gro^Ctt iliiinner 
 
 D. 
 
 bent gropctt 3Jianne 
 
 unjeren gropcn SWcinnern. 
 
 A. 
 
 ben gropen 2Jfann 
 
 fern. 
 That old woman. 
 
 unfere gro|ctt 3J?anner. 
 
 
 These old women. 
 
 N. 
 
 jene alte gran 
 
 btefe altcn f^rauen 
 
 G. 
 
 jener attcn "^xm 
 
 btefer altcn S'rauen. 
 
 D. 
 
 lener altcn ifrau 
 
 btefen altcn jjrauea. 
 
 A. 
 
 jene altc %tm 
 
 neut. 
 
 btefe attcn grauen. 
 
 
 The beautiful child. 
 
 All beautiful children. 
 
 N. 
 
 bag fi^bnc Sinb. 
 
 afle f(|bncn Stnber. 
 
 G. 
 
 be« id)bnctt Stnbe3. 
 
 atler jt^bncn Sinber. 
 
 D. 
 
 bem fdibnctt Sinbe. 
 
 atlen f^bncn Stubern. 
 
 A. 
 
 ba8 fc^bnc Hinb. 
 
 atle j(J|bncn ttnber. 
 
DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 53 
 
 188. If preceded by the indefinite article, or by a pronoun or 
 ■numeral, which is declined in the same way, the nominative 
 masculine takes tX and the nominative and accusative neuter 
 <§, thus : 
 
 a, my, not a, some. 
 Masc. N. etn, ntein, fetn, manc^' grower OJ?oitn. 
 
 Neut. N. and A. ettt, metn, fetit, mond)' fcJidneS ^nb. 
 
 189. If two or more adjectives without the article, or pronoun 
 or numeral precede the noun, then all the adjectives take the 
 «nding of the definite article in the nominative and accusative, 
 both singular and plural ; in the other cases only the first adjective 
 is declined in the same way, while all others take the ending of 
 the second declension, viz.: CIt. 
 
 EXAMPLES : 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 W>mx 
 
 junget aJJann 
 
 fdliine junge aJJanner. 
 
 ■G. 
 
 jrfionctt 
 
 (§) jungen gJcanneS 
 
 fi^onet jungen 3Jfanner. 
 
 I). 
 
 ji^onctn 
 
 jungcn 5Kantte 
 
 f(f)onen jungen TOannern 
 
 A. 
 
 j^onen 
 
 jungen 3Utonn 
 
 fern. 
 
 fiJ)bnc junge SWiinner. 
 
 "N. 
 
 retd)e 
 
 alte grau 
 
 retdie alte g'rauen. 
 
 O. 
 
 retc^et 
 
 alten grau 
 
 reic^ev otten grauen. 
 
 D. 
 
 reicfict 
 
 altctt %xwl 
 
 retrfien alten grauen. 
 
 A. 
 
 retifie 
 
 altc fjrau 
 
 neut. 
 
 rettfie alte grauen. 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 jungen, fi^oncS, ortigcS- Sinb. 
 
 
 G. 
 
 jungen, («) jcEiiincn, 
 
 . orttgen £tnbe«. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 jungcm, frfioncn, 
 
 arttgen Stnbe. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 jungeS, jcfibncS, 
 
 arttgeg Stnb. 
 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 ■ N. 
 
 jungc, fcEiiine, 
 
 ortige SSinber. 
 
 
 G. 
 
 junget, |(^bnctt, artigen Sinber. 
 
 
 D. 
 
 jungen, [(^onen, 
 
 arttgen Stnbern. 
 
 
 A. 
 
 juuge, fc^one, 
 
 artige Hinber. 
 
54 
 
 ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 If an adverb precedes the adjective, only the latter is declined, 
 thus : 
 
 N. etn firtnj jungcr ajiann, a vejy young man ; and not ettl 
 
 gonjct junger SOtonn. 
 G. eineS ganj jungctt SKanneg, etc. 
 
 190. Adjectives often require a certain case. 
 a. The genitive (in relation to things). 
 
 anfiditiQ. SBir fturben be* 
 
 ©teraeS nti^t anfid^tig. 
 ibettutltig. (Sr tft ber ^tlfe 6e= 
 
 biirfttg. 
 (•Cttdtiflt. 3d) bin beS ®elbe8 
 
 |el)r benbttgt. 
 Ibelvugt. I5rtftft(^tetner@ij)ulb 
 
 bett)u|t. 
 eittgcJ)Cttf. Set ineiner SOBorte 
 
 eingebenf. 
 fSf^ig. @te tft ctner fol^en Sl^at 
 
 ind)t fa^tg. 
 ftroi^. (Sr rotrb feineS Seben8 
 
 ntc^t t'ro^. 
 flcftauKifl. ®er ®ieb ift be« 
 
 5Berbre^cn8 geftanbtg. 
 0elV(irttt). 3()r Mnnt ber Strafe 
 
 gemarttg fein. 
 gelvig. & tft femes (SrfoIgeS 
 
 gctt)t|. 
 f ttni>i9. Sr ift beS SBegeS tunbig. 
 Iel>id. ®te finb 31}re8 a3erfpre= 
 
 d)enS lebig. 
 Io§. 3c^ bin feiner Io8. 
 m&^tig. @inb @ie ber beut= 
 
 f(i)cn ©praise mcii^tig? 
 1ltut)e. 3^c^ bin be« 3S3arten§ 
 
 milbe. 
 frttt. (Sr war feineS SebenS fatt. 
 ftfjttlltifl. ®ie ift be« 3)iebfta^l8 
 
 fc^ulbig. 
 
 We did not get sight of the 
 star. 
 
 He is in need of help. 
 
 I am in great need of the 
 money. 
 
 He is conscious of no guilt. 
 
 Be mindful of my words. 
 
 She is not capable of such an 
 action. 
 
 He does not enjoy his life. 
 
 The thief has confessed his 
 crime. 
 
 You may expect punishment. 
 
 He is sure of his success. 
 
 He knows the way. 
 
 You are freed from your 
 promise. 
 
 I am rid of him. 
 
 Are you master of the Ger- 
 man language ? 
 
 I am tired of waiting. 
 
 He was tired of his life. 
 She is guilty of theft. 
 
ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 55 
 
 fidget. (Sr ift ber Stettc ficfier. 
 telli^rtftle. Sr murbe ctneS gro= 
 
 |en ©tutfeS teit^aftig. 
 ul>ett>vuffi0. 3rf) bin be8 S:an= 
 
 5en8 itbcrbniffig. 
 ^ett>a(J^ti9. er tft bes 3JJorbe8 
 
 t)crba(f)ttg. 
 tfctluftig. (Sr murbe fetner S^re 
 
 oertufttg. 
 Uoa. (Sr tft beS aSetneS ootl. 
 toett, »»)tttt»i0. Ste tft meiner 
 
 3l(i)tung murbtg. (ttiert.) 
 
 He is certain of the position. 
 He became a participant of a 
 great fortune. 
 
 I am sick of dancing. 
 
 He is suspected of murder. 
 He forfeited his honor. 
 
 He is full of wine. 
 
 She is worthy of my esteem. 
 
 b. The dative (in relation to persons). 
 
 ai&ttunnig. @r ift fetncm 
 
 aSerjpredien abtriinnig 
 
 geicorben. 
 aibgeneigt. 3if) bin t f) m nid)t 
 
 abgeneigt. 
 (tngenefjtn. SBmn e§ 3 f) it e n 
 
 angette^m tft. 
 itnftdgig. ® tft m t r anfto|tg. 
 angeliot^en. Ss tft i ^ m ange= 
 
 boren. 
 ^^nlid). ®a6 ftetit t^r, i^m 
 
 a^n(td). 
 ttttgftUdi. 3JJ tr tft gaits angft= 
 
 Itrf). 
 dtrdetU^. ®aS tft mir fel^r 
 
 ttrgerliif). 
 Ixtnge. 3fft b t r battge Dor ben 
 
 golgen ? 
 6ct>ttini*- SBtttft bu mtrbe= 
 
 ^ulflic^ fein? 
 liet>cn{a(f|. ©te ®ac^c fc^eint 
 
 m i r fef)r bebenflicf). 
 ftchJttfet. -3d) bin mir beffcn 
 
 tto^I bctt)u|t. 
 
 He has proved faithless to 
 his promise. 
 
 I am not averse to him. 
 If it pleases you. 
 
 It is offensive to me. 
 
 It is his nature, (inborn). 
 
 That is (just) like her, him. 
 
 I feel very uneasy. 
 
 That vexes me greatly. 
 
 Are you afraid of the conse- 
 quences ? 
 
 Will you help me ? 
 
 The matter seems to me very 
 serious. 
 
 I am well aware of it. 
 
56 
 
 ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 f>ctannt. & tft m i r bcfannt. 
 (»cfd>icJ»Ctt. (S« ttar i I) m ni^t 
 beid)teben. 
 
 6c[d^tt)crltd) ? 
 f>e<incni. ^a^t e8 35 1 r, (nta= 
 
 ifien ®te e8 fi(i)) bequem. 
 t)ienli<^. ©ie[e ®j)ei[e tft 
 
 3f^nen nm bienlirf). 
 txittflbat. 3c^ bin me in em 
 
 @d|opfer banfbar. 
 t>un(el. Ser ®inn biefer SCBorte 
 
 ift m i r bunlet. 
 eiQcn. £)a8 ift i ^ m, i ^ r eigen 
 einleud)tenl>. (flat). e« ift 
 
 mir, il^m, i^reinleud^= 
 
 tenb. 
 efel^rtft. ©iefer Slnblid ift m ir 
 
 e!el^aft 
 ctrgcften. @rn)arfeirtem§)emi- 
 
 ergeben. 
 etiattlbt. SBenn e8 m i r eriaubt 
 
 ift. 
 evinnevU^. ®ie @ad)e ift m i r 
 
 erinnerlic^. 
 ettvunf^t. S)a6 !ommt mir 
 
 ganj erttiinfdit 
 fteml). 3d) bin i t) m ganj fremb. 
 gefftUid. SSenn e«— wie e8 
 
 3? ^ n e n gefallig ift. 
 gcfa^vHcQ. (S8 fonnte ®ir 
 
 (3?^nen) gefatjrttif) tter» 
 
 ben. 
 gei)otf am. Sr ift f e i n e n dU 
 
 tern gc^orfam. 
 gel&ufig. !©a6iftit)m gelaufig. 
 geltf 0dcn. ®r ift m i r gewogcn. 
 getoad)?cn. (Sr ift f e i n e r a[uf= 
 
 gabe gewaiiifen. 
 
 He is known to me. 
 
 It was not allotted to him. 
 
 Is it burdensome to you ? 
 
 Take your ease. 
 
 This food is not wholesome 
 for you. 
 
 I am grateful to my creator. 
 
 The meaning of these words 
 is obscure to me. 
 
 That is peculiar to him, her. 
 It is clear to me, him, her. 
 
 This sight is loathsome to 
 me. 
 
 He was devoted to his mas- 
 ter. 
 
 If permitted to me. 
 
 I remember the matter. 
 
 That is very desirable to me. 
 
 I am quite a stranger to him. 
 If — as you please. 
 
 It might become dangerous 
 to you. 
 
 He is obedient to his 
 parents. 
 
 He is conversant in it. 
 He is favorable to me. 
 He is equal to his task. 
 
ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 57 
 
 tfUiif. Sr tommt t [) m gki(f|. 
 flttt. -3{^ bin S t r (3t)nen) gut. 
 I^cilfant. ©tefe M)vt ift btr 
 
 ^etlfam. 
 i^cife, wavm, talt. (S« ift 
 
 m i r ^ei|, toarm, t'att. 
 J>oH>. @r ift m i r niii)t fe^r ^olb. 
 
 foftlbar. 9Ketnc 3"t ift mir 
 
 foftbar. 
 Iftftig. ©icfe SWufif ift mir 
 
 Kftig. 
 lielb, @8 ift mir lieb, ba| @ie 
 
 !ommen. 
 nitl^e. Soinm' m i r ni(f)t gu uo^e. 
 nu^li^. 33iefe8 ^uiJ) foax 
 
 O^nen fe^r nitpcE). 
 
 iratfaitt. (Ss fi^eint mir nid)t 
 
 ratfam. 
 |(^ft»li(^. ®a8 8efen fotcfjer 
 
 53ud)er ift ber -Sugenb 
 
 fc^obiid). 
 tteu. gr ift © i r (3^nen) treu. 
 utt<tui§ftef(Ii(Q. ®r ift m i r m-- 
 
 au0ftef)tid). 
 wn1feQveiUi(tf- ® ift m i r un- 
 
 begreifliii). 
 nhevU^eti. @r ift i f| m itber= 
 
 legen. 
 unmthcffvlidf. @8 ift i ^ n e n 
 
 unentbet)rlic^. 
 ^tvant^ovUi^. ®ie finb m i r 
 
 bafur oerantmortlicEi. 
 
 ifnHn^UH). ^d) bin i \) m bo= 
 
 fur oerbinbltif). 
 tfev^evifUd}. 3}i& 9teife itiurbe 
 
 i i) m serberbliif). 
 ifetffafit- ©r ift m i r Ber^a|t. 
 
 He is his equal. 
 I like you. 
 
 This lesson is wholesome for 
 you. 
 
 I am hot, warm, cold. 
 
 He does not like me very 
 much. 
 
 My time is precious to me. 
 
 This music is annoying to 
 me. 
 
 I am glad that you are 
 coming. 
 
 Don't come near me. 
 
 This book was of great use 
 to you. 
 
 It does not seem advisable 
 to me. 
 
 The reading of such books is 
 hurtful to young people. 
 
 He is faithful to you. 
 He is unbearable to me. 
 
 It is inoomprehensible to me. 
 
 He excels him. 
 
 They cannot do without it. 
 
 You are responsible to me 
 for it. 
 
 I am obliged to him for it. 
 
 The journey was ruinous to 
 him. 
 
 He is hateful to me. 
 
58 VERB. 
 
 Are you related to him ? 
 
 She is dear to me. 
 
 You are welcome to me. 
 
 He, she feels so well. 
 I am greatly attached to her, 
 him. 
 
 It does not agree with you. 
 
 »»ei:lt>atti)t. <Sinb ®ie mtt 1 1) m 
 
 tiemonbt ? 
 toett. ®te tft m i r ftert (teuer.) 
 tviUf ommcn. 3^^r feib mtr 
 
 totHfommen. 
 \»o1)l. 3 f) m, t ^ r tft fo ico^I. 
 Sttget^an. Qii) bin if)r, if|m 
 
 fe^r suget^an. 
 jttttftglirtj. S)a8 tft 55 ir 
 
 O^nen) nic^t jutrogttd). 
 
 191. The following adjectives govern the accusative in rela- 
 tion to age, price, weight or measure : olt, "old ; brett, broad ; 
 bid, thick ; gro§, large ; ^0^, high ; lang, long ; reid), rich ; fd^toer, 
 heavy ; ttef, deep ; ttiert, worth. Examples : ©er 5Ring tft eittCtt 
 SEfialer inert ; the ring is worth one Dollar, ©ie ®rube tft ^i^n unb 
 etnCtt ^otbCtt 0u| ttef ; the pit is ten and a half feet deep. 
 
 VERB. Sctttoott, 
 
 193. Verbs are divided into : 
 
 a. Auxiliary verbs, forming the tenses, ^tlfSjettlDOrter ber ^ttt, 
 viz : ^aben, have ; fein, be ; Werbetl, become. 
 
 d. Auxiliary verbs of mode, ^tlfSsettmorter ber 9lu3fageWeife, 
 {Modal auxil.) viz : biirfett, to be allowed ; foittten, can, to be able ; 
 laffen, let, cause ; mbqen, may ; miiffen, must, to be obliged; fodett, 
 shall, be to ; iDOlIen, will, be willing. 
 
 c. Transitive verbs, jtetenbe ^^'^'''''l^t^'^ ! t'ley have an active 
 and passive voice : t(| lobe, I praise ; t(f) Werbe gelobt, I am praised. 
 
 d. Intransitive verbs, jiedofe 36itttlOCter ; they have no passive 
 voice : \i) f)3tete, I play. 
 
 e. Reflexive verbs, juriidjtetettbc ^citwbrter : i<^ freue mi^, 
 
 I am glad ; VC fiiVC^tet fic(j, he is afraid. 
 
 /. Impersonal verbs, Ultperfbllliilje ^eitWbrter : eS regnet, it rains ; 
 e8 fd)neit, it snows. 
 
 g. Compound verbs, jufammengefc^te 3"ttobrtcr: auf^mai^en, 
 
 to open ; eln^fi^Iafcit' to fall asleep. 
 
CONJUGATION. 59 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 193. There are three conjugations, viz : 
 
 194. First conjugation : verbs retaining the stem vowel in 
 all tenses ; they form the preterit in tc, and the participle in t 
 with QC as augment : loben, lohtc, gClobt. 
 
 195. Second conjugation: Verbs changing the vowel in 
 preterit and participle, some also in the present tense, otherwise 
 
 the same as first conjugation : brenneti, bmttnte, flcbrannt. The 
 
 verbs of this conjugation are : breitlteit, burn ; btingett, bring ; 
 benfen, think ; biirfett, dare, may (pres. barf) ; fenncn, know ; 
 fiinnen, can (pres. tann) ; mijgen, may (pres. mag); mit|'fen, must, 
 (pres. mu^) ; nennett, call, name ; rennen, run ; fenben, senrd ; 
 Wenbett, turn : ttiffcn, know (pres. tuet^) ; ttJOlIett, be willing (pres. 
 toia.) 
 
 196. Third conjugation: Verbs whose preterit is mono- 
 syllabic ; they change the stem vowel and form their participle 
 in en, with QC as augment, thus : fC^Clt, jrt^, gCfeflCtt, see, saw 
 seen. (See list of irregular verbs). 
 
 Note. — ^All verbs with prefixes drop the augment QC, thus : 
 erfe^cn, erfafi, erfet^en, discern. 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 197. There are three principal tenses (^aupti^eiten) viz : 
 Present, (Segejiwart ; Past {preterit) SSergattgen^eit ; Future, 3«= 
 funft. Three additional tenses (Siebenseiten), viz .- Present 
 perfect, 25oflenbete ©egenWart ; Past perfect, {pluperfect), 58otIett« 
 bete 93ergangen^eit ; Future' perfect, SSoIIenbete ^ufunft. The prin- 
 cipal tenses denote duration ; the additional tenses, perfection : 
 idE) fifireibe, I write, — duration ; ic^ ^abe ge[c^rieben, I have written, 
 — perfection. 
 
 MODES. 
 
 198. There are three modes, viz : Indicative, Sffitrflic^fett : 
 iif) ^atte, I had. Subjunctive, ajiijgttc^fett : tcf) pttc, I might 
 have, (if I had). Imperative, Sefeljt : ^O.U\ have. 
 
'60 
 
 CONJUGATION OF l^ttbeit. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 199. The Infinitive, ©runbform, of all verbs is formed in 
 tn and may be used as noun : baS STvinfftt, the drinking ; ba8 
 •©e^Ctt, the going. 
 
 300. The Participle can be used as adjective : lobeitl^e 
 SGBorte, praising words ; fetigeni>{ ©tro^Iett, parching rays ; 
 
 gcbratene OanS, roasted goose. 
 
 301. Compound verbs are separated in the Present and 
 Preterit, the first word taking the second place. In the Perfect 
 tenses the augment QC is placed between the two words. 
 Example : etn=fif)tcifen, to fall asleep. Pres.: id) fc^tafe ein ; Preterit : 
 id) [(^Itef ein ; Pres. perf.: id)' bin etngeft^Iafen ; Past perf.: ic^ toav 
 etngc[c^tafcn ; Future : id) werbe einfi^Iofen ; Future perf. : tc^ tterbe 
 <tn9cf(^Iafen fein. 
 
 303. All verbs except the " Impersonal " have a singular 
 and plural. 
 
 303. Conjugation of f)aben, have. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 I have. 
 
 
 
 I may have. 
 
 1. 
 
 i^ f)abe, 
 
 
 
 1. id) ^abe, 
 
 2. 
 
 I bu ^aft, 
 \ ©ie I)aben, 
 
 
 
 2 I bn ^abeft, 
 ■ 1 ©ie ^aben, 
 
 3. 
 
 er, fie, e8, mon 
 Plural. 
 
 ^t. 
 
 
 3. • er, fie, eS, man ^abe. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 lt)tr ^ben, 
 
 
 
 1. ttir l^aben. 
 
 2. 
 
 i 3^r ^abt, 
 I ®ie ^aben, 
 
 
 
 o JS^c^abet, 
 ^- t @ie ^aben, 
 
 3. 
 
 fie ^aben. 
 
 
 
 3. fie tiaben. 
 
 
 
 Present 
 
 perfect. 
 
 
 I have had. 
 
 
 
 I may have had. 
 
 1. 
 
 ti^ ^abe get)abt, 
 
 
 
 1. id) ^abe getjabt, 
 
 2 I bu fiaft gctjabt, 
 1 ®ie I}aben gel^abt. 
 
 2 I bu I)abeft ge^abt, 
 ; \ @te ^aben geljabt. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
CONJUGATION OF l^abCtt. 
 
 61. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Past. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 ]. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I had. 
 \6) f)atte, 
 
 ( bu fiotteft, 
 
 er, fie, eS, man mte. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 tutr flatten, 
 S^x fiattet, 
 Sie Ijatten, 
 fie fatten. 
 
 1. 
 
 3. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I might have. 
 
 id) £)atte (miirbe '^aben)^ 
 ( bu f)(itteft, 
 ( Ste gotten, 
 
 er, fie, eS, man tjtltte. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 3. 
 
 toil" patten, 
 3;f|r pttet, 
 @ie fatten, 
 fie pttcn. 
 
 Past perfect. 
 
 I had had. 
 1. tc^ l^atte gc^abt, 
 
 „ ( bu ^attcft ge^abt, 
 ( i&te fatten ge^abt, 
 etc. 
 
 I might have had. 
 ic^ ^iitte ge^abt, (toilrbe- 
 ge^abt ^aben), 
 
 ( bu ^(tttcft get)abt, 
 ( ®te patten ge^abt. 
 etc. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 I shall have. 
 1. id) toerbe "^aben, 
 „ I bu ttirft ^aben, 
 
 I ©ie werben ^oben, 
 3. er, fie, e8, man tt>trb ]^a= 
 ben. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. iDtr werben ^aben, 
 „ j S^t toerbet ^oben, 
 ■ "^ (Ste werben ^aben, 
 fie werben ^aben. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I shall have. 
 
 ic^ werbe ^aben, 
 ( bu werbeft ^aben, 
 I @ie werben ^aben, 
 
 er, fie, eS, mon werbe ^a^ 
 ben. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Wtr werben ^aben, 
 Q^v werbet ^aben, 
 @te werben I^aben, 
 
 „ ( 3^r werbet ^aben, 
 • ( @te werben I^aben, 
 ,3. fie werben ^ben, 
 
62 CONJUGATION OF fcin. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Future perfect. 
 
 I shall have had. I shall have had. 
 
 1. ill) tterbe gefiabt ^aben, 1. id) werbe ge^abt ^abcn, 
 
 2 ( bu ttirft geljabt ^aben, -2 \^^ werbeft ge'^abt ^aben, 
 ■ I ©ie werben ge^abt l^aben. • ( @te werben ge^abt l^aben, 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Sing.:^be! Plur : ^abt ! Sing, and Plur.: I)aben ®te ! 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Pres.: ^abenb. Past : ge^abt. 
 
 304. Conjugation 
 
 of fcln, 
 
 be. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I am. 
 1. i^ bin, 
 
 ^- ( @ie finb, 
 
 3. er, fie, eS, man ift, 
 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 (If) I be. 
 
 id) fei, 
 ( bu feieft, 
 ( ®ie feien, 
 
 er, fie, e8, man fei 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. toir finb, 
 2 S^^rfeib, 
 ^- 1 @te finb, 
 3. fie finb. 
 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 ttir feien, 
 ( 5I)r feiet, 
 1 Sie feien, 
 
 fie feien. 
 
 Present 
 
 perfect. 
 
 I have been 
 1. id) bin getoefen, 
 o ( bu bift gettjefen, 
 ■ 1 ®ie finb getoefen. 
 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 I may have been. 
 
 ii) fei geraefen, 
 bu feieft geftefen, 
 ©ie feien gewefen. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
CONJUGATION OF fein. 
 
 63 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 I was 
 id) Wor, 
 I bit worft, 
 
 er, fie, c«, man war. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. itJtv tDaren, 
 
 2 ( Ql)v ftaret, 
 
 • ( @te toaren, 
 
 3. fie maren. 
 
 I had been. 
 1 . id) war gewefen, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 (If) I were, 
 i^ marc (loilrbe fein), 
 ( bit toSrcft (iciirbeft fein), 
 ■ ( @ie miiren (n>Urben fein), 
 er, fie, eS, man wftre, (h)Ur= 
 be fein). 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. toir iraren (tourben fein), 
 2 j ^x iDciret (wiirbet fein), 
 
 3. 
 
 ] @ie iDciren (njiirben fein), 
 fie waren (ttiltrben fein). 
 
 Past perfect. 
 
 2 j bu warft gewefen, 
 • |@ie waren gewefen. 
 etc. 
 
 2. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 I shall be. 
 1. id) werbe fein, 
 2 ( bu wirft fein, 
 ■ I @ic werben fein, 
 3. er, fie, e«, mon toirb fein. 
 
 Plural. 
 ton werben fein. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 j S^v icerbet fein, 
 
 ( @te toerben fein, 
 
 fie rterben fein. 
 
 I might have been. 
 
 id) to'dxt getoefen (miirbe 
 
 gcmefen fein), 
 f bu ttiarft (mitrbeft getoefen 
 ! fein), 
 ®ie waren (miirben getpe= 
 fen fein), 
 etc. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I shall be. 
 
 id) toerbe fein, 
 j bu werbeft fein, 
 ( ®ie raerben fein, 
 
 er, fie, eS, man toerbe fein. 
 
 Plural, 
 ttiir tecrben fein. 
 
 ( 3^r ttjerbet fein, 
 • I ^S2te ttjcrben fein, 
 fie rterben fein. 
 
64 
 
 CONJUGATION OF tterbeti. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Future perfect. 
 
 I shall have been. 
 
 i(f) toerbe gewelen [etn, 
 ( bu wirft gewefen fein, 
 I ®ie werben gercefen fein, 
 
 etc. 
 
 I shall have been. 
 . id) werbe gemefen fein, 
 
 j bu iDerbeft gewefen fein, 
 ■ I ©ie merben gettefen fein, 
 etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Sing. : fei ! Plur. : feit) ! Sing, and Plur. : feien ®te ! 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Pres.: fetenb. Past: gewefen. 
 
 305. Conjugation of lt>ciri>ctt, become. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 I become. 
 
 1. ic^ hjerbe, 
 
 2 j bu ttiirft, 
 
 ■ \ @te roerben, 
 3. er, fie, e8, man wirb. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. h)tr tterben, 
 2 ( S^x ffierbet, 
 I ®te werben, 
 3. fie toerbcn. 
 
 Singular. 
 I may become. 
 1. id) werbe, 
 2 ( bu werbeft, 
 
 ■ I @ie werben, 
 
 3. er, fie, e«, man toerbe. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. toir werben, 
 2 j Q^v teerbet, 
 
 ■ ( @te merben, 
 3. fie Werben. 
 
 Present perfect. 
 
 I have become. 
 1. ic^ bin gemorben, 
 2 j bu bift gemorben, 
 ( ®ie finb gemorben, 
 etc. 
 
 I may have become^ 
 1. id^ fei gemorben, 
 2 j bu feieft gemorben, 
 ■ ( ®ie feien gemorben, 
 etc. 
 
CONJUGATION OF iDetbett. 
 
 65 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I became. 
 
 tcf) iDurbe (toarb), 
 bu wurbeft (ttarbft), 
 ©ie teurben, 
 
 er, fie, e8, man hjurbe 
 (toarb). 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ttir tDurben, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 I might become. 
 id) toiirbe, 
 
 ( bu miirbeft, 
 
 iDurbeit, 
 er, fie, eS, man wiirbe. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 tnir tciirben, 
 
 ( Q^v iDurbet, 
 ■ I @te iDurben, 
 fie wurben. 
 
 J j 3^r iDiirbet, 
 
 I had become. 
 1. icf) war gemorben, 
 
 ^ ( bu warft geworben, 
 ■'■ \ @ie iDoren getnorben. 
 
 etc. 
 
 1. 
 
 ■ ^ @te iDiirben, 
 3. fie Wiirben. 
 Past perfect. 
 
 I might have become. 
 1. ti^ toiire gemorben (wiirbe 
 geroorben fein), 
 f bu irttreft gemorben (tt)itr= 
 „ ) beft geiDorben fein), 
 ] @ie roiiren gclrorben (lDiir= 
 L ben geroorben fein), 
 eto» 
 
 I shall become. 
 
 tc^ icerbe merben, 
 ( bu mirft werben, 
 ( @ie merben nierben, 
 etc. 
 
 Future. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 I shall become, 
 ii^ trerbe roerben, 
 bu ffierbeft loerben, 
 ^ie roerben werben, 
 etc. 
 
 •[ 
 
 Future perfect. 
 
 I shall have become. I shall have become, 
 
 ic^ werbe gemorben fein, l. iifi irerbe geroorben fein, 
 
 bu ttirft geroorben fein, 2 i ~ h'erbeft geroorben fein, 
 
 @ie roerben geroorben fein, ' | eiie roerben geroorben fein, 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 Sing.: roerbe! Plur.: roerbet! Sing, and Plur.: roerben @ie! 
 Participle. 
 Pres.: roerbenb. Past: geroorben (roorbeu). 
 
66 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 306. Siehcn, love. 
 
 Active Voice. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. 
 
 id) Itebe, 
 
 1. 
 
 i^ tiebe. 
 
 2. 
 
 ) bu ttebft, 
 ( Sie tieben, 
 
 2. 
 
 j bu tiebeft, 
 I @ie tieben, 
 
 3. 
 
 er, fie, e«, man Itebt. 
 
 3. 
 
 er, fie, e«, mon Itebe. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 toir tieben, 
 
 1. 
 
 wir tieben. 
 
 2. 
 
 j 3.^r fiebt, 
 ( @te lieben. 
 
 2. 
 
 j 3^r liebet, 
 \ Ste lieben, 
 
 3. 
 
 fie tieben. 
 
 3. 
 
 fie tieben. 
 
 
 Present perfect. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 ic^ ^abc getiebt, 
 j bu ^oft getiebt, 
 ( @ie ^aben getiebt. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 i^ l^abe getiebt, 
 ( bu ^abeft getiebt, 
 ( Sie ^aben getiebt. 
 
 
 etc. 
 
 Past. 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. 
 
 \^ liebte, 
 
 1. 
 
 i(^ tieb(e)te (tiebte), 
 (ffliirbe lieben), 
 
 2. 
 
 ( bu .tiebteft, 
 j ®ie tiebten. 
 
 2. 
 
 bu Iieb(e)teft, 
 ©ie tieb(e)ten. 
 
 3. 
 
 . er, fie, e8, man liebte. 
 
 3. 
 
 er, fie, eS, man tieb(e)te. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 ttir tiebten. 
 
 1. 
 
 toil" tieb(e)ten. 
 
 2. 
 
 ] ^\)x tiebtet, 
 ( @ie tiebten, 
 
 2. 
 
 J Sbr tieb(e)tet, 
 ( @ie tieb(e)ten. 
 
 3. 
 
 fie tiebten. 
 
 3. 
 
 fie tieb(e)ten. 
 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 67 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 ii} ^atte gcltebt, 
 
 I bu Ijattcft geliebt, 
 ( ©te fatten geliebt, 
 etc. 
 
 1. i^ merbe Itebcn, 
 2 j bu mirft Ueben, 
 ■ ( @tc loerbcn liebcn, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Past perfect. 
 
 1. tcf) ^iittc geliebt, 
 
 (wilrbe geliebt ^oben), 
 2 i ^", Wi^)'i geliebt. 
 
 @te ptteti geliebt, 
 etc. 
 
 Future. 
 
 1. 
 
 ic^ itjerbc liebeit, 
 
 „ j bu tDcrbeft tieben, 
 
 ^- 1 r 
 
 @ie toerben Ueben, 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Future perfect. 
 
 1. id^ tectbe geliebt ^aben, 1. icb werbc geliebt ^aben, 
 
 2 j bu toirft geliebt Ijabett, „ ( bu werbeft geliebt ^aben, 
 
 ■"I @ie toerben geliebt ^aben, ( @ic toerben geliebt ^aben, 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Iittperative. 
 Sing.: liebe! Plur. : liebt ! liebet ! Sing, and Plur. : liebetl @ie ! 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Pres. : liebenb. Past : geliebt. 
 
 307. 
 
 SUiten, love. 
 
 Passive Voice. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I. i(^ merbe geliebt, 
 , j bu wirft geliebt, 
 ■"■ ( ®ie loerben geliebt, 
 etc. 
 
 1. ic^ toerbe geliebt, 
 bu loerbeft geliebt, 
 >Sie merben geliebt, 
 etc. 
 
 2. "^" 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 Present perfect. 
 
 i^ bin geliebt morben, 1. icfi fei geliebt irorben, 
 
 bu bift geliebt morben, „ i ^" f"'"' geliebt morben, 
 
 @ie finb geliebt morben, ' ] Sie feten geliebt morben, 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
68 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 id) tourbe geltebl, 
 j iu wurbeft geltebt, 
 I gte irurbcn getiebt, 
 etc. 
 
 Past. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 . id) wiirbe geliebt, 
 
 ] bu toiirteft geltebt, 
 • I @ie toiirben geliebt, 
 etc. 
 
 Past perfect 
 
 1. id) war geliebt worben, 
 
 , ( bu marft getiebt roorben, 
 '• I ®ie roaren geliebt morbett. 
 
 etc. 
 
 1. i6) xoan geliebt toorben 
 
 (ttiirbe geliebt worben fein), 
 
 (bu woreft getiebt toorbeti 
 
 (ttiiirbeft getiebt worben 
 
 o J fein), 
 
 ] @ie ipttren getiebt worben 
 1 (witrben geliebt worben 
 I fein), 
 etc. 
 
 Future. 
 
 1. id) werbe getiebt werben, 
 2 j bu wirft geliebt werben. 
 
 (5te werben getiebt werben, 
 etc. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 id) werbe getiebt werben, 
 j bu werbeft getiebt werben, 
 ( @ie werben getiebt werben, 
 etc. 
 
 1. ic^ werbe getiebt worben 
 
 fein, 
 „ ( bu wirft getiebt worben fein, 
 I ®ie werben getiebt worben 
 fein. 
 
 Future perfect. 
 1. 
 
 etc. 
 
 \6) werbe getiebt Worben 
 
 fein, 
 fbu werbeft geltebt worben 
 
 ■ j @ie werben getiebt worben 
 I fein. 
 etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Sing.: werbe getiebt ! Plur.: werbet getiebt I 
 
 Sing, and Plur.: Werben @ie getiebt. 
 
 Participle: getiebt. 
 
SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 69 
 
 308. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 ®CnfCtt, think, with ^obttt as auxiliary. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 i(| bcnte, 
 bu bentft, 
 ■ @te benfen. 
 
 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 i^ benfe, 
 ( bu benfeft, 
 I @ie benfen. 
 
 3. 
 
 er, fie, e8, man 
 
 Plural. 
 
 benft. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 er, fie, e«, man benfe. 
 Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 rotr benfen. 
 
 
 
 1. 
 
 ttir benfen. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 j 3^r benft, 
 ( @ie benfen, 
 ' fie benfen. 
 
 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 ( Q^x benfct, 
 
 1 ®ie benfen, 
 
 fie benfen. 
 
 
 
 Present 
 
 perfect. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 ic^ ^abe gebac^t, 
 bu ^aft geba^t, 
 @ie ^aben geba^t, 
 er, fie, e8, man ^at gebaii)t, 
 etc.- 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 id) ifabt geba(^t, 
 ( bu ^abeft gebad)t, 
 ( ®ie £)aben gebodit, 
 
 er, fie, e§, man ^abe ge= 
 bac^t, etc. 
 
 
 
 
 Past. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 id) bad)te, 
 bu bad)tcft, 
 ■ @ie bac^ten, 
 
 er, fie, eg, man 
 
 Plural. 
 
 bai^te. 
 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 id) badjtt (tourbe benfen), 
 ( bubad)teft(tt)Urbeft benfen), 
 ( @ie bad)ten, (toiirben ben= 
 
 fen), 
 er, fie, e§, man bad)te, 
 (wiir.be benfen). 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 ttiir bad)ten, 
 
 ( S^t bad)tet, 
 ( @te baii^ten, 
 
 fie ba(^ten. 
 
 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 ttir ba^ten(lt)iirben benfen), 
 'Ql)x bad)tet (miirbet ben= 
 
 fen), 
 1 @ie bad)ten (ttiirben ben^ 
 I fen), 
 
 fie bad)ten (witrben benfen). 
 
70 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Past perfect. 
 
 1. ttf) f)attc geba^t, 1. t(^ ^iitte gebai^t (wiirbe 
 
 gebac^t ^abeii), etc. 
 2 j bu ^otteft gebai^t, „ \ ^" ^iitteft gebarfjt, 
 
 ■ 1 @te f)atten gebac^t, • ( ©te i)Mm gebad)t, 
 
 etc . etc. 
 
 Future. 
 
 1. ic^ werbe benfen, l. ic^ werbe benfen, 
 
 2 ( bu rcirft bcn!en, 2 ^ ^" Joerbeft benfen, 
 
 • I @te raerben benfen, ' } @ie werben benfen, 
 
 3. er, fie, eg, man roirb benfen, 3. er, fie, e8, man werbe ben= 
 etc. fen, etc. 
 
 Future perfect. 
 
 1. ic^ hjerbe gebadit ^abcn;- 1. i^ werbe gebai^t ^aben, 
 
 „ ( bu Wirft gebadit ^aben, ., ( bu tterbeft gebai^t ^aben, 
 
 ■ ( @te werben gebac^t ^aben, "' j e)ie roerben gebacf)t ^aben. 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Sing.: benfe! Plur.: benft! benfet! Sing, and p'lur.: benfen Sie. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Pres. : benfenb. Past : gebacf)t. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 309. ^omittCtt, come, with fein as auxiliary. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 1. i^ fomme, 1. ii) fomme, 
 
 „ j bu fommft, 2 I ~ femmeft, 
 
 j @te fommen, " ( 'ate fommen, 
 
 3. er, fie, eS, man fommt. 3. er, fie, e8, man fomme. 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 1. mtr fommen, 1. wir fommen, ' 
 
 „ j Ql)v fommt, 2 i ^¥ f"'""'^*' 
 
 ( @te fommen, ■ 1 @te fommen, 
 
 3. fie fommen. 3. fie fommen. 
 
 Present perfect. 
 
 I. i^ bin gefommen. 1. id) fei gefommen. 
 
CONJUGATION OF MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 71 
 
 Past. 
 
 1. id^ font 1. id) fame, (toiirbe fomnten). 
 
 Past perfect. . 
 1.' t(^ tear gefommen, l. id) ware gefommen (tnUrbe 
 
 getommen fein). 
 Future. 
 
 1. id) werbe fommen, 1. icf) werbe fommcn, 
 
 2. bu totrft fommen. 2. bu werbeft fommen. 
 
 Future perfect. 
 
 1. i^ werbe gefommen fein, 1. ii) werbe gefommen fein, 
 
 2. bu wirft gefommen fein. 2. bu werbeft gefommen fein. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Sing.: fomm(e)! Plur.: fommt ! fommet ! 
 
 Sing, and Plur.: fommen @ie. 
 Participle. 
 Pres. : fommenb. Past : gefommen. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF 
 210. 
 
 MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 bijrfen 
 
 fonnen 
 
 laffen 
 
 mtigen 
 
 mijffen 
 
 foHen 
 
 tootten 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Indie. Subj. 
 
 /■ 
 
 /• 
 
 1. borf 
 1. burfen 
 1. fann 
 1. fonnen 
 1 taffe 
 1. laffen 
 1. mag 
 1. mogen 
 1. mu| 
 1. miiffen 
 1. foil 
 1. folten 
 1. toifl 
 1. wollen 
 
 biirfe 
 fijnne 
 
 mijge 
 mitffe 
 foHe 
 woCe 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Indie, Subj. 
 
 burfte bitrfte 
 
 fonnte fonnte 
 
 lie^ lie^e 
 
 moifite mo(i)te 
 
 mu^te mii^te 
 
 foflte 
 
 wotlte 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 Pres. Past. 
 
 blirfenb geburft 
 
 fonnenb gefonnt 
 
 taffenb getaffen 
 
 mijgenb gemdrfit 
 
 miiffenb gemu^t 
 
 fottenb gefoltt 
 
 wotienb gewoKt 
 
72 
 
 CONJUGATION OF REFLEXIVE VERB. 
 
 None of these verbs has an imperative except Inffett, thus : 
 Sing.: Io|(e)! Plur.: Ia|t ((ttffet) ! Sing, and Plur.: laffen ®te! 
 and iDoItcn, thus: Sing.: Wotte! Plur.: XooMl Sing, and Plur.: 
 hjoflen @ie ! 
 
 The " present perfect " and " past perfect " of these verbs 
 when used as auxiliaries along with other verbs, are not formed 
 by the participle as usual, but by the infinitive, thus : tc^ fjOibc t^ll 
 ntc^tfel^en fSnnen, and not : fe^en gefonnt ; I have not been able 
 to see him. Also the verbs ^et|en, ^clfetl, l^dreit, fc^ett are used in 
 the same way, thus : ^6) i)abi xifxi ntd)t fomnten ^ i) r e n. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF REFLEXIVE VERB. 
 311. ®ijfj fd)(itnen, to be ashamed. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 \6) fif)ame mid), 
 ( bu f(f)amft bid), 
 ( @te [d)amen fic^, 
 
 er, fie, e8, man fdicimt [id^. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 tDtr fd)amcn un3, 
 j 3{)r fc^iimt euc^. 
 
 Present. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 ( @te fd)amen fid), 
 fie fd)amen fii^. 
 
 Present perfect 
 
 Singular, 
 id) ^be mt(^ gefdjamt, 
 j bu ijaft bi(^ gefd)amt, 
 I @ie l^aben fid) gefc^amt, 
 er, fie, eS, man f)at fid) 
 gef^amt. 
 
 Plural, 
 hjtr f)a6en un8 gefi^amt. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 i6) fc^ame mid), 
 j bu fi^fimeft bi^, 
 ( @ie fc^iimcn fi^, 
 
 er, fie, e8, man fc^ame fi^. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 mir fd)amen unS, 
 ( 3ft)r fd)amct euc^, 
 I Sie fc^iimen fid), 
 
 fie fd)timen fi(^. 
 
 Singular. 
 1. ic^ ^abe mid) gefd)amt, 
 2 j bu I)abeft bi^ gefd)amt, 
 ■ ( @te ^aben fid) gefd)amt, 
 3. er, fie, e8, man l^abe fi(^ 
 gef(^amt. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 ^ @te f aben fi^ gefc^dmt, 
 3. fie ^aben fid) gefc^dmt. 
 
 J j 36i' ,^o6t euc| gefdidmt, 
 
 1. wir t)abcrt un8 gefd)amt, 
 
 o I Ql)v Ijobtt end) gefd^iamt, 
 
 ■ ( @te ^aben fid) gefd)amt, 
 3. fie ^aben fid^ gef(^amt. 
 
CONJUGATION OF IMPERSONAL VERB. 73 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Past. 
 
 1. td^ [^amte mid). 1. ic^fc^amtemtif)(tt)tobemi(| 
 
 etc. f(^amen), etc. 
 
 Past perfect. 
 
 1. id) l^atte mi^ gef^amt, 1. id) ^otte mi^ gefc^amt, 
 
 (toiirbe mii^ gefd)omt 
 etc. ^aben), etc. 
 
 Future. 
 
 1. 0^ merbe mid) [c^amcn, 1. id) tterbc mid) f teamen, 
 
 2 ( bu wirft bid) fc^iimen, „ ( bu ttcrbeft bii^ fc^amen, 
 
 • ■) ©ie werben fic^ [c^amen, • ( @ie teerben [id) fd)amcn, 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Future perfect. 
 
 1. id) tcerbe mid) gefd)omt 1. • ic^ tnerbe mid) gefdjtimt 
 
 ^aben, l^aben, 
 
 f bu ttirft bi(| gefd)amt ^a^ f bu. roerbeft bid) gefd)amt 
 
 2 j ^abcn, 2 J ^ben, 
 
 • I @ie werben fic^ gefd)amt ' ] @ie luerben fid) gefi^amt 
 L ^abett, L t)aben. 
 
 etc. etc. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Sing.: fd)ame bic^! Plur. : fd)amt (Sui^ ! 
 
 Sing, and Plur.: [c^ttmeu @ie fi(^. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Pres. : fi^ fd)amenb. Past : fid) gefd)amt. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF IMPERSONAL VERB. 
 312. a. dlCHncn, to rain, with f)aben as auxiliary. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present : e8 regttet, e§ regne. 
 
 Pres. perf. : e8 ^ot geregnet, eS ^abe gereguet, 
 
 Past : e§ regnete, e8 regnete (rtiirbe regnen), 
 
 Past perf. : e8 f)attc geregnet, eS (jdtte geregnet (wiirbe gereg= 
 
 net I^aben), 
 Future : c€ ttjtrb regnen, e§ werbe regnen, 
 
 Future perf.: cS ttirb geregnet !^o6en, e8 roerbe geregnet tpben, 
 Imperative: e§ regne ! Participle: regnenb ; p.p.: geregnet. 
 
74 IMPERSONAL REFLEXIVE VERB. 
 
 b. @Cf<i^C^(tt, to happen, with fetlt as auxiliary. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present : e8 gefi^te^t, e8 gef(f)c^e. 
 
 Pres. perf. : e8 tft ge[d)e^en, e8 fet ge[d)e^en, 
 
 Past : e« gefrf)o^, eg gefif)a^c, 
 
 Past perf. : ea mar gefdie^en, e8 ware gef(|e()en, 
 
 Future : eS wirb gefd)e^en, e8 werbe gefcf)e£)en, 
 
 Future perf.: e8 wirb gcfi^e^en fern, eS rterbe gefdie^en fetn. 
 
 Imperative: e8gefc^el}e! Participle : gef(f)ef)enb ; p. p.: gefcf)e^en- 
 
 IMPERSONAL REFLEXIVE VERB. 
 313. SRcuen, repent. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present : eS rent mt(f), bi(^ @ie, t^n fie ; un8, Sud) Ste, fie. 
 Pres. perf.: e8 Ijat ttttdE), bii) 3ie, tt)n fie; unS, (Sui^ @ie, fie 
 
 g e r c u t. 
 Past : e8 reute mi(^, bitf) Sie, i^n fie ; un§, (Su(^ @te, fie. 
 
 Past perf.: eS ^atte mi4 bicf) @te, it)n fie; un§, @U(f) @te, fie, 
 
 g e r e u t. 
 Future : c6 toirb mic^, bic^ Ste, i^tt fie ; unS, ®U(!^ @ie, fie 
 
 r e u e n. 
 Future pref.: eg Wtrb XM&j, bii^ ' @te, i^n fie; un3, @u^ @ie, fie 
 
 g e re u t ^ a b e n. 
 Imperative: Sing.: e8 reue btii), Ste. Plur.: eS reue Suct), Sie. 
 Participle : reuenb ; p. p. : gcreut. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present : eS veue xsM), bt(^ ©te, i^n fie ; unS, Su(^ ®te, fie. 
 Pres. perf.: eS Ijabe mi(J), btii) @te, i^n fie ; una, Sud) Sie, fie 
 
 g e r e u t. 
 Past : e§ reuete mtc^, btcE) @ie, i^n fie ; un§, (Sud) @ie, fie, 
 
 (miirbe mid) reuen). 
 Past perf. : eS ^atte mtc^, btif) ®ie, i^n fie ; un8, @ui^ @te, fie 
 
 g e r e u t, (miirbe mic^ gereut tjaben). 
 Future : e8 merbe mid), bid) @ie, i^n fie ; un8, (5u^ @te, fie 
 
 reuen. 
 Future pel f.: eS merbe inic^, btc^ <3te, t^n fie; unS, Su^ @te, fie 
 
 gereut ^ a b e n. 
 
COMPOUND VERB. 75 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 214. 1. Compound verbs are formed by connecting a simple 
 verb with a noun, thus : f)au8^olten, to keep house ; with an 
 adjective : ]^O^a(f)ten, to esteem highly ; with an adverb : fortgeljcn, 
 to go away ; with a preposition : auffte'^ett, to get up. 
 
 ■2. They are either inseparable or separable. Insepar- 
 able are : 
 
 a. All such prefixes not being words, as : mtp, oer, etlt, etc., 
 
 in ittiSfatten, Ijevtreiben, cntge^cn. 
 
 l>. All prefixed words not having the accent, thus : Urttge'^en, 
 to evade, to go round about. We conjugate : id) umge'^e, bu 
 umge'^ft; roir f)a6en umgan'gen; ii) toevbe umge'^en, etc. The 
 prefixed word „um" not having the accent is therefore inseparable. 
 
 3. Separable are all prefixed words having the accent, thus : 
 au^'ge^en: ti^ ge^e ouS, etc.; um'ge^en, to have intercourse with : 
 t(^ QCffC ntc^t mit tf|m um, or : tc^ ^abe fetnen Umgong mtt i^m, 
 I have no intercourse with him. @r QCtft mit 8iigen ttW, he deals 
 in falsehood. „Um" is therefore separable or inseparable, also the 
 following words : Ittttdj, through ; tf'tntev, behind, after ; Ui)Ct, 
 over ; UtlUv, under ; t»»icl»et, again. 
 
 315. Examples: Sitttrc^^tlngen : er fonnte mtt feinem 
 ^(ane nicfit bu'rc^ bring en, he could not accomplish his plan; 
 but : beS 9JJenf(^en @etft b u r li) b r t'n g t bte ©eljetmntffe ber 9fatur, 
 man's spirit penetrates into the secrets of nature. @etn ^lan 
 brong bnxi), he accomplished his plan; but: @Ctn @eift 
 b U r C^ b r a'n g bie ©e^etmntffe, ... .his spirit penetrated into etc. ; 
 tfinteV((ef\£n t er ^ t n t e r g t'n g btcE), he deceived thee ; but : 
 er gtng Winter baS ^an8, he went behind the house ; iibeV' 
 f c^cn : ii) U b e r f e'^ c au« bem Sngttfc^en in'S 'BeutfiJ)e, I trans- 
 late from English into German ; but : td^ f e ^ e It b e r ben Strom, 
 
 I set over the stream ; nntcxtfaltett t eitt @e[pra(^ unter^a('= 
 ten, to maintain a conversation; wir u nt e rt) t eft eu un8 etne 
 SDBeite, we conversed for a while ; but : ^ a 1 1 e n @te ^fjre $anbe 
 unter; hold your hands under; er^tett feine §{inbe nnter, 
 he held his hands under ; lt»ict>ctJ)olen : Sitte m t e b e r I) o't e n 
 ®te ! please, repeat ! (Sr W i e b e r ^ I't e ei fcljr oft, he repeated it 
 very often ; but : ^ I e n @te eS morgen ra i e b e r, fetch it back 
 
76 
 
 CONJUGATION OF COMPOUND VERBS, 
 
 to-morrow. ®etn §ut ftel tn'S SBoffer, aber er ^ o 1 1 e i^n to i e b e r 
 !^erau8 ; his hat fell in the water, but he brought it out 
 again. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 SEPARABLE. 
 
 216 ^u'v(tff>of)un, 
 
 to bore through. 
 
 Present, 
 
 Singular. 
 I bore (a hole) through. 
 ii) bo^re (era 8od)) burd), 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 j bit bo^rft burd), 
 
 ®ie bo^rcn burd), 
 
 er, fie, e§, mon bot)rt burc^. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 totr bo^ren burd^, 
 ( Q^x bolivt bur^, 
 ( ®te bo^ren bur^, 
 
 fie boI)ren baxi). 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 INSEPARABLE. 
 
 to pierce. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 I pierce. 
 
 id) burd^bo'^re, 
 ( bu burdibo^rft, 
 I Sie burc^boljren, 
 
 er, fie, eS, man burc[)bo^rt. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 totr burd)bo^ren, 
 j 3:br- bur(^bol)rt, 
 \ @te burdjbo^ren, 
 
 fie birrd)bo^ren. 
 
 Present perfect. 
 
 id) ^ahe bu'rd^gcbof)rt, 1. 
 
 bu ^aft bu'ri^gebo^rt, 2. 
 etc. 
 
 id) bo^rte burd^, 1. 
 
 bu bo^rteft burc^. 2. 
 etc. 
 
 Past. 
 
 id^ ijabt burd)bo'I)rt, 
 bu ^aft burc^bo'^rt, 
 etc. 
 
 icE) burc^bo'^rtc, 
 bu burd)bo'f)rteft, 
 
 etc. 
 
 Past perfect. 
 
 i6) I)attc bu'rd)gebo^rt, 1. 
 
 bu ^atteft bu'rd^gebo!^rt. 2. 
 
 Future. 
 
 icE) werbe bu'rdtjbo^rcn. 1. 
 
 id^ t)atte burd)bo'^rt, 
 bu ^otteft burd)bo'^rt. 
 
 icf) toerbe bur^bo'^ren. 
 
SOME RULES ABOUT THE POSITION OF THE VERB. 77 
 
 SEPARABLE. INSEPARABLE. 
 
 Future perfect. 
 
 1. i(^ werbe bu'ri^gebo^rt Ijaben. 1. id) merbe burc[)bo'^rt ^aben. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 bo^re— bo^ret, bo^ren ©te bur(f)if)bo't}re, burdjbo'^ret, 
 
 burij. burc^bo'^ren ®ie. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 pres.: bu'rdjbo^renb, pres.: bur{^bo'f)renb, 
 
 past : bu'r(^gebof)rt. past : burd)bo'^rt. 
 
 SOME RULES ABOUT THE POSITION OF 
 
 THE VERB. 
 317. 
 
 1. In sentences beginning with the subject, the present and 
 preterit follows the subject immediately ; in interrogative sen- 
 tences it precedes the subject, thus : ber SSater bffnet, bffnete bett 
 ©rief, the father opens, opened the letter. Offnet, offnete ber 
 SSaler ben 53rtef ? Does, did the father open the letter ? 
 
 2. In the future and perfect tenses the auxiliary follows the 
 subject immediately, while the verb itself is placed at the end of 
 the sentence. In interrogative sentences the auxiliary precedes 
 the subject ; thus : ber 3Jater I)at, ^atte ben Srief gebffnet ; the 
 father has, had opened the letter ; £)at, tjatte bet SSater ben ^rtef 
 gebffnet ? has, had the father opened the letter ? 
 
 3. In sentences not beginning with the subject immediately^ 
 the position of the verb is as follows : in present and preterit : 
 SSlnn bffnet, bffnete ber -SCater ben Srief, now the father opens, 
 opened the letter. In present perfect and past perfect : 3JUrt 
 ^at, .^atte ber SSater ien ©rtef gebffnet; now has, had the father 
 opened the letter. 31IS ber SSater ben Srief gebffnet i^atte, when 
 father had opened the letter. In future : iUun tvixt ber SSater ben 
 ©rtef bffnen, gebffnet f}aben ; now father will open, will have opened 
 the letter. (See tables "Order of sentence.") 
 
78 READING EXERCISES. 
 
 READING EXERCISES. 
 Various kinds of Verbs in all tenses. 
 218. Auxiliaries of tense. 
 
 1. I have lost my book. 
 
 1. 3fc^ ^<x\)Z mctn Sui^ oer= 
 loren. 
 
 2. 9Btr :^ a b e n ntcfitS bagegen. 
 
 3. iDhtn ©ruber ^at 3ft|re 
 t^eber g e ^ a b t. 
 
 4. fatten fie nicEit geftem 
 mein gebermeffer ? 
 
 5. Solb ^ 1 1 e ii^ eg oergef= 
 fen. 
 
 6. 3Bir werbentnorgenfi^SneS 
 SBetter ^aben. 
 
 7.§aben@ie Oebulb, mein 
 greunb ! 
 
 8. @ e t n ober n i rf) t fein, baS 
 ift bte grage. 
 
 9. 3f li) bin Sl^nen fe^r Ber= 
 bunben. 
 
 10. 3^(^ ba(^te @ i e w a r e n 
 front. 
 
 U. @inb ®te im Stl^eater 
 gewef en? 
 
 12. SOBarenSie ^eute morgen 
 in meinem §aufe ? 
 
 13. SBenn er boi^ fteipig m a r e. 
 
 14. aSir alle tterben bort 
 .fein. 
 
 15. @ ei immer gut unb brao. 
 
 16. Gfd^merbem-jt. 
 
 17. ©ie ttirb Setjrcvin. 
 
 18. @ie finb grog gewor= 
 ben. 
 
 19. 3if) ^brte @te feien t)er= 
 wunbet m r b e n. 
 
 20. SDBaS IB u r b e au§ i^m ? 
 
 21. SEBurben Sienirfit no|? 
 
 2. We have no objection. 
 
 3. My brother has had your 
 pen. 
 
 4. Did you not have my pen- 
 knife yesterday ? 
 
 5. I might havd soon forgot- 
 ten (I came near forgetting) it. 
 
 6. We shall have beautiful 
 weather to morrow. 
 
 7. Have patience my friend. 
 
 8. To be or not to be, that 
 is the question. 
 
 9. I am very much obliged 
 to you. 
 
 10. I thought you might be 
 sick. 
 
 11. Have you been to the 
 theater ? 
 
 12. Were you in my house 
 this morning ? 
 
 13. I would he might be dili- 
 gent. 
 
 14. We shall all be there. 
 
 15. Always be good and 
 honest. 
 
 16. I am to be a physician. 
 
 17. She is to be a teacher. 
 
 18. You have grown tall. 
 
 19. I heard that you were 
 wounded. 
 
 20. What became of him ? 
 
 21. Did you not get wet ? 
 
VARIOUS KINDS OF VERBS IN ALL TENSES. 
 
 79 
 
 22. 3 1^ in feinci" Stette w u r b e 
 e8 nid)t t^un. 
 
 23. 3^ t)offe bu wtrft cm 
 gropet iUiann in e r b e n. 
 
 24. 2Senn @ i e cin grower 9ieb= 
 ner geloorben fctn werben, 
 fo. .. . 
 
 25. ®ott fpra^, c 8 » e r b e 
 8t(f)t! 
 
 26. SBerben @te eine ©tiil^e 
 3^rer alten ^JJfutter. 
 
 319. Modal Auxiliaries 
 
 1. ®u barf ft (3ie burfen) 
 iii(|t ouSge^en. 
 
 2. 3f ^ r b u r f t (@te burfen) 
 je^t f»3telen. 
 
 3. aStr burften fein 5Bort 
 fprec^en. 
 
 4. SBerben wir balb baben 
 burfen ? 
 
 h.^^ f ann e« ntif)t t^nn. 
 
 6. @te fennen i^nje^tnic^t 
 fel^en. 
 
 7. f onnten Ste ntiitbeffer 
 f(|retben ? 
 
 8. Sbnnten wir nicf)t etnen 
 onbern SBeg gef)en ? 
 
 9. 3 c^ ^ a b e e8 nt^t tl^un 
 f onnen. 
 
 10. 3Jiorgen w e r b e n wir 
 beffer f(f)reiben ! ii n n e n. 
 
 11. ®o8Suif)IaBtfi(f)refen. 
 
 12. JJBorunt loffen Sie ifin 
 nic^t in ^Jtu^e 'i 
 
 13. 2Bo ^oft bu all bein ®elb 
 geloffen? 
 
 14. (§ r l>a t es mir fagen 
 laffen. 
 
 22. I would not do it in his 
 place. 
 
 23. I hope you will become a 
 great man. 
 
 - 24. When you shall have be- 
 come a great orator, then. . . 
 
 25. God said, let there be 
 light ! 
 
 26. Become a support to your 
 old mother. 
 
 1. You dare not go out. 
 
 2. You may aow play. 
 
 3. We were not permitted to 
 speak a word. 
 
 4. Will we soon be permitted 
 to bathe ? 
 
 5. I cannot do it. 
 
 6. You cannot see him now. 
 
 7. Gould you not write 
 better ? 
 
 8. Might we not go another 
 way ? 
 
 9. I was not able to do it. 
 
 10. We will be able to write 
 better to morrow. 
 
 11. The book is readable. 
 
 12. Why don't you leave him 
 alone ? 
 
 13. What have you done with 
 all your money ? 
 
 14. He has sent me word 
 about it. 
 
80 
 
 READING EXERCISES. 
 
 15. S r U e ^ ein SBort fatten. 
 
 16. @ i e 1 1 e I e n ntti^ etne 
 ^albe ©tunbe marten. 
 
 17. 3f cE) w e r b c @te rufen 
 laffen. 
 
 18. 8 a I (laffen ®te) eS gut fetn! 
 
 19. 8 a f f e n @ t e fi^ fagen ! 
 
 20. @8 m a g fetn. ' 
 
 21. 3^ mag bai 48u(| nt^t. 
 
 22. Ste mi) gen (bu magft) 
 and) noc^ fo gele^rt fein. 
 
 23 ©temiigen red)t ^aben. 
 
 24. 3 d) m d) t e eg ntd)t t^un. 
 
 25. ^ m d) t e wo^t wiffen. 
 
 26. 3fd! furtt)te, e 8 m o c| t c 
 gefc^e[)en. 
 
 27. Q^mn^im St^ule ge^en. 
 
 28. i)Ji u f f e n wir fd)on ju Sett 
 geljen. 
 
 39. @agen @ie itjm, t d) m il f f e 
 Berretfen. 
 
 30. 3f d) ^ a 6 e H)m baS ®elb 
 geben m it f f e n. 
 
 31. iffitr m u 1 1 e n auSftctgen. 
 
 32. 3d) i» e r b e nad) §aufe 
 gel)en m ii f f e n. 
 
 33. aSaS fotlic^ tfiun? 
 
 34. @te foil en (bu follft) e8 
 ^dren. 
 
 35. ©as folltemtrteibt^un. 
 
 36. Da8 foUten fie boc^ 
 ftiffen. 
 
 37. 5^a8 toerbcn toir t^un 
 follen? 
 
 38. Ste Will tljre 3lufgaben 
 nid)t lernen. 
 
 39. aSaS t» 1 1 e n Ste ? 
 (wtlli'tbu?) 
 
 15. He. dropped a word. 
 
 16. They kept me waiting 
 half an hour. 
 
 17. I shall send for you. 
 
 18. Never mind ! 
 
 19. Let me tell you ! 
 
 20. It may be. 
 
 21. I don't like the book. 
 
 22. You may be ever so 
 learned. 
 
 23. They may be right. 
 
 24. I did not like to do it. 
 
 25. I should like to know. 
 
 26. I am afraid it might (lest 
 it should) happen. 
 
 27. I must go to school. 
 
 28. Mast we go to bed al- 
 ready ? 
 
 29. Tell him, that I must 
 depart. 
 
 30. I was compelled to give 
 him the money. 
 
 31. We had to alight. 
 
 32. I shall have to go home. 
 
 33. What shall I do ? 
 
 34. You shall hear it. 
 
 35. I should be sorry for it. 
 
 36. They ought to know 
 that. 
 
 37. What shall we be obliged 
 to do? 
 
 38. She does not want to 
 learn her lessons. 
 
 39. What do you want ? 
 
VARIOUS KINDS OF VERBS IN ALL TENSES. 81 
 
 40. I was about to call you. 
 
 40. 3d) ^aht @te eben rufcn 
 wo U c n. 
 
 41. SlBtr rootUen @ie etwaS 
 fragen. 
 
 42. er tttrb e« ntd)t t[)un 
 h) 1 1 e n. 
 
 41. We "would like to ask you 
 something. 
 
 42. He will not be willing to 
 do it. 
 
 320. 
 
 Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 1. (5« regnet fi^on toieber. 
 
 2. §at t% geftern gefc^neit? 
 
 3. ® bonnerte bie gonje 
 
 4. ^i) t)offe, 'to.^ cS morgen 
 ittc^t r e g n e n tt i r b. 
 
 5. @ ci) n e i t eS ? 
 
 6. S I i § t e eS ? 
 
 1. It is raining again. 
 
 2. Did it snow yesterday? 
 
 3. It thundered the whole 
 night. 
 
 4. I hope it will not rain to- 
 morrow. 
 
 5. Does it snow ? 
 
 6. Was it lightning ? 
 
 321. 
 
 1. (Sa reut mtc^ bicS gct^an 
 ju ^aben. 
 
 2. @g ^at mii) fc^r befrem= 
 bet. 
 
 3. (Sg b it n if t e mid) etne tange 
 
 m- 
 
 4. (58 D e r b r 1 il)n fe^r. 
 
 5. (Sa It) t r b i{)n boc^ fetn Un= 
 g(M bcfalten ^aben? 
 
 6. £8 wiirbe tf)n [e^r b e= 
 t U m m e r n. 
 
 Impersonal Reflexive Verbs. 
 
 1. I repent, of having done 
 
 It. 
 
 2. It was Very strange to me. 
 
 3. It seemed to me a long 
 time. 
 
 4. He was greatly vexed at it. 
 
 5. I hope no misfortune has 
 befallen him. 
 
 6. It would grieve him very 
 much. 
 
 323 
 
 Compound Verbs. 
 
 1. ®ie fte^en friil) auf. 
 
 2. (Sr ift foeben aufgeftan^ 
 ben. 
 
 3. SBann fterben ®te auffte^^ 
 ^en? 
 
 4. (S t e !^ e n @ie auf, e« 
 ift frfion fpat ! 
 
 1. You rise early. 
 
 2. He has just risen. 
 
 3. When will you get up ? 
 
 4. Rise, it' is late ! 
 
82 
 
 5. Silt Snabe id u r b c it b e r= 
 f a'i) f e tt. 
 
 6. 2B e r b e tt ® t e it b e r btcfe 
 •93rit(Je f a ^ r c rt ? 
 
 7. aBtr f u l) V c tt geftern u b e r 
 bie Sfitdfe. 
 
 8. SDSii- fiitb lib er ben ©tforn 
 g e f a I) r e n. 
 
 9 SBoflen @ie m i t g e I) c it ? 
 
 10. ©as ajJabdjcn g i it g m 1 1 
 tfjrer SKutter. 
 
 11. 3ft 3t)r 53ruber aui) m it= 
 gegaitgeny 
 
 12. iEBtberf^ire'dienSieiitir 
 ttic^t. 
 
 13. §at er 31}neit nj t b e r= 
 f }) f o'c^ e II '? 
 
 14 SBifb 3ff)i-e £aitte balb 
 h) t e'b e r f m m e n ? 
 
 15. S! m m c It @ie rec^t bdb 
 ID t e b e r. 
 
 16. Sr f am itte iDteber in 
 ntein §au8. 
 
 17. SBerbcn -Sic balb juru(f= 
 f m m e n y 
 
 18. ®cr iBrief ift 3 u r ii cE g e= 
 f ommen. 
 
 19. Qi) Ijoffe, @ic f m m e n 
 batb juritcE. 
 
 20. 2i5ann f a m e n ®ie 3 u= 
 rucE? 
 
 21. 9Bann gebenfen ®ie 5U= 
 rudjuf omm en? 
 
 22. aSJerben @ie Ijente au8= 
 f a ^ r e n ? 
 
 23. @ewi^ ; iptr f a I) r e n fo= 
 gletd^ an 8. 
 
 24. jDer §err ift cben a u 8 g e= 
 f a () r e n. 
 
 READING EXERCISES. 
 
 5. A boy was run over. 
 
 6. Are you going to ride 
 over this bridge ? 
 
 7. We rode over tlie bridge 
 yesterday. 
 
 8. We did go over tlie 
 stream. 
 
 9. Will you go along ? 
 
 10. The girl went with her 
 mother. 
 
 11. Did your brother go alopg 
 also ? 
 
 12. Don't contradict me. 
 
 13. Did he contradict you ? 
 
 14. Will your aunt soon come 
 ain ? 
 
 15. Come again soon. 
 
 again ? 
 
 16. He never came to my 
 house again. 
 
 17. Will you return soon ? 
 
 18. The letter is returned. 
 
 19. I hope you will soon 
 return. 
 
 20. When did you ' come 
 back ? 
 
 21. When do you expect to 
 return ? 
 
 22. Will you take a ride to- 
 day ? 
 
 23. Certainly ; we will ride 
 immediately. 
 
 24. The gentleman has just 
 gone out riding. 
 
VARIOUS KINDS OF VERBS IN ALL TENSES. 
 
 83 
 
 25. Si-oft beg f(f)tccf)tcn 4Better8 
 f u () r e n fie a u 8. 
 
 20. !Bte 9lu«gobcn it b c r ft e t'= 
 gen Tiie Siimoljmcu. 
 
 27. ©er ^nabe ft e i cj t it b e r 
 ben ^ann. 
 
 28. '3^ic Sinber ft t e'g e n ii b e c 
 ba§ ©itter. 
 
 29. Untevfte'f)en. ®ie fid^ 
 nic^t eS 5U t^un. 
 
 30. Sic ft e ^ e n u n t e r bem 
 IBaume. 
 
 31. 3t anb en @ie u n t er 
 bem Saume ? 
 
 32. .^aben fie fiti u n t e r ft a'n-- 
 b e n e§ ju t^iin ? 
 
 33. 3dE) b ur ct) f ^ a u'e Q^vt 
 Ibfidjten. 
 
 34. ^3 ^ a u e n Sie b u r d) bie=- 
 feg bunte ®(aS. 
 
 25. Notwithstanding tlie bad 
 weather they took a ride. 
 
 26. The expenses exceed the 
 receipts. 
 
 27. The boy climbs over the 
 fence. 
 
 28. The children climbed 
 over the railing. 
 
 29. Don't dare to do it. 
 
 30. They stand under the 
 tree. 
 
 31. Did you stand under the 
 tree ? 
 
 32. Did they dare to do it ? 
 
 33. I discern your designs. 
 
 34. Look through this color- 
 ed glass. 
 
 Verbs often require a certain case. 
 
 233. THE GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 a. The following : 
 
 <td)tett— @r a:^tet b e r ®efat}r 
 
 (bte ©efa^r) nidit. 
 I»c0tttfctt— @r bebarf b e 8 2lr5= 
 
 m (ben Slqt). 
 ettt&eJjtcn— ®a§ ®erud)t ent= 
 
 bcl^rt a 1 1 e r SBa^rfiett. 
 crwanfleln— 3^r ©efong er» 
 
 mangett alle^ ©efiil^te. 
 eth»ft^nen— Srroa[)nen@ie ber 
 
 (bte) ®ad)e nii^t. 
 gcJ»enf en— ©ebenft er m e t = 
 
 ner? 
 itaw(ti—Wiv fiarren b e f f e r e r 
 
 (auf beffere) ^etten. 
 
 He does not mind the dan- 
 ger. 
 
 He needs a physician. 
 
 The rumor is false. (With- 
 out any truth). 
 
 Her singing lacks all feeling. 
 
 Don't mention the matter. 
 Does he think of me ? 
 
 We (wait for) are in hopes 
 of better times. 
 
84 
 
 VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 Icben— 3c^ (ebe b e r ^offnung. 
 <>Hc(jcn— Er pflegt f e i n c S 3Im= 
 
 te§ mit ®ebulb. 
 f(()i>ttcn — @(f)oncn ete met = 
 
 Iter! (mic^) 
 f^ottctt— T)a« Unglud fpottet 
 
 alter 33cfc^reibung. 
 tJCtQCjfCtt— Sffite fonnten ^eie 
 
 metncr (mic^)fo balb 
 
 bergeffen ! 
 lorttten— ©te ffiartet b e 8 Sran= 
 
 fen. 
 
 Note. — Most of these verbs may be used with the accusative 
 also, as shown by the words in parenthesis. 
 
 b. The following reflexive verbs : 
 
 He will take care of you. 
 
 I live in hope. 
 
 He performs the duties'of his 
 ofifice with patience. 
 Spare me ! 
 
 The misfortune defies all 
 description. 
 
 How could you forget me so 
 soon. 
 
 She nurses the sick (person). 
 
 fidj «ntte()ittctt— gr mirb fief) 
 
 b c t n e r O^rer) an= 
 
 ne£)raen. 
 fidj belJicnen— @ie bcbtentefii^ 
 
 e i n e 8 falfi^en 3lu«= 
 
 bru(fe§. 
 fi(^ ftcfJcifeigcn— (Sr befleiBigt 
 
 fid) b e S ©tiibiumS ber. . 
 fl(^ bcmSdjtifjcn— etebema^=: 
 
 tigtenficf) beS ©iebcS. 
 fid) J»cflttnctt— SBir befonnen 
 
 un8 etneS anbern. 
 f}(^ ctttljaUen— er fotinte fii^ 
 
 b e 8 8ad)en8 itic^t ent= 
 
 fialten. 
 titf) entlcJUflen— (gr etttlebigte 
 
 if)n ber geffeln. 
 fid) cntf(f)Iaf)en — (Snti"d)tagen 
 
 @ie fi^ ber ©orgen. 
 fitft cntfittuett— 3^c[) fann mit^ 
 
 ber Sadie nt(f)t ent[in= 
 
 nen. 
 
 She made use of a wrong 
 expression. 
 
 He applies himself to the 
 study of . . . 
 
 They seized the thief. 
 
 We have changed our mind. 
 
 He could not help laughing; 
 
 He unfettered him (took off 
 his fetters). 
 
 Banish your cares. 
 
 I cannot recollect the matter. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 85 
 
 Have pity on me. 
 
 tl(f) etrlbatmctt— ©rbarme bic^ 
 mciner (ilber mid)). 
 
 ^d) evinnevn — (Srtnncrn @te 
 fid) meiner nid)t tne()r? 
 
 |ltf> ctrtoeljrctt— 3d) iam mtc^ 
 
 faeS Sc^IafeS nic^t 
 
 eme^ren. 
 tld> fteuctt— 3Sir frcuen unS 
 
 beines (3^rc8) fe 
 
 fotgeg. 
 fidf ttttHttCtt— gr rii^mt fi^ 
 
 f e i n c r 2;{)at. 
 fl<(> fd^Swen— @ie fotlten fid) 
 
 b e f f e n fi^dmcn. 
 flit} iveifven—dt toe^rte fid) 
 
 f e i n e r §out. 
 
 Do you no longer remember 
 me ? 
 
 I cannot resist sleep. 
 
 We rejoice at your success. 
 
 He glories in his action. 
 
 You ought to be ashamed 
 of it. 
 
 He defended his (own) life 
 (lit'ly : skin). 
 
 334. THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 a. The following : 
 rtttf toattctt— ®arf id) 3 Ij n e n 
 
 aufwarten ? 
 <»ntta)otrtcn— SBarum antwor^ 
 
 teft bu m i r nii^t '? 
 ibcgcgttcn— Sr begegnete mir 
 
 auf ber (Stra|e. 
 i»cfc^Icn— Ser (general befall 
 
 f e i n e n Jru^jpen ju . 
 heiftet)en—Mv wollcn Qifxttn 
 
 (bir) beiftet}en. 
 Ibeitootjnm— 5Berben <£ie ber 
 
 SSorfteKung beiroo^nen ? 
 ianf en— 3(i^ bante Qiintn 
 
 (bir). ®ie f)aben bag 
 
 mir 3U bon!en. 
 Jjienen— @r bient f e i u e m 33o= 
 
 terianbe. 
 ftttiJiett— ®u foltft b e m Souben 
 
 nid)t f(ud)en. 
 
 May I wait on you ? 
 
 Why don't you answer me ? 
 
 He met me on the street. 
 
 The general ordered his 
 troops to. . . 
 
 We will assist you. 
 
 Will you be present at the 
 performance ? 
 Thank you. 
 You owe that to me. 
 
 He serves his country. 
 
 Thou shalt not curse the 
 deaf. 
 
86 
 
 VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 folgctt— j^olge b e m 9tate bctner 
 
 (gltern. 
 frdJ»ncn— (Sr friJ^nt bcm gf)r= 
 
 geije. 
 8cJ)0t(^cn— bu mit^t i ij m ge= 
 
 gcttttflcn— Sap eS l^ir geitiigcn. 
 Qlattbcn—Qd) glaube b t r (3f)= 
 
 nen . 
 gratulicvcn — ^d) gratutieie 
 
 3 1) nen (btr) ^u^tH'cni 
 
 (bdnem) ^rfofge 
 (>elfCtt— 31) m i|'t ntd)t meljr ju 
 
 l)clien. 
 ^ttlWgcn— @te ^ulbigen bent 
 
 Montge. 
 lo^neit— ®ott to^ne e^ 3 f) n e n 
 
 (btr). 
 ttrt<f)9CJjCtt— @r gc()t ftetBtg f e t= 
 
 n e m ®efct)aftc nad). 
 
 (and all other verbs with „ncic^" as prefix.) 
 
 Follow the advice of thy 
 parents. 
 
 He is a slave to ambition. 
 
 You have to obey him. 
 
 Let it suffice you. 
 I believe you. 
 
 I congratulate you on your 
 success. 
 
 He is past help. 
 
 They do homage to the king. 
 
 May God reward you for it. 
 
 He attends diligently to his 
 business. 
 
 nii^Ctt— @« rotrb SDtr (3l)nen) 
 
 nict)t8 nli^en. 
 tatctt— 9Jtan ^at mtr geraten. 
 f(i^al>ett— @S icirb t ^ m md)t 
 
 fd)aben. 
 f(f)meic()e(n — 3;d) jdjmetdile 
 
 mtr. 
 ftcttctn— iffiir miiffen fetner 
 
 aSerfc^wenbung fteuern. 
 tiro^ett— SBir troljen ber ®e» 
 
 fal)r. 
 tJorfteljCtt— (5r foH m e t n e m 
 
 ®ef(f)afte t)orfte^cn. 
 ttjcirfjen— 6r mupte ber ©emolt 
 
 iDetd)en. 
 toii»ctfte^cn— Ste tonnte ber 
 
 3Serfuii|ung ntcf)t n)tber= 
 
 fte^eu. 
 
 It will do you no -good. 
 
 I have been advised. 
 It will not hurt him. 
 
 I flatter myself. 
 
 We must put a stop to his 
 extravagance. 
 We defy danger. 
 
 He shall manage my busi- 
 ness. 
 He had to yield to force. 
 
 She could not resist the temp- 
 tation. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 87 
 
 . U>ittf en— -3d) iBttlfte i I) m 511. I beckoned to him. 
 
 SUftcf)en — CS ftcr)t 3^ 1} n e n It does not behoove you. 
 (bir) nid)t ju. 
 
 and many verbs with the prepositions : an, auf, bet, entgegett, na6), 
 unten, t)or, 5U as prefixes. 
 
 6. Also the following verbs npt having a passive voice : 
 
 (inftetjcn— 33a« ftc^t mtr gar 
 
 ntcf)t an. 
 Ibci^rtflen— Set)agt e8 3^nen 
 
 (bir) ? 
 ftefommcn— ®ie Sergluft ift 
 
 1 1) m gut betommen. 
 t»clici»ctt— SlSte eg — mcnn e6 
 
 O^nen (bir) beltebt. 
 t»ltt^cn— 3 1) m blittit fein Otud 
 
 cittlettd)tctt— Sa§ ttitl m t r 
 
 nic^t einlen^ten. 
 CtttgeJjCtt— @r [oil [ e i n e r 
 
 ©trafe nid)t entgef)en. 
 CtttfaOett— S)er SKut ift i Ij m 
 
 entfalien. 
 entmetfctt—& ift b e r ®efol)r 
 
 entflol^en. 
 entf (igctt— Ser Sontg mill bem 
 
 jT^Tons cntfagen. 
 etrlieeen— (Sr mu^te b e r ^-anf^ 
 
 beit eriiegen. 
 ctftfteittctt— @ie erfil)ien ifjm 
 
 im STraume. 
 fe^Icn— 5lBaS fef)it 3" ^ n e n 
 
 (bir)? 
 
 geJiuOtett— © e m Slrbeiter ge= 
 
 bii^rt fein So^n. 
 gefrttteit— SBie gefaflt e« 3^nen 
 
 (bir)? 
 
 @8 gefollt m i r fefir gut. 
 
 I don't like it all. (It does 
 not suit me at all). 
 Does it please you ? 
 
 The mountain air has done 
 him good. 
 
 As you — if you please. 
 
 No fortune smiles (lit'ly : 
 blooms) on him. 
 
 That is not clear to me. 
 
 He shall not escape (his) 
 punishment. 
 
 His courage failed him. 
 
 He avoided the danger (lit'ly: 
 he fled). 
 
 The king will abdicate (lit'ly: 
 will abandon the throne). 
 
 He had to succumb to the 
 disease. 
 
 She appeared to him in a 
 dream. 
 
 What ails you ? 
 
 The laborer is worthy of his 
 hire. 
 
 How do you like it ? 
 
 I like it very much. 
 
88 
 
 VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 I (you) have succeeded in it. 
 
 flclittgctt— (S8 t|'t mil- (Mr, 
 
 3t)nen) geluiigcn 
 fleratcn— g^^ gerat 1 1) m afleS. 
 jjctcijfjctt— Seine Seii^tgIaKbtg= 
 
 fett geret(^te t [) m 3um 
 
 25erberben. 
 gejlewett— ©te @^re gejiemt 
 
 i {)m. 
 9lci<ftcn— Sine glcic£)t bem an= 
 
 bern. 
 f often— 3Ba8 foftet 3 ^ n e n 
 
 (bir) biefe Sampe '? 
 nmngcltt— 68 mangclt t ^ m 
 
 on ®elb. 
 mttnJ>Ctt— ®a8 tttll m i r nid)t 
 
 munben. 
 ttrtl^Ctt— ©r ftollte [id) mir 
 
 na^en. 
 ^rtffctt— Stefer 9to(i^3a|t3^nen 
 
 (bir) [et)r gut. 
 fd^einen — ®ie Sonne fdjeint 
 
 m i r in'S ®ei'id)t. 
 f(^tne<f en— SBie fdimedt 3f)nen 
 
 (bir) bie[er2Bein? 
 n>i^evfa^ten — 2Bir motlen 
 
 i ^ m ©ereitigteit toU 
 
 berfa^ren ta|'fen. 
 
 3 ^ m ift ein gro^eS 
 
 Ungliid miberfa^ren. 
 jttiJ^iJten— Sitte, i)onn Sie m ir 
 
 /:. The following Impersonal Verbs : e8 a^nt, efett, gebridit, 
 grant, liegt bnron, [c^anbert, f(!^n)inbelt, traumt. 
 
 He succeeds in all. 
 His credulity proved his 
 ruin. 
 
 The honor is due to him. 
 
 One looks like the other. 
 
 What does this lamp cost 
 you ? 
 
 He is in need of money. 
 
 I don't relish that. 
 
 He intended to approach me. 
 
 This coat tits you very well. 
 
 The sun shines in my face. 
 
 How do you like (relish) this 
 wine ? 
 
 We will do him justice. 
 
 A great misfortune has be- 
 fallen him. 
 
 Please, listen to me. 
 
 & at)nt m i r, ta^ id) itjn ntc 
 toteberfe^en Jnerbe. 
 
 gg efett m i r Dor bicfer ®^etfe. 
 
 68 gebrid)t i t) m an allem. 
 
 68 grant i I) r cor bem 6ya= 
 men. 
 
 My heart forbodes, that I 
 shall never see him again. 
 
 I loathe this food. 
 
 He is in want of every thing. 
 
 She is afraid of the examina- 
 tion. 
 
VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 89 
 
 (5§ Itegt m i r gar nic^tS baran. 
 
 (58 f^aubert m t r, mnn idj boi-= 
 ait bcnfe. 
 
 (58 f^wtnbette t ^ m, ol8 er in 
 bte 2:iefe f^aitte. 
 
 @8 traumte m t r, i6) tear auf 
 bem SDteere. 
 
 It does not at all concern me. 
 I shudder, when I think of it. 
 
 He became dizzy, as he look- 
 ed into the deep. 
 
 I dreamed, I was on the 
 ocean. 
 
 d. The Reflexive Verbs : ft(i) anmo|en, auSbebingen, benten, 
 einbilben, crbittcn, getrauen, metten, oorne^men, oorftefien. 
 
 3Du ma^eft b t r ju otel an. 
 Qi) bebtnge m t r biefeS au8. 
 
 Qi) ba^te m t r, bap e8 fo fd. 
 
 ®u bitbeft bi r (Ste bilben fi^) 
 ju oiel ctn. 
 
 Srbitte biv ttmai »on mir 
 unb bn fotlft e8 ^aben. 
 
 Q^ getraue m t r miJ)t, t^m jn 
 na^en. 
 
 aRerfe bir woljl, maS icf) bir 
 jage. 
 
 Qij ne^me m 1 1 oor, don jeijt 
 an fleiptger ju fetn. 
 
 ©telle b i r mein (5rftannen 
 oor. 
 
 You assume too much. 
 
 I make this condition for 
 myself. 
 
 I thought it was so. 
 
 You have too high an opinion 
 of yourself. 
 
 Ask me for something and 
 you shall have it. 
 
 I dare not come near him. 
 
 Mind well, what I tell you. 
 
 I intend henceforth to be 
 more diligent. 
 
 Imagine my astonishment. 
 
 225. 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 a. Most all Transitive Verbs : (Sr Itebt fie; Qi) lobe i ^ n ; 
 cr totrb b i 6) betpn ; tcE) .fef)e b t c^, etc. 
 
 i. The Reflexive Verbs : fii^ argern ; angfttgen ; betriibcn ; 
 bctitmmern ; be[innen ; er^olcn ; erinnern ; freiicn ; gramen ; irren ; 
 fd)(imen ; tiiuidjen. 
 
 I am much vexed about this 
 matter. 
 
 Qd) cjrgere m i d) fet)r iiber btefe 
 ®ad)e. 
 
 !Cu brauc^ft b 1 1^ (@te brau^en 
 fii^) bariiber ntct)t ju iingftigen. 
 
 iDlefe ^Jai^ric^t ^ot m i ^ fe^r 
 betriibt. 
 
 You need not be alarmed at 
 it. 
 
 This news has grieved me 
 much. 
 
90 
 
 VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 ©etlimmcrc b t d) nicf)t urn 
 meine Stngetcgentjeiten. 
 
 ^efinne b i c^ baiiiber. 
 
 Sd) f)offc, bu wirft btc^ ba(b 
 ertjoten. 
 
 3d) erinnerc m i d) ber Sac^e 
 getmu. 
 
 SBie foHte ic^ m i d) bariibcr 
 freuen ! 
 
 -3d) grttme m t c^ fcf)r iiber bie= 
 fen aScrluft. 
 
 S)u tnft b i c^ (Ste trren fid)) 
 meiit f^reunb. 
 
 ©u follteft btc^ (Ste follten 
 fic^) fc^cimen, fo etoa6 5U Ujun. 
 
 G3 toirb i^m ntd)t geltngen, 
 in t d) ju tciufdien. 
 
 Don't meddle with my af- 
 fairs. 
 
 Think about it. 
 
 I hope you will, soon recover. 
 
 I remember the matter per- 
 fectly. 
 
 Why should I rejoice over it! 
 
 I am much grieved at this 
 loss. 
 
 You are mistaken, my friend. 
 
 You ought to be ashamed to 
 do such a thing. 
 
 He shall not succeed in de- 
 ceiving me. 
 
 c. The Impersonal Verbs : e6 befiillt, befrembet, bctrifft, 
 bauert, baui^t, blinft, burftct, fnert, ge()t an, gelitftct, ^ungert, 
 iommcrt, fitmmert, rent, fd)t(ifert, fdjmerjt, ftii^t, Berbrtept, uerlangt, 
 iBunbeit. 
 
 (i§ befiet t b n eine gro^e Sngft. 
 
 ® befrembet mtdj, btc^ t)ier 5U 
 fefien." 
 
 @S bctrifft t f) n (fie) gonj altetn. 
 
 S8 boucrt m 1 1^, bte§ ju prcn. 
 
 (S« baud)t mid), i^n fd)on frii^er 
 gefcljen jn tjaben. 
 
 ® bunft m t d) eine (ange ^dt, 
 
 ® burftet t ^ n nadi 9?n^ra. 
 & frtert t f) n (fie) fe^r. 
 (58 ge^t b i d) gar ntd)t8 an. 
 
 ©8 geliiftet i i) n nad) SBetn. 
 S8 ^ungerte m i d) fe^r. 
 S8 jommert m i d), t^n fo un= 
 glitcfltd) 5U fet)en. 
 
 A great anguish seized him. 
 
 It surprises me, to see you 
 her^. 
 
 It only concerns him (her). 
 
 I am very sorry to hear this. 
 
 It seems to me, that I have 
 seen him before. 
 
 It seems to me a long time, 
 that . . . 
 
 He thirsts after fame. 
 
 He (she) is very cold. 
 
 It does not concern you at 
 all. 
 
 He longs for wine. 
 
 I was very hungry. 
 
 It grieves me, to see him so 
 unhappy. 
 
NOTES ON VERBS. 
 
 91 
 
 m<i)t. 
 
 baran 
 (S3 
 
 fiimmert m t d) biird)ou§ 
 
 reut m i cf|. 
 fdjlcifert i I) n (fie). 
 
 fc^merst m t d), rocnn id) 
 
 bentc. 
 
 ftic^t m i c^ in ber Seite. 
 iDirb i t) n fe^r uerbriepcn. 
 uerlanijt m i d) 311 tutffeu. 
 foUte mtc^ md)t tuunbern. 
 
 It does not trouble me at all. 
 
 I repent of it. 
 
 He (she) is sleepy. 
 
 It hurts me to think of it. 
 
 My side twinges. 
 
 It will vex him greatly. 
 
 I want to know. 
 
 I should not wonder. 
 
 NOTES. 
 
 236. Many transitive verbs have the dative when referring to 
 a thing, and the accusative when referring to a person ; thus : 
 Sr fi^Iagt mid) mit etnem ©totfe, he strikes me with a stick ; 
 but : ber 9tegen fd)lagt m i r in'3 (^efii^t, the rain strikes my 
 face. Qd) ffierbe b t c^ jit t()m f e n b e n, I will send you to 
 him; but: 3d) tDcrbe btr einett JBrief fenben, I will send you a 
 letter. D ^err, fd)oite m i dj ! O Lord, spare me ! but : D, §err, 
 [d)one mtrmettt Sinb ! O Lord, spare me my child! ^ttte, 
 fteden Ste mid) bie[em ^errtioor; Please introduce me to, this 
 gentleman; but: fteflen Sie m i r bie[en §enett Oor ; Introduce 
 this gentleman to me, etc. 
 
 337. SaffCtt has the accusative, if the first person is the 
 active one ; and the dative, if a third person is the active one ; 
 thus: Saffen Sie mid) btcfcn SBxii] tjortefen ; let me read this 
 letter to you ; but : 2a\\m ®te m t r biefeii Srief Dortefen ; have this 
 letter read to me. SBoHen @te ti mid) mad)m loffeti ? Will you 
 let me do it ? SBottcit 3te e§ m t r mad)eti laffeit '? Will you have 
 it made for me ? 
 
 338. If tfetficn is-used instead of befe^tcn, to bid, order, it is 
 followed by the dative, thus : SBer (}at b t r basS ge^eipen ? Who bid 
 you to do this ? 
 
 But if followed by a verb in the infinitive, it takes the accusa- 
 tive ; thus : 2Ber ^te^ bid) f m m e n ? Who told you to come ? 
 
 339. Sttfi^Cttl has the accusative case if followed by a 
 noun in the genitive, otherwise it has the dative ; thus : 3^d) 
 
92 ADVERBS. 
 
 toerfic^ere @te inetner ?5reitnbfdiaft (gen); I assure you of my 
 
 friendship ; but : Q6) WX\ii)tVt ^l^neil, bafe e8 toai)T ift; I assure 
 you, that it is true. 
 
 330. Xvaiten has the dative if denoting "to trust": 25Mr 
 fijnnen i i) in nii^t tmuen ; we can not trust him. But if it denotes 
 "to marry, to join in marriage," it has the accusative : SBetc^er 
 ^rebtgcr ^at bid) getraut ? What minister has married you ? 
 
 ADVERBS. ttmftatt9§t»>drter. 
 
 331. The adverb modifies a verb, an adjective or another 
 adverb. It is : 
 
 a. Original : l^eute, to-day ; jeljt, now ; fe^r, very. 
 
 d. Derivative : fiiqlt^ (fuq), shortly ; neultc^ (neu), lately. 
 
 c. Compound : atleiufciHS, eventually ; feine8=tDeg8, by no 
 
 means. 
 
 d. Every adjective, inodifying the predicative verb : [iltgt 
 
 f (f) JI, sings beautifully. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. , 
 
 333. Some adverbs are compared, thus : frii!^, frut)er, am 
 jirii^eften, early ; fpSt, fpater, am fpateften, late ; batb, e^er, am 
 e^eften (friiljeften), soon ; gern, (teber, am Itebften, gladly, willingly ; 
 oft, bfter, am bfteftcn, often ; felten, fettenet, am feltcnfteit, seldom. 
 
 Many adverbs are- compared by means of other adverbs, thus: 
 fe^r tta^rf(f)etnltc^, very likely ; ganj aHein, all alone ; mc^r jurud, 
 more back. 
 
 ADVERBS OF TIME. 
 333 
 
 Dorgeftem, the day before yes- 
 terday. 
 
 geftern, yesterday. 
 
 ^eutc, to-day. 
 
 morgeu, to-morrow. 
 
 ilbcrmorgen, the day after to- 
 morrow. 
 
 morgen8, in the morning. 
 mtttagS, at noon. 
 abenbS, in the evening. 
 nac^tS, at night. 
 mittentac^tS, at midnight, 
 [tiinbtii^, hourly, 
 tttgtic^, daily. 
 
ADVERBS OF TIME. 
 
 9S 
 
 tt)(id}cnttic^, weekly. 
 
 monatlic^, monthly. 
 
 ici^rltc^, annually. 
 
 ftunbentang, for hours. 
 
 tagelang, for whole days. 
 
 tt)0(i)entang, for weeks. 
 
 monbenlang (monatelang) for 
 months. 
 
 jaljretong, many years. 
 
 friil), early. 
 
 fpat, late- 
 
 anfongS, anfiingU^, juerft, at 
 first, in the beginning. 
 
 enbti(^, ft^tiepc^, finally. 
 
 jUlel^t, at last. 
 
 je^t, nun, now. 
 
 ebcn, foebcn, now, just now. 
 
 6alb, gteicl), soon. 
 
 fogtet^, [ofort, immediately. 
 
 augenblidlii^, in a moment. 
 
 oft, often. 
 
 ofterS, Oftmate, frequently, re- 
 peatedly. 
 
 felten, seldom. 
 
 i^on, berettS, already. 
 
 noc^, yet. 
 
 langc, long (while). 
 
 Ittngft, long ago. 
 
 cinft, einmol, once. 
 
 fonft, e^cbem, eternals, fritter, 
 
 formerly. 
 ^oniatS, then, at that time. 
 
 fUnfttg, bereinft, in future time. 
 
 fortan, ^tnfort, henceforth. 
 
 attejeit, jeberjett, at all times. 
 
 immer, tmmerfort, tminerju, iiti' 
 merttjo^renb, forttt)a()renb, ftets, 
 unauf^dl'Iic^, always, continu- 
 ally. 
 
 jebe?ma(, every time. 
 
 jat}raua jafirein, all the year 
 round. 
 
 je, iemalS, ever. 
 
 nie, ntemats, ntmmer, never. 
 
 nimmerme^r, nevermore. 
 
 mandimal, juinetlen, btStneiten, 
 sometimes. 
 
 unterbeffen, wii^renbbeffen, mean- 
 time. 
 
 na(f)bcm, after that. 
 
 fettbem, since then. 
 
 einftoeilen, for a while. 
 
 Borlaufig, temporarily. 
 
 ncidifteng, next time. 
 
 bann unb toann, t)tn unb iDieber, 
 now and then. 
 
 altmiipg, nacE) unb nacE), gradu- 
 ally. 
 
 pIBpd), suddenly. 
 
 et(enb§, flugS, gefdjttiinb, rafc^, 
 fli)nell, quickly, speedily. 
 
 jiingft, fiirslid), le^t^in, neultc^, 
 lately, the other day. 
 
 el)' C^e, ere. 
 
 beoor, JUOOr, before. 
 
 t)orf)er, previously. 
 
 Dor^in, a little while ago. 
 
 nai^^er, afterwards. 
 
 balb barauf, soon afterwards. 
 
 jugtetif), at the same time. 
 
94 
 
 234. 
 
 1. Sic finbcn mit^ a b e n b 8 
 t m m e r 51: §aufe. 
 
 ■2. ©r ift t a g 1 1 (f) tm SBafbe. 
 
 ADVERBS OF TIME. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 ADVERBS OF TIME. 
 
 1. You always 
 
 3. ;i>ic fommen t) e u t c fe^r 
 [pal. ^ 
 
 4. laagen 3ie i^m ti^ toerbe 
 balb (gfeid)) fommen. 
 
 5. ®ic fommen i m m e r 511 
 friil). 
 
 6. 3£ el^er, je lieber. 
 
 7. Gs mar e t n m a I ein 
 
 8. Sfeiben Sie untevbcf= 
 fen t)tev. 
 
 9. © a m a 1 8 ttiaren tutr jung 
 unb unerfafji-en ; j e g t aber [inb 
 n)ir att. 
 
 10. 3t c u t i c^ mar id) im Zi)t' 
 ater ; a n f a n g 8 mar e8 ^icmtii^ 
 leer, aber nad) unbnad) (aU- 
 maf)Iig) fitllte fid) ba§ §auS unb 
 murbe ooUcr, ate ic^ e§ j e gefel)en. 
 
 11. & ift jal)rau>3 ial)r= 
 e t n auf jReifeh. 
 
 12. ^aufen @ie fdjnell ,^um 
 airjt imb fagen @ie i{)m, er 
 miiffe f g I e 1 1^ (fofort) fommen. 
 
 13. 3^d) mar no^ n i e in 8on= 
 bon, unb gtaube faum, bap id| 
 j e m a (8 ba^in gel)en merbe. 
 
 14. diji er abrcifte fprad) er : 
 \d) merbe immer an bid) (3te) 
 bcnfen ; er briidte mir I a n g e bie 
 §anb, e n b ( i d) aber mugtcn mir 
 fc^ciben, benn fc^on beroegte fid) 
 ber 3u9- @ i I e n b S fprang er in 
 ben SBagen (iBaggon), unb b a ( b 
 mar ermetnem Slide entfdimunben. 
 
 find me at 
 home in the evening. 
 
 2. He is in the woods every 
 day. 
 
 3. You are very late to-day. 
 
 4. Tell him I shall come 
 
 soon. 
 
 5. 
 early. 
 
 6. 
 
 You always come too 
 
 The sooner the better. 
 There was once a king. 
 
 8. Stay here meanwhile. 
 
 9. At that time we were 
 young and inexperienced, but 
 now we are old. 
 
 10. I was recently at the the- 
 ater ; at first it was quite 
 empty, but gradually the house 
 filled and was more crowded, 
 than I had ever seen it. 
 
 11. He is travelling all the 
 year round. 
 
 12. Run quickly to the phy- 
 sician and tell him to coxa%im- 
 mediately. 
 
 13. I never was in London, 
 and hardly believe that I shall 
 ever go there. 
 
 14. Before he departed, he 
 said: I shall always think of you: 
 he pressed my hand a long 
 while, but finally we had to part, 
 for already the train was moving. 
 He jumped quickly into the car 
 and soon he vanished from my 
 sight. 
 
ADVERBS OF PLACE. 
 
 95 
 
 ADVERBS 
 235. 
 
 ^icr, here. 
 
 t)icr^cr, hither. 
 
 I)ic(r)ntcben, here below, in this 
 
 life. 
 l)tcvfclbft, in this place. 
 l)er, hither, 
 ^erab, down, 
 l^eron, near, on. 
 f)erauf, up (to the speaker). 
 ^erauS, out. 
 ^erbet, oh, near, 
 l^eretn, in, into, 
 ^eritber, over (to this side). 
 I)erum, um^er, round about. 
 ^erunter, down. 
 [jerDor, forth, out. 
 ^in, there, thither. 
 
 Also compounded with ab, 
 an, ouf, au8, etn, iiber, unter. 
 
 ba, bort, there 
 
 ba{)tn, bort^tn, thither. 
 
 oben, up, above. 
 
 brobett, up there, in heaven. 
 
 briiben, on the other side, in the 
 
 other world, 
 aupen, without, 
 brau^en, outside, 
 inneti, within, 
 brtn (bartn), inside, 
 itnten, below, down stairs. 
 Dorn, in front, 
 ^inten, behind, 
 relets, to the right, 
 linte, to the left. 
 Coran, at the head, first. 
 
 OF PLACE. 
 
 ytriicf, back. 
 
 vltcflingS, from behind, back- 
 ward. 
 
 DOrmartS, forward. 
 
 rii(JtDcirt6, backward. 
 
 [cittDCil'tS, sideways, aside. 
 
 obiucirtS, downward. 
 
 aufroctrtS, upward. 
 
 atlei'tDttrtS, iiberalt, everywhere. 
 
 atlcrfett^, on every side. 
 
 fdnerfeitS, on neither side. 
 
 il'genbtDO, anywhere, in some 
 place. 
 
 ntl'gcnbS, nowhere, in no place. 
 
 trgenbtt)0l)er, from some place. 
 
 tl"genbrool)tn, to some place. 
 
 imterroegg, on the way (road). 
 
 ireg, fort, away. 
 
 nalje, near. 
 
 fern, mett, far. 
 
 Wetttiiiifig, distantly. 
 
 toett unb breit, far and near. 
 
 njeitljer, from afar. 
 
 bevgab, down hill. 
 
 bergon, bcrgouf, up hill. 
 
 nteber, down. 
 
 befonberS, apart, separately. 
 
 mitten, in the midst, amidst. 
 
 niJrbltC^, northerly. 
 
 ofttic^, easterly. 
 
 fitblicf), southerly. 
 
 Weftttd), westerly. 
 
 norbWartS, northward. 
 
 oftroartS, eastward. 
 
 fiiblDcirtg, southward. 
 
 roeftwarts, westward. 
 
96 
 
 ADVERBS OF PLACE. 
 
 S36. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 ADVERBS OF PLACE. 
 
 1. aSeriftba? 
 
 2. ©in armer 5Kann tft b r a u= 
 6 en. 
 
 3. 33 r 1 1) t n wollen mir ge= 
 ^en. 
 
 4. 3;ft eS bal)tn mtt tf)m 
 getommen ? 
 
 5. Unb Sc^meftern finb unb 
 Sruber, ba broben ©tern 
 an Stern. (§. o. gaUerslcbeu.) 
 
 6. Sa unten aber iff 8 
 furd)tertt(^. (©(fitter.) 
 
 7. Soi!^ ber ©egen fommt Bon 
 oben? (Sdiiaer.) 
 
 8. 3Ba§ tttti in [etnem grauen 
 ©aar, ber blinbe Sonig ,b o r t ? 
 
 9. ®a tritt am feiner ^(uft 
 ^ ere or, ber Staubcr gro| unb 
 milb (Ut)laiib.) 
 
 10. aSir marf^ierten B o r= 
 nj a r 1 8 ; o o r a n ritt ber alte 
 ©eneral, r e (^ 1 8 unb t i n f S feine 
 Slbjutanten. ^tr [c^auten un8 
 lib era It um, aber nirgenbs 
 war ber getnb ju fe^en. ^rgenb= 
 w mufete er ober fetn, unb fo 
 bogen wir feitmarts in ba§ 
 ®ebii[c^ ab. Sa ertbnte bon 
 tD e i t ^ e r jTrompetenfc^atl ; aon 
 Winter bent ^iigel crf(^ien ber 
 geinb unb balb maren toir n a ^ e 
 jufammcn. 21 u f unb n i c b e r 
 mogte bie ®c^Iaii)t; mir fam)Df= 
 ten wie bie Sbwen, trieben ben 
 j^einb 5 u r ii d unb bte @i^Iad)t 
 mar gemonnen. 
 
 1. Who is tAere ? 
 
 2. A poor man is outside. 
 
 3. Thither we will go. 
 
 4. Has it come to that with 
 him ? 
 
 5. For the stars on high are 
 brothers and sisters. 
 
 6. But down there it is 
 terrible. 
 
 7. Yet the blessing comes 
 from above. 
 
 8. What does the blind gray- 
 haired king want there ? 
 
 9. Then stepped /i^r/Vi (out) 
 of his cave the robber tall and 
 wild. 
 
 10. We marched forward 
 (on) ; in front the old general 
 on horseback, to the right and 
 to the left his adjutants. We 
 looked about everywhere, but 
 the enemy was nowhere to be 
 seen. However, somewhere he 
 had to be and- so we turned 
 aside into the bushes. Then 
 the sound of a trumpet was 
 heard from afar ; from behind 
 the hill appeared the enemy and 
 soon we were near one another. 
 To and fro the battle raged ; 
 we fought like lions, drove the 
 enemy back and the battle was 
 won. 
 
ADVERBS OF NUMBER AND ORDER. 
 
 97 
 
 ADVERBS OF NUMBER AND ORDER. 
 
 337. 
 
 ottetn, alone, 
 alletitig, exclusively, 
 atle, at(e8, all. 
 roetttg, few, little. 
 nil^tS, nothing. 
 
 allefamt, atljumal, all together. 
 5ufantmen, betfammen, together, 
 eintnat, jWeiiitot, once, twice, etc. 
 me^ratate, several times. 
 Ctelmate, many times. 
 abermate,tt)teber, wteberum, again. 
 nod)mal§, noc^ einmat, once more. 
 
 teite, partly. 
 
 gro^tetitetls, metftentette, for the 
 
 most part. 
 meiftenS, mostly, 
 einfac^, plainly. 
 met)rfa(f), toielfodE), manifoldly. 
 erftenS, jtBeitenS, firstly, secondly, 
 
 etc. 
 5um erften; jum jttieitett, in the 
 
 first, second place, etc. 
 3uerft, first, 
 jule^t, last. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 338. 
 
 ADVERBS OF NUMBER AND ORDER. 
 
 1. -3cf) war ben gan^en Slbenb 
 a U e i n. 
 
 2. SBtr gtngcn jufammen 
 am. 
 
 3. ^d) ^abi eg e i n m a I ge= 
 tl)an, roerbe eS aber nttf)t ft i e b e r 
 (noc^mate) t^un. 
 
 4. mdn Sruber Gilbert |ot 
 gefc^rieben ; er lii^t @te (®uif)) 
 atle t)-telmal§ gril|en. 
 
 5. 8egen @te btcfe SJiufter b e» 
 f onberS; 
 
 6. ®a8 ®ute, ba8 ber aJJenfif) 
 fttet, totrb er o t e t f a if) ernten. 
 
 7. 35er SBetjen ift t e i 1 3 etn= 
 gefal^ren, t e i 18 ftel^t er no^ auf 
 bent t^elbe. 
 
 1. I was alone the whole 
 evening. 
 
 2. We went out together. 
 
 3. I have done it once, but 
 shall never do it again. 
 
 4. My brother Albert has 
 written ; he sends many regards 
 to all of you. 
 
 5. Put these patterns separ- 
 ately. 
 
 6. The good which man 
 soweth, he will reap -manifolaly. 
 
 7. The wheat is partly har- 
 vested, a part (^partly it) is yet 
 in the field. 
 
98 
 
 ADVERBS OF COMPARISON. 
 
 8. SBirrctftenmetftenteitS 
 mit ber Sal^n ; m e ^ r m o I S wa» 
 ten Wtr gejtDungen unfere 9tetfc 
 3U ^ferbe ju mac^en, bo ber SBeg 
 gro^tentetU burc^ SBatber 
 fu^rte. 
 
 9. Qi) ifabt leljte mai)t fe^r 
 w e n t g gef(f)Iafen. 
 
 10. SBer 5 u e r ft !ommt, 
 ma^It 5 u e r ft. 
 
 8. We travelled mostly by 
 rail ; several times we were 
 obliged to make our journey on 
 horseback, as the way for the 
 most part led through forests. 
 
 9. I (have) slept very little 
 last night. 
 
 10. First come, first served, 
 (lit'ly : first grinds.) 
 
 339. 
 
 ADVERBS OF COMPARISON. 
 
 Onberg, differently, 
 etma, uttgefii^r, about, 
 betna^e. faft, almost. 
 ■ gerabe fo, eben fo, genau fo, just as. 
 fo . . . tt)te, as-as. 
 gtetd), like, alike. 
 glet(^nte, even as. 
 Ung(et(^, unequally, far. 
 ebenfatla, glet^fafiS, likewise, 
 beggtetc^en, the (whose) like. 
 
 READING 
 
 340. ADVERBS OF 
 
 1. §ter tft e8 o n b e r 8 ats in 
 Suropa 
 
 2. @te finb gerabe fo olt, 
 tt) t e i(^. 
 
 3. SDiefer SBeg ift eben fo 
 toeit iDte jener. 
 
 4. (Sr ift etn Kuger DJiann, 
 be8glet(^en ftett unb breit 
 ntd)t ju finben ift. 
 
 5. 3^1^ bictbe ^ (i) ft e n 8 eine 
 SEBo^e fort. 
 
 6. (58 ift bci weitem nt^t 
 fo fd)Iimm, tttc i(^ bod)te. 
 
 7. -3(1) effe gern Dbft, be= 
 f on ber 8 aber Si^fet. 
 
 alfo, thus. 
 
 berma^en, bergeftalt, so much, in 
 
 such a manner. 
 einigerma|cn, in some degree. 
 ^iJi^ftenS, at the best, utmost. 
 
 toenigftenS, at least. 
 
 Weit, far more, much, 
 bei tteitem, by far. 
 Keber, rather. 
 befonberS, especially. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 1. It is different here from 
 what it is in Europe. 
 
 2. You are just as old as I 
 am. 
 
 3. This way is just as far as 
 the other. 
 
 4. He is a prudent man, whose 
 like cannot be found far and 
 near. 
 
 5. I shall stay away one week 
 at the most. 
 
 6. It is not so bad as I 
 thought by far. 
 
 7. I like to eat fruit, especially 
 apples. 
 
ADVERBS OF MODK. 
 
 99 
 
 ADVERBS OF MODE. 
 
 241. 
 
 au^euft, tjbc^ft, uberau3, ungemetn, 
 
 extremely, exceedingly, 
 fetjr, rerfit, ganj, very, quite, 
 gaitjtii^, dJiUig, entirely, 
 tioqugttrf), particularly, 
 betno^e, faft, almost, nearly, 
 laum, hardly, 
 gent, willingly, 
 genug, enough. 
 Itur, bloS, only, merely. 
 gerobe, directly, exactly. 
 
 befonberS, tnSbcfonbere, especi- 
 ally, particularly. 
 ;5ufe^enb8, fi(f)tbarli(f), visibly. 
 merflilJ), perceptibly. 
 oerftanbOc^, intelligibly, 
 oernc^mlict), audibly, 
 uncerne^mli^, inaudibly. 
 jiemlic^, pretty, moderately, 
 fogar, even. 
 3U fe^r, too much, 
 mogtti^ft, as much as possible. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 342. 
 
 ADVERBS OF MODE. 
 
 1. 3^re ©efellfc^aft tft mtr 
 f e ^ r angene^m. 
 
 2. Qd)Utt ganj 3^rer Wtb 
 nung. 
 
 3. ©ie @a(^e ift metnem ®e= 
 bci(J)tntfie g a n 5 1 i c^ entf alien. 
 
 4. 3^r @of)n wtrb gro|; er 
 ttact)ft 5ufef)enb«. 
 
 5. 3d) befmbe mid^ jtemltc^ 
 
 tt)Of)t. 
 
 6. ©tefe jDame tft au|er[t 
 gebtlbet unb u b c r a it « (ungc= 
 mein) intereffont. ®ie f^rtd)t b o r= 
 jugli(^ franjofifi) unb fogar 
 ftjanifcf), nnb eon ber beutfc^en 
 <Bpta<i)t berfle^t fie genug, um 
 fic^ oerftanbtic^ auSjubriiden. 
 
 1. Your company is very wel- 
 come to me. 
 
 2. I am entirely of your 
 opinion. 
 
 3. The matter has passed 
 from my mind entirely. 
 
 4. Your son is getting tall, he 
 grows visibly. 
 
 5. I am pretty well. 
 
 6. This lady is extremely cul- 
 tured and highly interesting. 
 She speaks Frenc.h excellently 
 and even Spanish, and of 
 the German she understands 
 enough, to express herself intel- 
 ligibly. 
 
100 
 
 ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION. 
 
 ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION. 
 343. 
 
 ja, yes. , 
 
 nein, no. 
 
 ntd)t, not. 
 
 geftt|, beftimmt, ficfiertii!^, cer- 
 tainly. 
 
 adcrbtngS, freiltd), of course. 
 
 tt)a{)rlt(^, fiiraal^r, verily, in- 
 deed. 
 
 jebenfaflS, at any rate. 
 
 tetne§trieg§> by no means. 
 
 toirtlid), actually, really. 
 
 toa^rfc^eiiiltd), tiermut^liii), prob- 
 ably. 
 
 tJteCetC^t, perhaps, 
 unglaufalt^, incredibly. 
 mogItc!^enfatt8, possibly, 
 unmdgltc^, impossibly. 
 f(i)Ie(|terbtng8, positively, by all 
 
 means. 
 unfe^Ibar, certainly, infallibly. 
 burdiauS, absolutely. 
 
 unoermutet, unocrfefienS, unex- 
 pectedly, 
 unftreittg, incontestably. 
 notWenbig, necessarily. 
 unjtDetfel^aft, undoubtedly. 
 
 244. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION. 
 
 1. 3if) iDerbe gonj b e fti m m t 
 (unfe^tbar) tomtncn. 
 
 •2. jDu btft (®te finb) tt)a^r= 
 lic^ (furwalir) etn gtuc£ltd)er 
 m<xm. 
 
 3. ^ann tcf) mxi) \oxtii\6) 
 barauf oerlaffcn? (Stcf)erli(f). 
 
 4. -3(f) fterbe I)od)|'t w a 1^ r= 
 f (^ e t n i i d) morgen cerretieu ; 
 i)ienetii)t fomme t(^ in jwet 
 bt8 bret 2;agen mteber. 
 
 5. ®ie 9£a(f)rtc^t lam unt)er= 
 mutet, aber fie tft unftreitig 
 tt)at)r. 
 
 6. (5r mai^te e3 in einer un* 
 g I a u b I i d) turjcn ^dt 
 
 7. Odi gtaube nid)t, ba| er eS 
 tf)un iDirb. 
 
 8. jDenfen ®te n t d) t au^ fo ? 
 
 9. Stein, metn §err, ii^ bin 
 onberer SJieinung. 
 
 1. I shall come most cer- 
 tainly. 
 
 2. You are indeed a happy 
 man. 
 
 3. May I indeed depend upon 
 it ? Certainly. 
 
 4. I shall most likely depart 
 to-morrow ; I may perhaps re- 
 turn in two or three days. 
 
 5. The news came unexpect- 
 edly, but it is incontestably true. 
 
 6. He did it in an incredibly 
 short time. 
 
 7. I do not believe that he 
 will do it.- 
 
 8. Don't you also think so? 
 
 9. No Sir, I am of different 
 opinion. 
 
ADVERBS OF INTERROGATION. 
 
 101 
 
 ADVERBS OF INTERROGATION. 
 
 245. 
 
 ttte ? how ? what ? 
 
 too ? where ? 
 
 toaram ? why ? 
 
 toeS^alb? toe^megen? wherefore? 
 
 ttOJU? what for ? 
 ttann ? when ? 
 
 toie fo ? how so ? 
 WO[)in ? whither ? 
 tool)er, whence ? 
 toODon ■? of what ? 
 IDomit ? wherewith ? 
 niif)t toal^r ? not so ? etc. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 246. 
 
 ADVERBS OF INTERROGATION. 
 
 1. 5JBte I)ctBett @tc? 
 
 2. SJBte tiiel foftet biefer^utV 
 
 3. jffiie fo totffen @te baS? 
 
 4. as fann iif) eS ftnbett ? 
 
 5. SB arum fagten @ie mtr 
 t)a?i ni6)t frti^er ? 
 
 6. Wo 5 u [oil baa ? 
 
 7. aSomit fann ti) ^^^nen 
 btenen ? 
 
 8. 2Bo^in ge^en ©ie metn 
 §err? 
 
 9. Sr tft fe^r gefc^ett, nid^t 
 ttofir? 
 
 1. What is your name ? 
 
 2. What is the price of this 
 hat? 
 
 3. ^i?z£/ do you know that ? 
 
 4. Where can I find it ? 
 
 5. Jf^,^j/ did you not tell me 
 that before ? 
 
 6. What is this fori What 
 is the use of this ? 
 
 7. In what can I serve you ? 
 
 8. Whither are you going 
 Sir? 
 
 9. He is very clever, is he 
 not! (lit'ly : not true?) 
 
 247. Note. — Discriminate between hxtnu and iPCtttt, when. 
 SEBltnn is only used as interrogation in reference to a certain 
 time, while ttfCtttt is a conjunction, meaning either : when or if. 
 aaSrtnn toirb er fommen? When will he come? SSSctttt er aber 
 ntd^t fommt? But if he does not come ? SSScttu bie Sonne fif)etnt. 
 When the sun is shining. 
 
102 
 
 PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. Set^SHnifHwdrtctr. 
 
 348. The preposition shows in what relation (SJer^Itttig) 
 one noun stands to another. They are classified according to 
 the case they govern. Thus we have : 
 
 249. Prepositions governing the genitive case : 
 
 angefid^tS, in view (face) of. 
 onftatt or ftatt, instead of, in 
 
 place of. 
 6e^uf8, for the purpose of, in 
 
 behalf of. 
 betreffS, as to, with regard to. 
 bie8fett(8), on this side. 
 ienfett(6), beyond, on the other 
 
 side of. 
 l^olben or ^olber, for the sake of, 
 
 on account of. 
 ou^er^Ib, out of, without. 
 tnner^Ib, within, 
 ober^alb, above, 
 unter^alb, below. 
 
 fraft, by (in) virtue of. 
 
 tiingS, along. 
 
 laut, according to. 
 
 mittelfl or Dermtttelft, by means of. 
 
 tro§, in spite of. 
 
 fetten«, from (the side of). 
 
 um. . .Wtllen, on account of, for 
 
 the sake of. 
 ungeoc^tet, notwithstanding, 
 unfent or unweit, not far from. 
 Oermiigc, by dint (means) of. 
 IDCgen, on account of, for the 
 
 sake of. 
 WSl^renb, during, 
 jufolgc, infolge, in consequence 
 
 of. 
 
 250. If attftatt is separated, the word ftott is considered a 
 noun, thus : <tn SfinbeS Stittt anne^men, to adopt (lifly : to 
 accept in place of a child). 
 
 251. SicSfCtt and jenfelt if not followed by a noun, 
 receive an additional j^ thus : bie Stabt Itegt bte^fcit, jenfett be& 
 ^^ufl'eS, the city lies on this side, beyond the river. ,jDte ©tabt 
 tiegt bie^fett^, jenfeitS. 
 
 252. I^aldcn, tVCgett, urn ..toittcn may be connected 
 with pronouns (see 155). f)(tl(>ett always follows the noun ; 
 ttitt. . .tvincn takes it between, thus : „Um be3 greunbeS ttillen 
 erbarmet euif), " (@c{)iC[er) "for the friends sake have mercy." 
 
 253. For I&ttgS we can also say Ctttlatt(|. Sattgt^ may 
 also be used with the dative, thus : SdltgS be 8 ^tuffCS (genitive); 
 Icings b e m ?J(uffC (dative) along the river ; etttlattg is always 
 preceded by the noun having the accusative case : ben %\Vi^ 
 entlong. 
 
 Note. — Discriminate between longS and ' Kngft long ago.' 
 
PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 103 
 
 354. ^to^ can also be followed by the dative, thus : tro^ 
 b e in (dat.) ttefen Sdinee ; trolj b e 8 (gen.) tiefen @iJ)nee8, in spite 
 
 of the deep snow. 
 
 355. 3uf*'Id^ preceding the noun has the genitive, if follow- 
 ing, the dative ; thus : ' ^wfolge 3^rc§ Sefe^I§ ; 3^^rctn Sefe^tC 
 jufolge ; according to your order. ^ttfOtgC always precedes the 
 noun. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 356. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. 
 
 1. 3lnftatt metneg Sru = 
 bcrS !omme id). 
 
 2. Slngefii^tS biefer 2;t)at= 
 f a (f) e n fonnte er nt(f)t anbcrS 
 urtetlen. 
 
 3. 5? ranf^cttg flatter fann 
 er nti^t fommen. 
 
 4. X^\xt e8 u n f e r e r 
 greunbjcf) aft l^alber. 
 
 5. Stanley gtng nac^ Slfrtfa, 
 be^uf3 etner @rforf(^ung 
 beS 8anbe8. 
 
 6. SetreffsS^reS ©o^neS 
 fonnen @ie unbeforgt fein. 
 
 7. Dber^atb, unter^alb beg 
 SBaff erf aH« ftanb etn ©aunt. 
 
 8. Stait mctne« SlmteS 
 ne^me ii^ biefe SBaaren itt ^e= 
 fcfitag. 
 
 9. 8aut etner SSerorb- 
 n u n g be3 2Jiagtftrat8. 
 
 10. mitklH eineS !Dtet= 
 r i cf) § (iffnete ber Dieb bic Zi)m. 
 
 11. (Seiten3 meineS ©ru= 
 b e r « ^aft bu ntcf)t8 jn fiirc^ten. 
 
 12. Ungeactitet b e 8 f c^ t e i^= 
 ten ^Betters gtng er au8. 
 
 1. Instead of my brother 
 I am coming. 
 
 2. In view of these facts, he 
 could not judge otherwise. 
 
 3. On account of sickness 
 he cannot come. 
 
 4. Do it for the sake of our 
 friendship. 
 
 5. Stanley went to Africa, 
 for the purpose of exploring the 
 country. 
 
 6. As to your son you need 
 not be uneasy. 
 
 7. Above, below the falls 
 stood a tree. 
 
 8. By virtue of my ofifice, I 
 seize these goods. 
 
 9. According to an ordin- 
 ance of the magistrate. 
 
 10. By means of a pick-lock 
 the thief opened the door. 
 
 11. You have nothing to fear 
 from my brother. 
 
 12. Notwithstanding the bad 
 weather Ke went out. 
 
104 
 
 PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 13. Urn f e t n e 8 (S i g e n= 
 [inns m 1 1 1 e n ging er ju 
 Orunbe. 
 
 14. Unttjett, (unfern) b e 8 
 §aufe8 roar etn Sai^. 
 
 15. 23ermoge beg ©ampf e« 
 fonnen roir fc^neC reifen. 
 
 16. ©etner ip ort^er 3 i g» 
 f e 1 1 roegen rourbe er ge^a|t. 
 
 17. SBa^renb beg 9tegen§ 
 ftanben roir unter einem Saume. 
 
 13. On account of his obstin- 
 acy he went to ruin. 
 
 14. Not far from the house 
 was a brook. 
 
 15. By means of steam we 
 can travel fast. 
 
 16. On account of his hard- 
 heartedness he was hated. 
 
 17. During the rain we stood 
 under a tree. 
 
 357. Prepositions governing the dative case. 
 
 auS, out of, from. nSl^ft, next to. 
 
 au^er, outside, beside, beyond. nebft, together with, 
 
 binnen, within, (a certain time), oj,, over, on account of. 
 bei, by, with. 
 
 entgegen, against, 
 gegenuber, opposite. 
 gema|, in accordance with, 
 mit, with. 
 nad), after. 
 
 fantt, (along) with, 
 [eit, since, 
 tion, of, from. 
 JU, to, at, for. 
 juroiber, contrary to. 
 
 358. 3(U%Ct can also be followed by the nominative or 
 accusative case, but then it has the meaning of ' auSgenommen, 
 excepted,' and does not stand at the head of the sentence ; thus : 
 Sitemanb roar l^ier, au|er (auSgenommen) bein Sruber, (nom.) 
 nobody was here, except thy brother ; but : 2luger b C t n C nt 
 ©ruber (dat.) roar noi^ jemanb ^ier, besides thy brother somebody 
 else was here, ^i) tenne Ijier tetncn, au|er (auggenommen) b i 6) 
 (ace), I know no one here, except you ; but: @8 tft fein ®Ott 
 au|er 35 tr (dat.); there is no God dest'de thee. In the phrase 
 ' aupev Sanbeg ' (gen.), auper means as much as au^er^lb — outside 
 of — abroad. 
 
 359. @nt<)e0Cn and $UUfi^er always follow the noun. If 
 entgegen is compounded with .- ge^en, laufen, or similar verbs, it 
 denotes "to meet" thus : roir roodcn i^m entgegenge^cu, — taufen; 
 let us go, run, to meet him. 
 
PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 105 
 
 360. tta<Qft always precedes the noun. .Instead of „nacf)ft" 
 we can say „3imcic^ft, " which mostly follows the noun. SJcic^ft 
 meinem ?|reunbe or : aJietnem greunbe junai^ft, next to my friend. 
 
 361. oh is obsolete and found only in poetry. 
 
 363. frttttt can be compounded with „at(e" thus : allefamt, 
 alltogether. 
 
 363. f&on, of, from, is never used to denote the possesive 
 case, as in the English ; therefore don't say : jDoS ift ber §Unb 
 Don b e m ^ftger, but : ba8 ift ber §unb b e 8 ^ttgerS ; that is the 
 dog of the hunter. 5DaS ^nb b e r armen grau and not : B o n 
 ber armen gran ; the child of the poor woman. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 364. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING 
 
 1. @ie fommen eben au§ ber 
 
 2. !Do8 ift au« ber aWobe. 
 
 3. (5r t^at e§ au8 8iebe, ^a^. 
 
 4. InS H e n Shraften. 
 
 5. Er ift au^er bem §aufe, 
 ou|er ©telle; au|er Oefa^r. 
 
 6. erift au^er fid). 
 
 7. (§« ift au|er alt em 
 ^roeifel. 
 
 8. Sletb bet (not „mtt") 
 mir. 
 
 9. !^ij ^abe Mn ®e(b bet 
 mir. 
 
 10. gr tto^nt bet u n 6. 
 
 11. 6r tuo^nt nal}e bet. 
 
 12. gr ift eben b et m aJJtttag§< 
 effen. 
 
 13. Sinnen ciner ©tunbe, 
 — b r e t e n 2;agen, — e t n e m 
 Sai)Vi, I)offe id) reteber bet gud) ju 
 fetn. 
 
 THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 1. They are just coming 
 from church. 
 
 2. That is out of fashion. 
 
 3. He did it out of love, 
 hatred. 
 
 4. With all might. 
 
 5. He is out of doors ; out 
 of place ; out of danger. 
 
 6. He is beside himself. 
 
 7. It is beyond all doubt. 
 
 8. Stay with me. 
 
 9. I have no money with 
 me. 
 
 10. He lives with us. 
 
 11. He lives near by. 
 
 12. He is just at dinner. 
 
 Within one hour, — three 
 -one year, I hope to be 
 
 13. 
 
 days, 
 
 again with you 
 
106 
 
 PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 
 
 14. @te fianbein mir tmmer 
 entgegen. 
 
 15. S)er SBinb ift unS ent= 
 gegcn. 
 
 16. a)Hr, b tr, t^m gegen= 
 uber fa| etn alter §err. 
 
 17. @r tebt f e t n e m Stanbe 
 gerndp. 
 
 18. SBoden -Sie niil)t mit mir 
 ge^en ? 
 
 19. i)?ein, id) ge^e mit m e i- 
 n e m 58ruber. 
 
 20. SBir ge^en narf) §aufe. 
 
 21. !©a8 ift ntc^t nacf) mci= 
 nem ®ef(^ma(f. 
 
 22. 3Jad) mir fommft bit? 
 
 23. SBtr ge^en b e r 9?et^e 
 nad). 
 
 24. -itad) mciner 3Weinung. 
 
 25. 'Jioc^ft m e i n e m ffinbe 
 Uebe ic^ bid) am meifien. 
 
 26. ©er ajfann nebft (famt) 
 f e i n e m -So^ne ; f e i n e r Zod)-- 
 ter. 
 
 27. @eit ciner SCBoiie, e i» 
 n e m 3a^rc, i|"t er frant. 
 
 28. S e i t roann finb @ie 
 ^ier? 
 
 29. (Srft feit e i n i g e n STagcn. 
 
 30. 33on ID e m ^aben Sie 
 ba8 befommen ? 
 
 31. 58on m e i n e m iBater, 
 meiner ajiutter. 
 
 32. Q6) tl)ue e8 Bonder 5 en 
 gem. 
 
 33. SlBir gel)en jur @:^ule. 
 
 34. Sie erl)ielt e§ ju iljrem 
 ©eburtstage. 
 
 35. 3d) fel)e i[)n 3 u m e r ft e n 
 aWate. 
 
 14. You always act in oppo- 
 sition to me. 
 
 15. The wind is against us. 
 
 16. Opposite me, you, him, 
 sat an old gentleman. 
 
 17. He lives in accordance 
 with his rank. 
 
 18. Will you not go with 
 me ? 
 
 19. No, I am going with my 
 brother. 
 
 20. We are going home. 
 
 21. That is not my taste. 
 
 22. You come after me. 
 
 23. We go by turns. 
 
 24. In my opinion. 
 
 25. Next to my child, I love 
 you most. 
 
 26. The man (together) with 
 his son ; his daughter. 
 
 27. He has been sick for a 
 week ; for a year. 
 
 28. How long have you been 
 here ? 
 
 29. Only a few days since. 
 
 30. Of whom did you get 
 this ? 
 
 31. From my father, my 
 mother. 
 
 32. I do it most willingly 
 (from my heart). 
 
 33. We go to school. 
 
 34. She received it for her 
 birthday. 
 
 35. I see him for the first 
 time. 
 
PREPOSITION GOVERNING THE DAT. OR ACC. CASE. 107 
 
 36. Q6) rufe ben ^errn jur 
 Orbnung. 
 
 37. 3f|t Qijx aSaterju^aufc? 
 
 38. (58 tft miv in ber Seete 
 juwtber. 
 
 39. @te ^aben m e i n e m ^ e= 
 fe^Ie jumiber ge^anbelt. 
 
 36. I call the gentleman to 
 order. 
 
 37. Is your father at home ? 
 
 38. I abhor it ; (lit'ly : it is 
 against my very soul). 
 
 39. You have acted contrary 
 to (against) my command. 
 
 265. Prepositions governing the dative or accusative 
 case : 
 
 an, on, at. neben, beside. • 
 
 auf, upon. iibev, over, above. 
 
 f)inter, behind. unter, under, beneath, 
 
 in, in, into. Bor, before. 
 
 JWifrfien, between. 
 
 366. The dative follows when they indicate a rest, or a 
 motion without changing the place ; or when they answer the 
 questions : fto? where ? iDOrin? wherein ? ftoran? of what ? how ? 
 IDann? when ? 
 
 Examples : ©a^ ^u^ liegt auf b e m jEififie ; the book lies 
 on the table.. 2Bo? where? auf bent Slif(i)e (dative ; rest), ©er 
 aJiann ge^t t m ^axk ^paiinm ; the man is walking in the park. 
 2Bo ? tm ^arfe ; (dative ; motion in the same place.) 
 
 ©imfonS Starte tag in f einen §aaren. Samsons strength was 
 in his hairs Sffiorin tag feinc iStarfe? Wherein was his strength? 
 Qn feinen ^aaren (dative). @r ftarb an ber @c{)ttinbfu(|t, he 
 died of consumption. SB o r a n ftarb er ? Of what ? In b e r— 
 (dative). Sffioran erfcnnt man ben SCogel'? How do we know the 
 bird ? In f e i n e m ©efange. By its singing. 2ln f e i n e n j^ebern. 
 By its feathers. 2B a n n toinmen ®ie ? When are you coming? 
 Sim 3lbcnb ; (dat.) in the evening. 
 
 367. The accusative follows : when they indicate a motion 
 from one place to another ; or when they answer the question : 
 wo^in ? whither ? thus : i^egcn Sie ba8 Suc^ auf ben Stfrf) ; put 
 the book on the table. 3Bo£)in foB ic^ e« tegen ? Where (whither) 
 shall I put it ? 9luf ben 2:ifcf) (accusative). S)er S!Jiann ging 
 in ben 'i|5arf; the man went into the park. Whither did he 
 go ? in ben ^arf (accusative ; motion from one place to another). 
 
108 PREl'OSITIONS GOVERNING THE DAT. OR ACC. CASE. 
 
 268. If neither of these questions can be asked, nor any 
 rest or motion indicated, the dative is used by all, except : auf 
 and liber, which then take the accusative case. 
 
 369. If any of these prepositions are connected with one of 
 the following verbs : binbett, bind ; le^nen, lean ; feljen, set, seat ; 
 ftU^en, to rely or recline, they take the accusative case. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 370. 
 
 1. 31 n ber 333anb ^iingt ctn 
 fd)one8 ^ilb. 
 
 2. ©tetlen @te bai Stlb an 
 bte SBanb. 
 
 3. Soil id) bag ^ferb an ben 
 SSanm btnben ? 
 
 4. QiS) fel)e Dtele gente auf 
 ber @tra|e. 
 
 5. @c^en @te and) f)inau8 
 auf bte Strafe? 
 
 6. ^c^ ftU^e mt(^ auf bid). 
 
 7. § i n t e r b e m §aufe ftanb 
 ein ^fcrb. 
 
 8. gul)ren @te baS^ferb ^ in= 
 t e r b a « -^aug. 
 
 9. §ter in b t e f c m 3tinmer 
 ftanb er ; bann ging er in ba§ 
 anbere ^immcr. 
 
 10. ^utv\t iaJ3 fie n e b c n m i r, 
 bann fe^tc fie fid) n e b e n i () n. 
 
 11. Sr rootjnt gerabe ii b e r 
 mir. 
 
 12. @ie tamen u b er m i ^. 
 
 13. aStr lai)tm ii b e r i £) n. 
 
 14. ;}d) ftanb t)od) ii b e r ben 
 2Bo(ten ; u n t e r mir bli^te unb 
 bonnerte e«. 
 
 1. On the wall hangs a 
 beautiful picture. 
 
 2. Put the picture against 
 (on) the wall. 
 
 3. Shall I tie the horse to 
 the tree ? 
 
 4. I see many people in the 
 street. 
 
 5. Are you also going out 
 into the street ? 
 
 6. I rely on you. 
 
 7. Behind the house stood 
 a horse. 
 
 8. Lead the horse behind 
 the house. 
 
 9. Here in this room he 
 stood ; then he went into the 
 other room. 
 
 10. First she sat at my side, 
 then she took a seat beside him. 
 
 11. He lives right over me. 
 
 12. They came upon me. 
 
 13. We laughed at him. 
 
 14. I stood high above the 
 clouds ; it lightened and thun- 
 dered below me. 
 
PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 109- 
 
 15. 3i(^ [tetlte mtc^ unterbcn 
 Saum, unb ate id) u u t c r b e m 
 Saume ftanb begann e§ ju regtten. 
 
 16. @te ftanben dor t^rem 
 ©ruber. 
 
 17. @ie tratcn » o r b e n Sontg 
 t)tn. 
 
 18. ®te ftarben » o r ^unger. 
 
 19. 35 r lang e n, long e n 
 Qaijv e n. 
 
 20. @te fa^ 5tt)tfcl)entl}rem 
 25ater unb i ^ r e r SDfutter. 
 
 21. @r fiel 3 ro t f cf) en bte 
 9taber. 
 
 15. I placed myself under 
 the tree, and as I stood under 
 the tree it began to rain. 
 
 16. They stood before their 
 brother. 
 
 17. They stepped before the 
 king. 
 
 18. They died of hunger. 
 
 19. Many, many years ago. 
 
 20. She sat between her 
 father and mother. 
 
 21. He fell between the 
 wheels. 
 
 271. Prepositions governing the accusative case; 
 
 without. 
 
 burc^, through, by. 
 fiir, for. 
 
 gegen, against, towards, to, com- 
 pared to. 
 
 oljne, 
 fonber, 
 
 um, about, 
 miber, against. 
 
 373. QCQCtt has the abbreviated form „ gen " indicating a 
 direction and is mostly used in poetry ; "2Bcnn tc^ g C n §tmmel 
 f(f)aue" when I look heavenward. 
 
 373. Offtie and ^Ott'OCV, both denote want or absence ; but 
 except in the phrases : „fonber ^XOii^tl," without doubt, and 
 „ fonber ®letcf)en," without equal, fonber is only used in poetry. 
 (Discriminate between fonber and " fonbern, but.") 
 
 274. toilet! always denotes opposition, hence it must be 
 distinguished from „gegen" which denotes opposition and also 
 direction. We can for inst. say : SBer nt(f)t fiir mid) tft, ber ift 
 gegen or ftiber mit^. He who is not for me, is against me. 
 Here both gegen and toiber denote opposition, but we cannot 
 say : 2Benn id) „tt) i b e r" ben ^imrnel fc^oue ; when I " against " the 
 heaven look. (Discriminate between „tDiber" against and „tt)ieber" 
 again.) 
 
110 PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 275. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 
 
 . 1. SJSiv retften b u r d) b a 8 
 ganje Sanb. 
 
 2. (gr f)3nd)t b u r cf) b t e 
 ?«afe. 
 
 3. (SS ge^t mtr b u r (^ ' 8 
 §er5. 
 
 4. 3(f) tterbe fur bid) fpre= 
 d)en. 
 
 5. Sonncn Sie nti^ts fur 
 m i d) t^un ? 
 
 6. (5r fc^tDomm gegen ben 
 Strom. 
 
 7. SBaS ^oben -Sie gegen 
 mtc^? 
 
 8. Sr mar fel)r freunbltd) g t- 
 gen mti^. 
 
 9. aBa« finb @te gegen 
 i^n? 
 
 10. Oegenlbenb. 
 
 11. Oegen (gen) Dften. 
 
 12. D^ne betne §Ufe fbn= 
 nen mir ntc^ts t^un. 
 
 13. ©rift o^ne ©telle. 
 
 14. gr fiel ntir u m ben §at«. 
 
 15. (Sinen Stag urn ben an= 
 bent. 
 
 1. We traveled through the 
 whole country. 
 
 2. He speaks through the 
 nose. 
 
 3. It pierces my heart. 
 
 4. I will speak for you. 
 
 5. Can you do nothing for 
 me ? 
 
 6. He swam against the 
 current. 
 
 7. What have you against 
 me ? 
 
 8. He was very kind to me. 
 
 9. What are you compared 
 to him ? 
 
 10. Towards evening. 
 
 11. Eastward. 
 
 12. Without your assistance 
 we can do nothing. 
 
 13. He is without position. 
 
 14. He embraced me, (lit'ly : 
 he fell about my neck). 
 
 15. Every other day. 
 
 376. Compounds of prepositions and other words. 
 
 a. With the definite articles, (see 117). 
 
 b. With nouns : 2ln=xa^lung/ a paying on (account). 3lltf« 
 t)ru(^, a breaking up. Set=fteuer, additional tax. U6er=mut, 
 haughtiness. 
 
 c. With adjectives : l)tnter4ifttg, deceitful ; iiber^Mug, over- 
 
NUMERALS. Ill 
 
 d. With verbs: f. i. with „gel)en" go : an=ge^cn, to approach ; 
 auf^ge'^en, to rise ; aii8=ge^en, to go out ; t)inter=get)en, to deceive ; 
 bur^=ge^en, go through ; mit=ge[)cn, go with ; nacf)=ge^en, go after; 
 entgegen=ge[)en, go to meet ; uber=ge^en, go over ; unter=ge^en, 
 go down ; lim=ge^en, to have intercourse with ; 00r=ge^en ; go on ;■ 
 ju=get)en, walk on. 
 
 e. With adverbs : £)ier=tn, herein ; ^ier^auf, after this ; ^ier= 
 wA, hence, etc. ; [)er=ab, ^inab, down ; (}ev=au«, ^tn=au8, out ; [)er= 
 unter, Ijtnninter, down. 
 
 Note. — The connection with „^er" denotes an approach 
 to the person that speaks ; the connection with „t)tn" an approach 
 toward the second person, thus : Sotnttt t} e r Utlter, come down 
 (to me). -SoU t^ 1} in unter fomnicn? Shall I come down? 
 (to you). 
 
 /. With Prepositions : an»bd, jointly ; »or=an, on before ; 
 Dor=bet, over, by ; Oor=iiber, past, by ; 3U=Bor, before, formerly. 
 
 NUIVIERALS. 3a(>Ht»<»rtcr. 
 
 377, Numerals are : 
 
 a. Definite : etnS, je^n, ^unbert, taufcnb, etc. 
 
 b. Indefinite : etntge, some ; Dtele, many, etc. 
 
 378. The definite Numerals are divided into : 
 
 a. 1 
 1 
 
 einS 
 
 nqien, i..aramais : 
 
 11 elf 21 
 
 etn unb jWansig 
 
 2 
 
 5Wet 
 
 12 smiJif 30 
 
 bretpig 
 
 3 
 
 brei 
 
 13 brctje^n 32 
 
 jmei uitb brei^ig 
 
 4 
 
 Bier 
 
 14 Bterje^n 40 
 
 oterjig 
 
 5 
 
 funf 
 
 15 fiinf5e()n 50 
 
 fiinfjig 
 
 6 
 
 fed)8 
 
 16 Mjelin 60 
 
 feiilStg 
 
 7 
 
 fieben 
 
 17 ftebje^n 70 
 
 fiebjtg 
 
 8 
 
 ad)t 
 
 18 aclitse^n 80 
 
 adjtjig 
 
 9 
 
 neun 
 
 19 neunje^n 90 
 
 neunjig 
 
 10 
 
 5et)n 
 
 20 smonjig lOO 
 
 I)unbert 
 
 1000 
 
 taufenb, 
 
 10,000 je^n taufenb, 1,000,000 eine SOittlion. 
 
 b. £)t;l>ntttt0S3(t^lett, Ordinals : are formed from the 
 
 Cardinals by the 
 
 sufifixes te and fte, thus : 
 
 from 2-19 add te and 
 
 in all higher numbers fte ; einS and bret form irregularly. 
 
112 NUMERALS. 
 
 Examples : evfte, first ; jtDeite second ; brttte, third ; OtertC, 
 fourth ; itl^ntc, tenth ; fiinfse^ntC, fifteenth ; neunjeI)ntC, nine- 
 teenth ; 3roan5igftc, twentieth ; etn unb jiDanjigfte, twenty-first ; 
 ^unbertfte, hundreth ; taitfenbfte, thousandth. 
 
 379. From the cardinals are formed adjectives and 
 adverbs in fac^, fiiltig, erict, boppelt, mat, thus : ehlfatf), single ; 
 oterfac^, oterfalttg, fourfold ; breterlci, of three kinds, oterbo)3pelt, 
 fourfold ; einmal, once ; jWeimat, twice ; bretmal, three times, etc. 
 
 280. From the Ordinals in : en?, ^alb, tel, thus : erftenS, 
 firstly ; jmetten?, secondly, etc.; britt^Ib, two and a half ; btert^alb, 
 three and a half, etc.; brittel, Oiertet, fitnftel, third, fourth, fifth 
 part, etc. 
 
 281. In counting we say: etnS, (jmet, bret, etc.), but if 
 connected with a noun we say : etlt. This ettt must be distin- 
 guished from the indefinite article ettl ; it is always accented : 
 9Jur etn SJiann roar ^ter, but one man was here ; but : etn 9Ji n n 
 roar ^ier, a man was here. 
 
 282. Of all cardinals only Cln has a complete declension, 
 thus : 
 
 Nom. ©ner, m., etne, f., etnea, n., rourbc »erwunbet ; one was 
 
 injured. 
 
 Gen. Setbe roaven etne8 ®ebanfen3, m.; eincr SRcinung, f.; etne» 
 3llter§, n.; both were of one thought ; of one opinion ; of the same 
 age. 
 
 Dat. -3cf) gab etnein, m , etner, f., etnem, n., ettoaS ; I gave one 
 something. 
 
 Ace. 9Jur etnen, m. eine, f., etn8, n., ^abe t^ gefe^en ; only one I 
 have seen. 
 
 283. If preceded by the definite article or a pronoun 
 which is declined in the same manner, it takes the ending of the 
 second declension, thus : 
 
 Nom. ber, biefer etne, the, this "one. 
 
 Gen. beS, jeneS etnett, of the, of that one.. 
 
 Dat. bem, btefem eincn, to the, to this one. 
 
 Ace. ben, jenen etnctt, the, that one. 
 
NUMERALS. 
 
 113 
 
 384. Also ^Wei and J>tCi may be declined, but without 
 regard to gender; thus: 
 
 Nom. 3wet (bret) S?naben, Watijtn ftelen auf bem @tfe ; two, 
 (three) boys, girls fell on the ice. 
 
 Gen. @8 ift bie ajfctnung j teeter (breier) ^erren, jDomen ; it is 
 the opinion of two, (three) gentlemen, ladies. 
 
 Dat. 3weien (breien) §erren tann man ntcf)t ju gleicfier ^e\t 
 btetien. One cannot serve two (three) masters at the same time. 
 
 Ace. S'd) ^o6e jttei (bret) Somen, m., §ptien, f., Srofobttle, n., 
 gefe^en. I have seen, two, (three) lions, hyenas, crocodiles. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 385. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 1. SBte dtel U^r ift e« ? 
 
 2. @0 ift feii)« U^r. 
 
 3. @8 ift fiinf SWinuten mdi) 
 fei^8. 
 
 4.gS ift ein SBtertel auf 
 fieben. 
 
 5. ® ift ^alb fieben. 
 
 6. e« ift bret 3Stertel auf 
 fieben. 
 
 7. ® fe^Ien noc^ je^n SDftnu= 
 ten unb jteanjig ©cfunben 5U 
 jtootf. 
 
 8. Qmi ift ber feiiifte 9Jfonat 
 unb Sejember ber jteiJlfte. 
 
 9. Sec^a ajfonate finb ein 
 ^atbe8 Sai)V. 
 
 10. <Be6)i 3"^ tttacfien einen 
 I)a(ben ?5u6- 
 ] 1 . SBie gro| ift biefe« ^immtx? 
 
 12. g8 ift jteotf gu| unb jetjn 
 3oH long, unb jefin unb einen 
 ^alben gu^ breit. 
 
 13. SBte oft tearen ®ie btefen 
 SBinter im Jtieoter ? 
 
 1. What o'clock is it ? 
 
 2. It is six o'clock. 
 
 3. It is five minutes. 
 
 past 
 
 4. It is a quarter past six. 
 
 5. It is half past six. 
 
 6. It is a quarter to seven. 
 
 7. It lacks ten minutes and 
 twenty seconds of twelve. 
 
 8. June is the sixth month, 
 and December the twelfth. 
 
 9. Six months are half a 
 year. 
 
 10. Six inches make half a 
 foot. 
 
 11. How large is this room? 
 
 12. It is twelve feet and ten 
 inches long, and ten and a half 
 feet wide. 
 
 13. How often were you at 
 the theater this winter' 
 
114 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 14. ^d) glaube se^n= ober ctf= 
 mal. 
 
 15. SBelc^eS Saturn f)ot biefer 
 Srief •? 
 
 16. Sen 18ten (adjtjel^nteii) 
 Qmi, 1890, (at^tje^n ^unbert 
 neunjtg ; ober : ein taufenb ai^t 
 ^unbert unb neunjtg). 
 
 14. I think ten or eleven 
 times. 
 
 15. What date does this letter 
 bear ? 
 
 16. June 18th (the eighteenth) 
 1890, (eighteen hundred and 
 ninety ; or : one thousand eight 
 hundred ninety. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. JBinftetodrtct. 
 
 386. Conjunctions connect either words or sentences. 
 They are : 
 
 a. Copulative. 
 
 aui), also, 
 aulerbem, besides, 
 battn, then. 
 
 baju, jubent, moreover, 
 ferncr, furthermore, 
 niimltd), namely, 
 nun, now, well, 
 unb, and. 
 
 ntd^t adetn . . . fonbern an6), 
 
 nic^t nur. . .fonbern aiu^, 
 
 ntrfit bloS . . . fonbern out^, not 
 
 only. . .but also, 
 fo, then. 
 
 felbft, fogor, even. 
 foroo^I. . .ots (au(^), both. . . 
 
 and. 
 
 d. Adversative : 
 
 ober, aCcin, fonbern, but. 
 
 auper, auSgenommen, except, 
 save. 
 
 bagegen, ^ingegen, on the con- 
 trary. 
 
 bO(^, yet. 
 
 bennO(f), nevertheless, 
 entfteber . . . ober, either ... or. 
 nur, only. 
 
 c. Causal: 
 
 alfo, bemnod), folgtitf), mit^tn, 
 fomtt, consequently. 
 
 jeboc^, inbeffen, gtetc^mo^t, how- 
 ever, 
 ober, or. 
 fonft, else. 
 otelmeljr, rather. 
 Weber. . noi^, neither. . .nor. 
 
 menn, if. 
 
 iDofern, in case that, if, pro- 
 vided. 
 
 boljer, barum, bes^alb, beSmegen, 
 
 therefore. 
 
 benn, metl; because. 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 d. Subordinate : 
 
 ate, as, than. 
 
 atS ob, ate wenn, as if. 
 
 auf bap, fo ba|, bamit, in order 
 
 that. 
 ba|, bamtt, that. 
 ba| ntdjt, bamit nt(f)t, lest. 
 ot)ne ba|, withxiut (that), 
 bis, until. 
 
 beoor, e^e, before, ere. 
 ba, when, as. 
 cb, if, whether, 
 obgleic^, toennglciii), 
 
 mennfd)on, obttiof)(, 
 
 though, although, 
 fads, in case. 
 
 obfif)on, 
 toiemo^t, 
 
 1J5 
 
 .um fo, 
 
 ie...je, ie. ..befto, je. 
 
 the. . .the. 
 je nacf)bent, according as. 
 feit, since, 
 fcitbetn, since then, 
 fobotb, as soon as. 
 fo (atige ate, as long as. 
 um, in order, to. 
 
 tjorauggefeljt bafe..., provided 
 
 that. . . 
 wa^renb, inbem, while. 
 tt)ie, as. 
 hjenn, if. 
 wofern, if. 
 wofern ntiJ)t, unless. 
 
 287. 21 He in, but; au^er, auSgenommen, except ; b enn, 
 for; enttteber. .ober, either, .or; [onbem, but; unb, and; 
 always stand at the head of the clause, without changing the order. 
 ' 288. a\»tX, attein, but. Slber may always be used instead 
 of all e in, but not vice versa. 3ltletn contains merely an 
 objection to the first clause ; ab e f also refers to another subject. 
 Example : Stnna tft fi)on, a b e r ifire @cE|Wefter (abet) tft ^a^tic^ ; 
 Anna is beautiful, but her sister is homely. (In this sentence we 
 cannot say aflctn) ; but : 2lnna tft ntd)t ft^on, a 1 1 e i n (a b e r) fie tft 
 ItebenStniirbig ; Anna is not beautiful, but she is amiable. 
 
 289. SOttJCtIt but, is always preceded by a negation, the 
 second clause correcting the first, thus : ^&j f)abe nic^t b t (J) bamit 
 gemetnt, f o nb e rn beinen ^ruber ; I did not mean you by it, but 
 your brother. Sari !^at es nii^t gett)an, f o n b e r n §etnri(f) ; 
 
 Charles has not done it, but Henry. 
 
 290. ^tt(^ also, is connective and concessive. In the latter 
 application it is preceded by ' ttienn ' and has the meaning of 
 'although ': -3d) ttetbe eS fiir i^n t^un, ftenn ereS auc^ nt(J)t t)cr= 
 btent ; I shall do it for him, although he does not deserve it. 
 
 291. ®cntt for, has no reference to time and must not be 
 confounded with the adverb 'bann then.' jDenn has also the 
 
 meaning of 'auSgeuommen except, unless ': ^^ werbe nti^t fommen 
 eg fet benn, ba|. .. .1 shall not come, (unless) except that. .. . 
 
116 
 
 READING EXERCISES. 
 
 392. ttltl combined with Jtt preceding the infinitive mode, 
 denotes intention : Qd) gel^e in bie @(f)ule, utn ju I e r n e n ; I go to 
 school (in order) to learn. Ulll is always placed before a number 
 denoting time : Kommeit Sie um 6 Ul^r ; come at 6 o'clock. 
 
 READING EXERCISES. 
 Various kinds of Conjunctions. 
 
 393. COPULATIVE 
 
 1. SBtele 1)iditer tnaren t)er= 
 fammett, a u tf) ®ott)e tear bo. 
 
 2. Srft arbette, b a n n ru^e. 
 
 3. aBirmuffen®ottfott)o£)I 
 ftoba^Sbfe, a 18 aud) fUr ba8 
 ©ute loben. 
 
 4. (Sr ift ti t ^ t n u r retcE), 
 fonbern and) fel)r gele^rt. 
 
 5. 2t(Ie bebauerten fetn Sd)t(I« 
 fal, [ e t b ft fetnc getnbe. 
 
 6. ©age mtr mit mem bu um= 
 ge^ft, f milt id) btr I'agen luer bu 
 bift. 
 
 7. Sr fatibte mir ju meinem 
 @eburt«tage einen pracf)tBolIen 
 Slumenftraul ; turner einen 
 ating mit ben fi^iinften 'iperlen be= 
 fe^t, unb einen •SJricf BoK ^er3= 
 Kd^fter ©lucfnjunfdie. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 1. Many poets were assem- 
 bled, a/so Goethe was there. 
 
 2. First work, iAen rest. 
 
 3. We must praise God for 
 the evil, as well as for the 
 good. 
 
 4. He is not only rich, but 
 also very learned. 
 
 5. All pitied his fate, even 
 his enemies. 
 
 6. Tell me with whom thou 
 hast intercourse, and (then) 1 
 will tell thee, who thou art. 
 
 7. He sent me for my birth- 
 day a beautiful bouquet ; fur- 
 thermore a ring set with the 
 finest pearls, and a letter full of 
 heartiest congratulations. 
 
 294. 
 
 ADVERSATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 1. g8 ift leidit gefogt, aber 
 f(f)tter get^an. 
 
 2. Sffio^I befil^t er aSermCgen, 
 oUein er ttei| tetnen guten 
 ©ebraud) bacon ju mac^en. 
 
 3. ®evn mt)ci)te xd, eS filr bicE) 
 tf)un, bod} bin id) e« nid)t im 
 ftanbe. 
 
 1. It is easily said, but diffi- 
 cult to be done. 
 
 2. It is true he possesses 
 wealth, but he does not know 
 how to make good use of it. 
 
 3. Gladly would I do it for 
 you, but I am not able to do 
 so. 
 
VARIOUS KINDS OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 117 
 
 4. 3{)r Sotjn macfit i^r tetne 
 f^reube, b e n n o (^ (iebt fie t^n 
 
 5. 3Ute waren getommen, n u r 
 er nit^t. 
 
 6. (Silcn @ie, f o it ft tommcti 
 ®te ju \\>at 
 
 7. ^d) bcfe^te nt(^t, f o n b e rn 
 ic^ miinfiJje nur. 
 
 8. jDte ^ufloogel jtetjen tm 
 §erbfte in iDormere Sanber, ie= 
 i) c^ im f^riil^tinge t'efiren [ie mte= 
 ber 5U unS juriicf. 
 
 9. -3ifl iDoUte geftern abenb 
 ill's jT^eater ge^cn, i n b e f f e n 
 regnete e« fo fe^r, ba| id) Bor3og 
 3U §aufe ju bleiben. 
 
 10. SOBiin[(^en Sic 2Betn o b e r ' 
 48ier? 
 
 11. Q6) gefie e ii t nj e b e r nad) 
 ber ©(^weij o b e r nad) Otolien. 
 
 12. aBeld)cS fd)()ne §au3 Ijat 
 w e b e r §015 nod) Stein ? 
 
 13. jDag tteine @(^neifen§an6 
 f)at tt) e b e r ^otj n (^ Stein. 
 
 14. !Du fottft beinen 3Jeben» 
 ntenfd)en nid)t ^affen, b i e I m e ^ r 
 i^n lieben mie bii^ felbft. 
 
 15. (5r ucrfprac^, nie toieber 
 bortl)in 5U ge^en, b e n n d) ging 
 er [d)on am nad)ften STage wieber 
 :^in. 
 
 16. S)u follft eine fdjone Uf)r 
 Beforamen, w f e r n bu bein @ya= 
 men befte£)ft. 
 
 4. Her son gives her no joy, 
 _)r/ she loves him greatly. 
 
 5. All had come, dui he. 
 
 6. Hurry, e/se you will be 
 too late. 
 
 7. I do not command, dui 
 I (only) wish. 
 
 8. The birds of passage 
 move into warmer lands in au- 
 tumn, however in the spring 
 they return to us. 
 
 ■ 9. I intended to go to the 
 theater last night, but it rained 
 so hard, that I preferred to stay 
 at home. 
 
 10. Do you wish wine or 
 beer ? 
 
 11. I go «M^r to Switzerland 
 or to Italy. 
 
 12. What beautiful houss has 
 neither wood n6r stone ? 
 
 13. The little snail-shell (lit- 
 I'y : snail-house) has neither 
 wood nor stone. 
 
 14. Thou shall not hate thy 
 fellowman, but rather love him 
 as thyself. 
 
 15. He promised, never to go 
 there again, nevertheless he 
 went there again the very next 
 day. 
 
 16. You shall have .a nice 
 watch, provided you pass your 
 examination. 
 
118 
 395. 
 
 READING EXERCISES. 
 
 CAUSAL CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 1. ^6) bente, iinb mttf)tn fo 
 bin i^. 
 
 2. 2Ba()renb ber 9Ja(^t tear 
 ttefcr @(f)nee gefatlen, b e m ti a (^ 
 »Dar an cin ^ortfeljen ber 9tetfc 
 ntd)t ju benten. 
 
 3. 34) tonnte fchicn 2Bogen 
 befomraen, alfo mupc id) ben 
 SSeij p ?5n| moi^en. 
 
 4. iUJein j^reunb ift fetjr trait= 
 rig, b e n n fein liinb ift fattier 
 er!ran!t. 
 
 5. Qm Syinter gefdert ba0 
 aSaffer, id e i I bie Salte boS 2Baf= 
 fer jufammenjief)!. 
 
 6. ®ott fie^t bid) SinD, brum 
 (barnm) fd)eu bie Siinb. 
 
 396. 
 
 1. I think, and therefore 1 
 .exist. 
 
 2. Deep snow had fallen 
 during the night, consequently 
 we could not think of continu- 
 ing the journey. 
 
 3. I could get no wagon, 
 therefore I had to go on foot. 
 
 4. My friend is very sorrow- 
 ful, y"i?r his child is dangerously 
 ill. 
 
 5. The water freezes in 
 winter, because the cold con- 
 tracts the water. 
 
 6. God sees thee child, there- 
 fore shun the sin. 
 
 SUBORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 1 . Seff er arm in @^ren, a I « 
 reii^ in ©c^anbc. . 
 
 2. 3d) tiebe it)n ju fe^r, al8 
 b a I ic^ i^m jiirnen follte. 
 
 3. 3ft e« bo^, a IS o b in 
 meiner @eel' er lefe ! (Ceffing). 
 
 4. (58 fc^ien mir, a 1 8 w e n n 
 er barufaer beleibigt mare. 
 
 5. ®u lad)ft, ba bu bo^ 
 %\fttmv. tiergiepen foUteft. 
 
 6. 3^ Weil nidit, o b id) fom= 
 men fann. 
 
 7. 3d) liebe i^n, obgleic^ 
 ii^ weip,' bat ^"^ ^ ^ "'"ft* oerbient. 
 
 8. Sr ift 5U aufgeMrt, nm 
 an ©ef^enfter ju gtauben. 
 
 9. %xi aSater unb abutter, 
 auf ba| (bamit) bu langc 
 lebeft. 
 
 1. Better poor in honor, 
 than rich in shame. 
 
 2. I love him too much, [that 
 I should) to be angry with him. 
 
 3. Indeed it is, as if in my 
 soul he were reading ! 
 
 4. It seemed to me, as if\\Q 
 were insulted at it. 
 
 5. You laugh, where you 
 ought to shed tears. 
 
 6. I know not whether I can 
 come. 
 
 7. Ilovehim, a/MiJz/g'^Iknow 
 {that) he does not deserve it. 
 
 8. He is too enlightened, A> 
 believe in ghosts. 
 
 9. Honor father and mother 
 in order that that thou mayest 
 live long. 
 
INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 119 
 
 10. Silt ^etm mtt forgenfaer 
 @ee(e, b a m 1 1 er bie grift n 1 1^ t 
 oerfe^Ie. (@c£)t(Ier.) 
 
 11. 25ev ft'ntg gel)t fo lauge p 
 iBaffci-, bis er brid)t. (Prov.) 
 
 12. 3 e longer, j e Iteber. 
 
 13. 3 e longer ic^ i^n fenne, 
 b e ft me^r mu| id) i^n ad)ten. 
 
 14. ©n ®ema(be ift um fo 
 bettiunbernsmerter, j e me^r eS ber 
 Siatur gletct)t. 
 
 15. ®u toirft entmeber gelobt 
 ober getabelt, j e n a cf) b e m bu eg 
 oerbienft. 
 
 16. @r rcifte ob, o^ne b a| 
 (J) e8 wu^te. 
 
 17. 2Bir wotten inorgen einen 
 SluSpug mad)en, oorouSgefe^t 
 ba| ba§i ^Better giinftig ift. 
 
 10. (He) hastens home with 
 anxious soul, /est he should miss 
 the appointed time. 
 
 11. The pitcher goes so often 
 to the well, unti7 it brakes. 
 
 12. TAe longer, iAe better. 
 
 13. T/te longer I know him, 
 fAe more 1 must esteem him. 
 
 14. A picture is tAe more ad- 
 mirable, t^e more it resembles 
 nature. 
 
 15. You will be either praised 
 or blamed, according as you de- 
 serve it. 
 
 16. He departed, without that 
 I knew it. 
 
 17. We will take a trip to- 
 morrow, provided {that) the 
 weather is favorable. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. ettt^JfittittttfiStootrtct, 
 
 297. Interjections may be divided into : 
 
 a. Those which give expression to our emotions, viz : 
 
 1. Expressions of joy: o^! a^o! o! ^et|a! jui^! juc^tie ! 
 ^urra:^ ! 
 
 2. Of, pain, sorrow and pi ty : ol) ! od) ! ou ! o h)e!^ ! au 
 ttet)! we^e! 
 
 3. Of fear and abhorrence : ^n ! ^u^ ! brr ! pfui ! 
 
 4. Of astonishment : a^ ! et ! t§ ! ^m ! ^o ! ^um ! fapperment ! 
 po^taufenb ! 
 
 5. Of contempt : ^a^ ! 
 
 b. Those by which we try to imitate a sound, motion or action: 
 
 6tm=bom, sound of a bell. 
 bltnt=buin, sound of a canon. 
 piff=)3aff, sound of a gun. 
 pttfc^<)3atfc^, whick, whack ! 
 
 bums, bounce ! 
 
 |3erbu^, slap ! 
 
 ^Op^ ! ^0}3))fa ! hop ! 
 
 t)Uf(^ ! pop ! 
 
 to|)}3 ! agreed ! 
 
 gelt ? is it not so ? truly ! 
 
120 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 c. Those of call : ^e ! ^eba ! ^oHa ! ha ! ho ! hello ! ho there ! 
 I)atIo^ ! call of hunters. 
 
 p ! ^Ott ! get up (to a horse), 
 fc^! ft! bft! \?\\\ silence. 
 
 398. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS 
 (From Lcssing's "ffiat^an.") 
 
 1. 31 d^, metn aSatet ! Ia|t, la^t 
 Sure SReiia, bo^ ntc tuieberum 
 otiein. 
 
 2. ^o! baS, boa tft mcine 
 ©d^weftcr ! 
 
 3. 31 cf) ! ad)! ^Im. |dt)Iagft 
 bu meine ?5rcubigfeit auf einmat 
 luieber nteber. 
 
 4. @t, ©aja! SBarum Ware 
 benn ba8 fo unglaublid) ? 
 
 5. @t! fo mag'a bo^ gar fo 
 f^Ie^t mtt i^m nic^t fteficn. 
 
 6. §m 1 id) bin bo^ aber au(| 
 fet)r argerlid). 
 
 7. D, of) ! Sd) meil, bcr ^err 
 ^at ®nabe (ge)funben oor @ala= 
 bin! 
 
 8. m. ! S>oft. 6ft ! ai'^aft, 
 bft! 
 
 (From Schiller's 
 
 9. §a! Sart, nun erfenn i^ 
 btc^ toieber I 
 
 10. O, 3lmalia! mie Iteb' tc^ 
 bi^ uin biefer unerf(^iitterli(f)en 
 Slrcue gegen mcinen 53ruber. 
 
 11. ^fui! ^fui! ®a8 ift 
 fd)(inbU(| ! 
 
 12. SBef), we^, \o\\),\ Wvc 
 finb gcfangen, gercibert, roir finb 
 gesierteilt ! 
 
 1. Ah, my father ! leave, 
 leave your Recha never again 
 alone. 
 
 2. Ha ! this, this is my 
 sister I 
 
 3. Ah ! ah ! now thou dis- 
 couragest me again at once. 
 
 4. Ay, Daya ! Why should 
 this be so incredible ? 
 
 5. Ay I He may not be so 
 bad off after all. 
 
 6. Hm I I must say, I am 
 very angry I 
 
 7. O, oh ! I know the Gen- 
 tleman has found favor before 
 Saladin ! 
 
 8. Hush ! Hafi, hush ! Al- 
 Hafi, hush ! 
 
 " ©ie SRJuSet.") 
 
 9. Ha I Charles, now I know 
 thee again ! 
 
 10. O, Amelia ! How I love 
 thee for this unswerving faith- 
 fullness towards my brother. 
 
 11. Fye I fye 1 this is shame- 
 ful! 
 
 12. Woe, woe, woe I We are 
 caught, broken on the wheel, 
 we are quartered ! 
 
INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 121 
 
 13. 9ial5man ! tcft vtecfie '$u(oer. 
 9}.: @a)3)3erment! id) riei^'8 
 aud) fi^on tonge. 
 
 (Frcm Schiller' 
 
 14. ®elt! ev ()at'S fc£)lau gc= 
 mad)t ! 
 
 15. ®elt, %kito\ aStr jwei 
 ttotlen ®enua 3ufaramen[c^met§cn. 
 
 16. § e! man foti SBeiit bringen. 
 
 17. ^o^taufenb! !Cte So= 
 mobie toirb treilii^ wol)! angelien 
 milffen. 
 
 18. § e! ^ Ila! toad) auf, 
 SDorta ! Berrotcner, nerfoufter 
 Soda. 
 
 19. 5 urn ! 3fft benn etoa bte 
 gret^eit in bcr SD'Jobe gefunfen ? 
 
 (From Goethe's 
 
 20. 
 
 D, bu Sluggeburt ber 
 ^me ! 
 ®oH baS gan5e §aug erfau= 
 
 fen? 
 21. aBe^e, njet)e! 
 Seibe Setie, 
 Ste^n in Site, 
 @c^on ate Snecf)te, 
 93t)IIig fertig in bie §o()e ! 
 §etft mir, ac^ ! if)r fjoljen 3JZaii)te ! 
 
 13. Ratzman ! I smell pow- 
 der. R.: Odds bobs! I also 
 
 sraelled it for some time. 
 s " gieScD.") 
 
 14. Truly ! He has made it 
 cunningly. 
 
 15. Truly, Fiesco ! We two 
 will throw Genoa into a heap. 
 
 16. Ho ! Let them bring wine. 
 
 17. Odds bobs ! Indeed the 
 comedy will have to commence. 
 
 18. Ho ! Hello ! wake up 
 Doria ! betrayed, sold Doria. 
 
 19. Hum ! Has liberty per- 
 haps become unfashionable ? 
 SouSftteljrItng.") 
 
 20. O, thou production of 
 
 hell. 
 Shall the whole house be drown- 
 ed ? 
 
 21. Woe ! woe ! 
 Both parts. 
 Rise in haste. 
 
 Already as servants, 
 Completely finished, upright ! 
 Help me, ah ! ye exalted powers! 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 299. A thought expressed either orally or in writing is a 
 sentence. There are : 
 
 1. Elliptic (incomplete) sentences : @uten 3;ag ; good day. 
 §eretn ! come in ! 
 
 2. Simple sentences, containing only subject and predi- 
 cate : @o(b gtcinst ; gold glitters. ®cr §unb beflt ; the dog barks. 
 Ser 33ater ift gut; the father is good. ■ 
 
 3. Enlarged sentences, when subject or predicate are 
 modified : jDer flcine Snabe fdiretbt gut ; the little boy writes well. 
 
122 SYNTAX. 
 
 4. Compound sentences : Der Se^rer le^rt unb ber ©(filler 
 lernt ; the teacher teaches and the pupil learns. 
 
 300. A sentence may contain : 
 
 1. A narration : Sin Wtaxitt tft ertntnten ; A man is drovyned. 
 , 2. An opinion : ®iefe8 §au8 tft fef)r fc^iJtl ; This house is very- 
 beautiful. 
 
 3. An assertion : 2Ber tttii)t ^iJreil Will, mu^ fii^Ien ; He who 
 will not hear, must suffer. 
 
 4. A desire : ^i) moi)ti gern eine U[)r ^aben ; I would like to 
 have a watch. 
 
 5. A request : Sitte, fageti Sie mir, Wic Diet Uf)r e§ tft ; Please, 
 tell me what time it is. 
 
 6. A prayer : D, rii^re mcin fleineS 3(eft nti)t an ! Oh, don't 
 touch my little nest ! 
 
 7. An advice : DJfai^en @ie eine 9{etfe inei ©ebtrge, bo8 mtrb 
 S^mn gut tt)Un ; Take a trip to the mountains, that will do you 
 good. 
 
 8. An admonition : iUicin So^n, ttienn Siinber bi(^ oerlocfen, 
 WtlOge nt(f)t ein ; My son, if sinners entice thee, consent thou not. 
 
 9. An invitation : Kommcn Ste ^eute obenb 5U mtr ; Come to 
 me this evening. 
 
 10. An encouragement : ©tubtere ftci^tg, fo tttrft bu fii^erltd) t)er= 
 fe^t tuerben ; Study diligently and you will certainly be promoted. 
 
 11. A promise : Qd) Werbe e8 ntc mteber t^un. I shall never do 
 it again. 
 
 12. A question : 3Bte beftnben Sie fid)? How do you do ? 
 
 13. A command : Seme beine Slufgaben ! Leam your lessons ! 
 @;itele ntcl)t Sail ! Don't play ball ! 
 
 14. An exclamation : O, toie fd)on ! Oh, how beautiful ! SBeI(i> 
 etn 2ftenf(^ ! What a man ! 
 
 301. The subject can be a noun or any substitute thereof ; 
 it always has the nominative case : jDer § U n b bettt ; the dog 
 barks. S r ift flet|tg ; he is diligent. 9? t em an b tarn ; nobody 
 came. ^o(i)en tft eine Slrbett; cooking is a work. @riin tft 
 eine ^axbt ; green is a color, etc. 
 
 302. The predicate is expressed : 
 
 a. By a verb, either active or passive : bie ^HJuttcr I i e b t . The 
 mother loves. !Da« Sinb IDirb g e 1 1 e b t. The child is loved. 
 
SYNTAX. 123 
 
 b. By an adjective with auxiliary verb : ©aS ®ra8 ift g riin ; 
 the grass is green. 
 
 c. By a noun with auxiliary verb: Scrttja ift etn 9famc; 
 Bertha is a name. OttO IDar metn greunb; Otto was my 
 friend. 
 
 303. The subject can be : 
 
 a. In the singular or plural: !©cr 33ogel fingt ; the bird 
 sings. ®te 33bgel fitigeti f the birds sing. 
 
 b. In three different persons : tc^ finge, bu ftngft, er fingt ; I 
 sing, you sing, he sings. 
 
 304. The predicate can be : 
 
 a. In the singular or plural : id) finge, I sing ; lt)ir fing e n, we 
 sing. 
 
 b. In the present, past or future tense : il^ finge, i(^ fang, ic^ 
 roerbe fingcn ; I sing, I sang, I shall sing. 
 
 c. In the indicative, subjunctive or imperative mode : 
 
 Indie: 3Der 35iener !am, the servant came. 
 Subj.: 5)er ©iener fame, the servant might come. 
 Imp.: Ser Siener fomme ! The servant shall come ! 
 
 305. Subject and predicate always agree in person and 
 number : v&j ge^e, I go ; bu ge^ft, thou goest ; fie ge^t, she goes ; 
 
 mir ge'^en, we go. 
 
 306. Two or more subjects require the plural of the 
 predicate : ©er Sfnabe unb ba8 aWabdien fpiel e n (not f^Jielt) ; the 
 boy and the girl play. $unb unb Sa^e jcim^jf C n (not t'ampft) \ 
 dog and cat fight. 
 
 307. The subject can be modified : 
 
 a. By an adjective : !S)er g U t e SSater f^Iaft ; the good father 
 is sleeping. 
 
 b. By a noun in the nominative case : ^ r f e f f r 33ir(f)Ott3 ift 
 gefc^eit ; Professor Virchow is smart. 
 
 c. By a noun in the genitive case : ®er §Unb be§®artner& 
 bei^ ; the dog of the gardener bites. 
 
 d. By a noun with preposition : §iiufer D n |) 1 J finb ttarm ; 
 houses of wood art warm. 
 
 e. By a pronoun : ©iefcr SWobe fdjreibt ; this boy is writing. 
 /. By a numeral : @ e C^ 8 ©cr finb yiXhmijtn ; six eggs are 
 
 broken. 
 
124 SYNTAX. 
 
 g. By a verb in the infinitive: ©ie 8uft JU leben ift gro| ; 
 the desire io live is great. . 
 
 h. By an adverb : !Cte Sterne ba brobeit f^immern ; the 
 stars on high glitter. 
 
 308. The predicate being a noun can be modified almost 
 in the same way as the subject : ©er Soloe ift etlt It) t lb eg %ltX ; 
 the lion is a wi/d a.nima.1. jDcv Some tft eitt Zkv ber SBiifte; 
 the lion is an animal of the. desert ; etc. 
 
 309. The predicate being a verb can be modified : 
 
 a. By a noun in the accusative case — Object : ©er Rnobi 
 fdjretbt einen Srief ; the boy writes a letter. 
 
 d. By a noun or personal pronoun in the dative, or preceded 
 by the preposition ' fiir ' in the accusative case — Terminative : ©er 
 3Sater fauft bent @o!^ne (t^m) or : fiir ben ©o^n (fiir ttjn) ein 
 S8vi6). The father buys (to) the son (him), or : for the son (for 
 him) a book. 
 
 e. By a noun or pronoun in the genitive case : S)er Snabe 
 gebcnft fetnerSUf utter (t^rer). The boy remembers his mother 
 (her). 
 
 d. By a* verb in the infinitive : Q(i) ^df t^m f cf)reiben; I 
 helped him to write. 
 
 e. By an adverb of place, time, mode or cause : ©er 33oget 
 fliegt ^ d) ; the bird flies high. 3d) tomme a b e n b § ; I come in 
 the evening. 5)er SWann arbettet fd)mer; the man works hard. 
 2Der UJJann arbettet, um reid) ju tterben; the man works in 
 order to become rich. 
 
 310. The predicate being an adjective can be modified: 
 
 a. By a noun or pronoun in the genitive case : (5r tft b e 8 
 @ el be 8 (begfelben) benotigt; he is in need of money (of it). 
 
 b. By a noun or pronoun in the dative case : Sr ift f C i n e m 
 $ errn (t^m) treu ; he is faithful to hig master (to him). 
 
 c. By a noun in the accusative case : !Da3 Srett tft etnen 
 3 1 1 bid ; the board is one inch thick. 
 
 (/. By an adverb of time, place or mode : ®ei" 3JJenf(^ tft 
 abenbg mitber al8 m org en 8; man is more tired in the 
 evening than in the morning. ®er 9Jiann tft 1^ i e r beltebt ; 
 the man is popular here. 35er SDiann tft f e ^ r gelel)rt ; the man 
 is very learned. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 125 
 
 CM 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 <: 
 
 a. 
 
 
 
 
 O jS 
 
 onnen 
 
 orgen 
 orften 
 
 
 
 ■< 
 
 >S 
 
 
 
 aw3.o J3 
 
 
 (u 
 
 a> 
 
 
 
 o a> 
 
 Ci &> u &> 
 
 
 a>&>a>&>&>&>a^&*Q>a> 
 
 OS 
 
 
 
 iO>E> 
 
 ^» C33 C3 C3 
 
 
 ■vOvO CS5CnC35<3:c33cnC35C33 
 
 1^ 
 
 &> 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 
 sO 
 
 
 
 vis >0 
 
 vO vO 'J3 >£> 
 
 
 s£3sO>0^0iQv0sO>Ov£:>^0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 &1 &> 
 
 
 u 
 
 1 
 
 «> 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 D 
 
 cs 
 
 
 
 tW 6> 
 
 Cl* .^r;c3 :CS 
 
 
 <u ■ a< :0 :0 :C3 :e '^ "^ a> i- 
 
 »» 
 
 
 
 J3 J3 
 
 vE>>0 J3 vO 
 
 
 >C3 ■, T*^ ^3 ^S ^3 ^^^ ^3 ^S lCj"* j^ 
 
 « 
 H 
 
 
 g- 
 
 
 
 g-g- 
 
 rS'.^.^S' 
 
 
 g^_^g'_'^_^g'g^^g ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 CL< 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 aj 
 
 S 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 
 
 >o 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 tJ ^ 
 
 
 !-» 
 
 
 < 
 U 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 <u u 
 
 ft>.tr (3 o 
 
 
 t» «L> o o ci o w ■^^ "S 
 
 
 2 
 
 J3 
 
 
 
 J3 J3 
 
 jajSiOiO 
 
 
 
 
 S" 
 
 
 
 g'g" 
 
 S'S'S'S" 
 
 
 S'S'S'S'S'S'S'S'S S' 
 
 
 ,-~. 
 
 
 
 _j_j 
 
 
 
 +^ -•-*■ 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 
 ._ 
 
 
 £ 2 
 
 > 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <! 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 g 
 
 ?5 
 U 
 to 
 
 t 
 
 JO 
 
 
 d ti 3 
 
 -^ ^ r=^ 
 
 g 
 
 ii d w .«~-5 
 
 ^ "t; d „-ii da-^i- 
 
 
 a 
 
 iO JO 
 
 4) 1/ 
 
 
 «> Q> a> &> 
 
 0) ii"5S.Si.Si.£Sww** « 
 
 
 tO 
 
 (/I 
 
 en 
 
 rfJvO 
 
 >0 »0 sO vO 
 
 en 
 
 J^>Oi»>QJOiOiOJ3i»>.— £ 
 
 
 «- 
 
 
 
 ^!§" 
 
 ^^^^ 
 
 
 *H'*S"^^^^'S'^ ij" >H" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .<^ ..,-4 .«^ -t^ 
 
 
 •^- -«-• -^- '*.» »•-• •^^ .^^ •^^ «> .t-* 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 >-, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 '2 o- 
 
 
 4-t 
 
 
 
 
 
 lU 
 
 |. 
 
 S2 
 o ^ 
 "iff 
 
 
 o 
 
 V rt 
 
 > 
 
 s 
 
 la 
 
 1) 
 
 ■5 
 a 
 o 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 '5 
 
 U 
 
 o 
 
 'So 
 
 "o 
 o 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 4-1 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 «222jriie^-2 o2 o2^':2 
 
 S « « g s s |«« « g tt « 2|« 
 
 
 <: 
 
 «» 
 
 «< 
 
 «> <* c 
 
 «»«««»«> 
 
 «» 
 
 O «» «».».— .M .^ «»» « M 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^^^^^ 
 
 ^1R^^1^^^^^tR^^(^'^^^ 
 
 
126 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 
 
 «> ri -•-» _ ^^ . ^. 
 " « ts'g B ^ ^ 
 
 S-» C3 S M 
 . . . JS ,« Xi jO _ 
 
 &> (L> ^> t> (U &) <u ^1^ 
 CA C3 C53 Cn C53 O CS3 C53 
 
 o ^ 
 
 < . 
 
 *5 <33 4i ti i_C3^ «3 
 
 S-* S^ W* o> -^Z S-) ^ 
 sO ^A sO .£> JO JO JO 
 
 35- 
 
 s 
 
 
 V 
 "i-» 
 «- 
 
 s55^ 2 vC?*-*-* tS. «3 ii -*-• '^— 
 
 :C3 Qj :a t3 cs :0 :a W ti^ 
 
 S-. t^ S :C3 .5 ti B :S H 
 
 kO vO >0 JO JO JO JO JO u 
 
 ■.a 
 ■■3 
 
 
 »> <!> 
 
 S '^is -Si 
 
 &> :C3 n t i 
 
 C5 
 
 T3 — ■ ■ 
 
 ^O ^n iS^ JO JO JO JO JO eL> 
 
 o "iT 
 
 CO 
 
 «- 
 
 «- 
 
 «- 
 
 «- 
 
 s 
 
 
 -^ ;-» *^ 
 
 
 ^ -fi 
 
 ■J) o 
 
 JO 
 
 ^H 
 
 
 ■ OJ 
 
 
 
 ^ ;-» tj &> 
 
 ^— ^™ ^^ U« -^rf ft ft •—» 
 
 vOvO>£:>.X>.A.OjO.^> 
 
 c/3 A- (A u] i/i en t^— in 
 
 :« ^ r^ 
 
 o S JO ^ 
 
 t< >^ e B e 
 ^ „ <" " "-• ^u- 
 
 Ji " ^ 
 
 
 bO 
 
 h e 
 
 o ■" 
 
 •" o 
 
 »* S 
 SP6^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 o O 
 
 ■♦-» r. 
 
 
 & 
 
 o 
 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 3.SP 
 
 T3 
 C 
 
 O ft"" 
 en CLi U 
 
 iL- en 
 
 e 
 o 
 u 
 
 Silas's 
 
 S V ?* M U H '^ 
 
 q o 
 
 "a. 1 
 
 13 _ ci 
 
 2 8 ■" o 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 127 
 
 -"JO £; «> " ,Si..Si- ?j M S t! 
 tg-'g tCi-5r->iz-5=-i>— ig- oijs as 
 
 <3i CA G3 cn en CS3 C33 C33 C33 ^3 03 
 
 «5-ggs^tt^gSsgsS 
 
 .a^ § g'S's-oS^-g oS~3 
 
 JO M — CSi-^ C33 n G t-» ii=- C C35 CS CSi C55 
 
 CSS C33 €35 C33 03 C33 C33 C33 CSi 03 C33 C33 C3D CJ3 
 
 &* Q> &^ 
 
 rr ill «-» 
 
 sT?--^ t3 «a «J t> '£*■ Si ^S^J3 ^ 
 TJ 55 -«-* -«-• -fcrf .«— • 'Tz t^ :0 ft> ^ 
 
 ^cy 
 
 
 
 
 
 &> 
 
 d 6i 
 
 
 cs 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 JO 
 
 XT' 
 
 
 
 ct 
 
 Pt 
 
 ;-4 
 
 OJ 
 
 &> 
 
 &> 
 
 &> 
 
 
 eb> 
 
 
 6J 
 
 CI>«JC33CSJCS3cnC33C53 
 
 H *" H 
 
 ■J* 6i a> &^ ,J2 
 
 csa'Si en C33 en 
 
 til-M — JEi_Gr-J3i_5:li£^.g_ cj en cs3 
 
 .r^ 6i 
 
 
 S 
 
 i=^ -" rS 
 
 •C- K O^S != .. ~ - 
 
 _ CJ .*- ti JC3 U Cb> 6J ^J^ &> -O ^j s , 
 
 <Si en CS3_Q C33 a? CS^ ess ^^ C33 S3 C53 C33 03 
 
 
 o o o o 
 
 t^ n :« « 
 
 
 ^£J 
 
 
 
 C33 C33 03 (-S C3 C33 C3 C33 q3 ^3 CJ3 03 C53 CS3 
 
 
 o 
 CO 
 
 t^ CS3 
 
 5ti^-§ <u55a; '".3S 
 
 . V rf- >- ^ >^.fi- ai.fcL <33 03 03 aJ 
 
 03 
 
 -t-J a 
 
 "U-O (J 
 
 *S '^ &>■ 
 
 . . -u CSS 
 
 03 ^- "" 
 
 t£D. 
 
 "03 
 
 ^ w &> (U a> ^Tr o .23 w w ^ 
 03«303C30353O30303O303 
 
 >s~*S'-S'^'S"^-s~-e''S~>e''B" ^s^^H"^ <«> -©■■ff-s'^ioj ^'S-^^s'^ 
 
 ni 
 
 J=T3 „ _ „ 
 
 O O 2 O O Q 
 
 »-^?» Si's 
 
 nj t^_, 4_, 
 
 I X> V 
 
 B 
 
 S 
 o 
 o 
 
 -a 
 
 
 J3 1) 
 
 « « § « « « - « « * " «J 
 S .S « S S S II > =« V V *» 
 
 «t s 
 
 3 i 
 
 o 2_g 
 
 ^ o 
 
 si—' -** 
 
 o tt 2 
 
 ^ E *,i 
 
 >- o" 
 
 c • J" 
 
 o 
 St ^ ti 
 
 °' a 
 
 Cu-S 
 
 o2 
 
 d o) "O ho 
 
 ■Ji _ •=! ^ O- , 
 
 O J3U: 
 
 2^s 
 
 --C 
 
 2« 
 
 ^ 8 «> ti tt 
 
 ^^^^^^Ic^^®®®®®®®®®®®®®®®®®® 
 
128 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 
 - 'f^ _.■ _K _^ -^ — . ••^ ,-v j^~ f^ ^ Q s "ti 'S t? tr >* ^ 
 
 . e cs a e o 'S o ;t;- 5 ^ ^ ^ '5 e 
 
 l3.S'^S^i£7^>I^)£^i£^^2N4-> 41-t 41-) «>* 4i_t 4Z7 «C 
 
 o o :-* o 
 
 133 CS5 J_ , 
 
 ^> (U Cl) QJ &> Q> 4J &> &> &* &1 Qi> Ck> U-* <di« ui> sv ^ib* '1^^ '—'_ ■— ■, - 
 
 C3 Cs -*-; 
 
 ■a! . 
 
 « w 
 
 C! C .» 
 S-» w C3 
 C3 CJJS->g 
 
 ft> CJ S ^., 
 
 C3 cs C3 o &> ^ "5^ ^ ;^ ;^ ;^ C tS O 
 
 S S3 e eJ «i a> 
 
 H 
 O 
 
 Ex 
 
 >; 
 
 H 
 <! 
 O 
 
 5 
 g 
 
 H 
 
 J3 '-i 
 
 C3,W »- t> ' 
 
 
 
 »J S 
 
 g^ £§=!&§:«««- 
 
 c c a S S a .Si .£i .-tj 
 
 »S~^S^S'*S~^"B~'S~^'S~'&^S~^'S'^>S'^^*S~^>S'^"S' -S-S" 
 
 (35 
 
 s 
 
 
 Jff- ■S'iS 
 
 
 
 >?? -i:^ -" .=« 
 
 .^ *-> 
 
 'S >=> cj S s to 
 
 t^ cs cs B 13 a> 
 
 s » ii 
 
 -O JO *^ 
 
 " **" «u" *r 
 
 u ^ O) <u lU ., 
 
 ■ m 
 
 \ 3 
 
 ?.:«? 
 
 rt r<-t r*-; r*-; tr; « Pi *.* C • 
 
 
 f SI4 41-t mI2 
 
 tj e o C S3 
 
 »3~>S~'S"'S^S~*e~*S''S"^>H"'S~»S~^>S~*S'-S"^^>S~*B'*S~'S'*S"'S' 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 
 
 60 5 o 
 
 « --- 
 
 «> si s 
 
 «» A w« 
 
 V « « 
 
 bO 
 
 c 
 
 bS 
 
 TO nj 
 2 O 
 
 
 4j (U • 
 
 4-. ri 
 
 ^ >.5 C173 u 
 
 O.S ° So g.c.S 
 'SgiS'oowei.'^ 
 
 oo2S;-222 
 
 ■^ >*• «» t^* t^rt •«« ^ ^ 
 
 
 tt «» : 
 
 o "* 
 o (U 
 
 <-> o 
 
 0:0 
 
 l-c o 
 
 o o 
 
 V, o OJ >- 
 
 -^3 
 
 «2 
 
 ii o 
 
 o o ■'^ ii 
 S S «> rT 
 <s <s ^ «» 
 
 o 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 129 
 
 
 
 S E -s ^ "S Si ^ vo .».^ s'^s 
 
 »SSB SHE 5 
 
 
 
 *f «> csi cje.s: 
 
 j3~.o ^ ,-a 
 
 £--5,8 
 
 O 3' 
 
 sh- k ttr o jj o - 
 
 
 !-. t- !-. t^ i ^- £/> 
 
 S" • s 
 
 '" '^^ <- 5i :-, 
 
 '^ " S S p: 
 
 i£# -g-sl 
 
 M 
 
 S2 
 
 I Si 
 
 S -i:; ^ 
 
 
 '**^*>:2 * ** ** 
 
 S«s2°°SoS&^ooo2oo 
 
 W W W W S> S* Sr^SrW S S S S S S K 
 
 >£5~ 
 
 a . 
 
 s ^- 
 
 If 
 
 .5 >, 
 S .2, 
 ■C c 
 
 ■S o 
 
130 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 
 « > 
 
 o 
 
 b 
 OS ■ 
 
 
 -!*^ C ICT o *-* 
 
 I— t j~» i^ — («^t^ — ii I ii t i ii >i I <i ' ■ *•' ' ■ ' ■ 
 
 _<sa. 
 
 c: Sj'-*— ^'^ S'"C "C ?5 -Si -Ji •" -H w "^ " s5 — s ;S S H c 
 
 
 a t> oj <u o ^"2 G 'S ." >g 5=^ H -Si :a -^ :tr::r:o^:S s c •;= 
 
 Ji M — <««*— ?^=a ." -w :C3 :0 :0 :0 :S ^ sI3 w w w '^J ^-^ Ss S5 K 
 
 * 
 
 -— '.•o 
 
 ^-> ii^ t ^ ' i 1 i ii 1p 1 i T b 1 » I, 1 g 1^ t ^ If tr 1 , !■ 1 ^ ig 1 i 1 | *r 
 
 
 
 •ii-TO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "^^ 
 
 
 ss 
 
 
 
 t- ^ 
 
 J- '^ 
 
 
 S w 
 
 
 
 -■ f^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 ej 
 
 
 >e^ -s- 
 
 H 
 ^ 
 
 
 . . .gee- .S :SS„ . ^--.^ -- ^ 
 
 
 a tT Si,-^ <=>^~ .— w j-> ^ ^ a e cj 5 S S ." .5 a a S 
 
 g 
 
 q=: ■-; cS m <n 
 
 rat/3 _ 
 
 O " „ O O 
 
 "^ O 2 *^ "1 
 
 f c :2 I- > o 
 
 ta o o 
 
 o 
 
 ^ <U rt c 
 TO O) «> tn 
 
 5 J3 m in '^ "TS -" 
 
 o q 
 
 „ ._ O K " 
 
 " . -u 
 
 Pi; 
 
 — _u „--. ^ „ 
 
 
 2*oo°S2o 
 
 ** V «» Siiss — ** 
 
 
 ,3 c 
 
 ■s ^_^ 
 
 -1 
 
 on* 
 
 o *-* 
 
 "S *S 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 131 
 
 
 i= g S 
 
 
 a> -v-» 
 
 
 O s a> 
 S — -■=: :e -S S "S .5 .5 -S :o o t> . 6i ^ U "^S'^ 
 
 titttiaaBaaas a^ -aJS «^ « ^^-s sS-g-c 
 
 6j a. 
 
 C O 6J ^ 
 
 ■n-s-n ?5 s a s a a § ^.g'^ « s s s-c^e a-§S"=g =2 
 
 3 
 
 ■5-n-B^aa aaa |^g-gi.g'^g,^«.agi&gg 
 
 SSS°S^ SSS«-!H-a.S:>B-.S->S-^£-2:S:S:i2:S:S: 
 
 a 
 
 
 B S> — 
 
 S, ". t; -So" = - o ".f-'-s ^ ii' ^ i^ ^ d 
 
 •srs .s -S 2 -s S .§ -H = rg ^.^ o -- o- „- o 1 ii „- s 'S^-S- 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 »- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cj ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <.) 
 
 
 (U .x> dJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,-<u 
 
 
 ai' 
 
 ^ii„ .£ "S bfl 
 
 --"---» -- 5 S S s \o " o S 2 S ^^ o . - ^-- 
 
 .ss 
 
132 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 H 
 
 
 <! 
 
 
 PL< 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 P< 
 
 u 
 
 Cd 
 
 > 
 
 h 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 .2:4i.iti-itlS:l.i:L,t:LaiiI:L.-S:.i£-iil^±: 43 iJ ^ 42 Xi -S 
 
 
 
 >«-> o c^ .._ cj .<-• .t~* -.— O ;_i :-» 
 
 ■s -ji; ii e ii ^ S ~ ^ -c -S -n S 
 
 
 fti 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 D 
 
 H 
 
 « 
 
 U 
 
 U] 
 
 
 
 ^^^>S"»S'^ -e'>e"-B"-B'^-s~*e''S>s~'e'^^^^ 
 
 en c::. 
 
 SC-iH-tS- iS rf^ .-w .-is .-H ;-S ,-c .-hS ji- ^i ij ii 4i 4i s-* !- 
 
 =3 ii •— "H 
 tj '=-• t> 
 
 
 ,=- >=> 
 
 
 .^3 
 
 3.^ -^ 
 ^ JO J= 
 
 fi:iS-iXiS-C:->t:iS-£.i£.itiiH-£-S^-fcJ-«i!i3ii±:fi u u 
 
 ^ ^ — .*— -^— .*^ .^-^ .^ -» .^ ._ .4_r .4_f .«_, ^ ^ 
 
 ^ie~^^^>s~^'B"^'&*S"^g^^g^e~^*s~^ 
 
 y i ;: n ^' 
 
 t; u oj ojS 
 
 ^ - ^ s-" "S 
 
 
 c- 
 
 
 
 'J=) 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vO *» 
 
 lU 
 
 0) 
 
 a> 
 
 a> 
 
 en 
 
 (A 
 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 133 
 
 HH- C C S .. _ _ OJq 
 
 « 
 
 
 C3 CJ :e3 <i> a> 6> -C &* -ti .3 1^ O ^ '^ *S 
 
 H B S BBS BBBBaS Jfe-SJ,S> 
 
 «> a> C^ 
 
 i^«^^ ■" s ? 
 
 s^ooo BBB sas sB'laa 
 
 Si," .p 
 
 r^a rTi ^'^ 
 
 *-» o i-* <-» 
 
 a 
 
 oS^»» saa BBB g a a aaaB%-:^s,g, 
 
 -S OJ .^ ., 
 
 - .« 
 
 w +-» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^•^ 
 
 o^ 
 
 J-» 1 — 1 
 
 ^ i^r 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 
 
 ■*^ -*-» 
 
 
 J2 =5 
 
 So 
 
 ■p s 
 
 :0 .1-. 
 
 S o 
 
 ■?;«■ 
 
 O :0 
 
 •-^ » 5=1 -^ -^ 
 
 fiaS -S-^-.*-- ^a 
 
 £0 S-* 
 
 ^i-gJst^ S'^:§:^ft^l «^#-g:^«i;i:.H 
 
 SgglMf^ Ilii^MfiB aaalal-E-^fi 
 
 ^ 
 
 o St u 
 
 o £g,g^ o -o S . ^g 
 
 ".So fess -s^i^ i^i 5 g y s^ 
 
 s-oS -2S^ o^o oo"o-^5"''^2 
 
 
 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 CONTAINING PARONYMS Of THE GERMAN LANGUAGE AND TABLES 
 
 ILLUSTRATING THE ORDER OF THE WORDS 
 
 IN THE SENTENCE. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 137 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 ^al, ra.. eel. 
 Slale, pi., eels. 
 'Slar, m., eagle. 
 ^08, n., carcass. 
 
 ■3ld)t, f., ban ; acj)t, eight. 
 
 ■31^11, m., ancestor. 
 Wjntn, pi. of 31^11. 
 9i^ve, f., ear of corn. 
 «^ren, to glean. 
 
 alle, all. 
 
 alt, adj., old. 
 
 3lttar, m., altar. 
 
 anbadeti, to stick by baking. 
 
 dinger, m., grassy place. 
 
 antai^en, to smile upon. 
 
 <innal)en, to sew on. 
 
 •aneignen, to appropriate. 
 
 anl'd)nuren, to fasten with a string. 
 
 anfted)en, to tap. 
 
 ant^un, to put on. 
 
 antuetfen, to assign, appoint. 
 
 3l'pfcl, m., apple. 
 
 3(tger, m., vexation. 
 
 Slrni, m., arm. 
 
 Str'me, pi. of 3lrm. 
 Slfdie, f.. ashes. 
 Sltem, m., breath 
 aufbruden, to print upon, 
 auferfte^en, to rise up from the 
 
 dead, 
 auffriet^en, to creep on. 
 aufledeti, to lick up. 
 aufreifeen, to tear open, 
 flufric^ten, to raise up. 
 
 31U, n., (the) universe. 
 
 3l^te, f., awl ; atle, all. 
 
 3lr, n.. are. (10 meter square.) 
 
 dp, imperf., first pers. sing, of 
 
 effen ; 3l§, n., ace. 
 3lft, m., act, (theater); 3ltte, f., 
 
 an act of congress, 
 an, by, on, at. 
 a()ltetl, to anticipate. 
 S^re, f., honor ; 9ira, f., era. 
 e^ren, to honor. 
 9{IIee, f., avenue. 
 3llt, m., alto. 
 Sllter, n., age. 
 an|3a(fcn, to grasp. 
 Slnfev, m., anchor. 
 Slnlagen, pi, talents, plans. 
 anna{)ern, to bring (move) near, 
 anneigcn, to incline to. 
 anfc^nurrcn, to purr at. 
 anfteden, to put on ; to infect. 
 3lnton, Anthony, 
 anmet^eti, to whitewash. 
 l)3pc'tl, m , call, recall, 
 cirgcr, adj., comp. of arg, bad. 
 
 (Sl'fer, m., balcony, 
 arm, adj., poor. 
 3lrmee', f., army, 
 gfc^e, f., ash-tree. 
 3Uom, m., atom. 
 aufbrMen, to open by pressing, 
 auffleljeji, to rise. 
 
 auffriegen, to get open, 
 auflcgen, to lay on. 
 aufretjen, to incite, 
 aufrti^ttg, upright. 
 
138 
 
 PARONVMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 auffagen, to rehearse, 
 auffparen, to reserve, 
 auffprengen, to burst open, 
 ouffpulen, to spool. 
 
 Oufftecl)en, to fork, to lance, 
 auftaucn, to thaw up. 
 auSta^en, to laugh at. 
 auglecEen, to lick up. 
 0U8lefen, to read out ; to select. 
 ouSpuftcn, to blow out. 
 auSrauc^en, to smoke out. 
 0U8rCil)cn, to clean with a rake. 
 
 ou8retd)en, to be sufficient. 
 auSvinneu, to leak (rin) out. 
 
 OUSjagen, to state, give evidence. 
 au8fc^alen, to lath, 
 ausjc^alcn, to shell. 
 
 auSfingcn, to sing out. 
 auSfptelen, to play out. 
 auSja^Ien, to pay out. 
 
 auffcigen, to saw open. 
 
 auffperren, to open wide. 
 
 autiprtngen, to jump up ; chap. 
 
 aiifipiilen, to wash up ; auffpte* 
 ktt, to strike up. 
 
 oitffteden, to pin up. 
 
 auft{)un, to open. 
 
 3ht8lagen, pi., advanced money. 
 
 OUSlcgen, to advance, expound. 
 
 auSlofen, to redeem. 
 
 auSpu^en, to cleanse, decorate. 
 
 aiiSraiti^eru, to fumigate. 
 
 aiiSrec^ncn, to calculate ; au8= 
 regneu, to cease raining. 
 
 ou§riect)eii, to smell no longer. 
 
 miSriltgen, to wring out ; to dis- 
 joint (one's arm). 
 
 ouSfogen, to saw out. 
 
 au§jd)allen, to cease sounding. 
 
 au8fcf)eflen, to publish by ring- 
 ing a bell. 
 
 auSfinnen, to devise. 
 
 auSfputen", to rinse. 
 
 auSjatjIen, to count out. 
 
 Saul, Baal. 
 
 SSadt, {., cheek. 
 
 borfen, to bake ; Sacfen, pi. of 
 
 «a(fe. 
 Wilder, m. ; baker. 
 4Bab, n. bath, 
 baben, to bathe. 
 
 Sa^n, f., way.; ^onn, m., ban. 
 ba^ncn, to path. 
 Sa^re, f., bier. 
 Sat, f., bay ; Set), bey. 
 balgen, to wrestle ; to cast the 
 
 skin, 
 ballen, to clench, to bale. 
 
 Sad, m., ball. 
 
 Safe, f., beacon, buoy. 
 
 paden, to pack, to lay hold of. 
 
 SSeifiV, m., cup. 
 
 bat, imperf. of bitten, to beg. 
 
 Saben, Baden. 
 
 ^an, (Myth.) Pan. 
 
 banneit, to ban. 
 
 ^aare, pi. of ^aar. 
 
 bet, by. 
 
 Salfen, m., beam. 
 
 Sallen, m., bale. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 139 
 
 IBcinb, m., volume, binding. 
 Sanb, n., ribbon, 
 bangen, to be afraid. 
 
 bar, bare, cash, 
 borfd^, harsh. 
 SBaxt, m., beard. 
 
 SSa% m., bass. 
 53aft, m.. bast. 
 
 baumen, to rear (of horses), 
 bebtngen, to stipulate ; bebiingen, 
 
 to manure. 
 SBiitm, pi. of Seere, f., berry. 
 SSiit, n., bed (garden). 
 SBnxi, n,, leg 
 befc^ben, to make war upon ; 
 
 beglettetl, to accompany, 
 bege^ren, to desire, covet. 
 •Se^agen, n., comfort, pleasure, 
 betjaorett,. to cover with hair. 
 
 ^eifap, m., sojourner. 
 bct|en, to bite, 
 befriedien, to creep upon. 
 betaiiien, to laugh at. 
 belegen, to overlay, 
 benagen, to gnaw, nibble. 
 befet)len, to command, 
 bepfluden, to pluck, to plume, 
 bergen, to conceal, hide. 
 
 befiien, to sow. 
 bef^weren, to burden. 
 
 bcffer, better. 
 
 boub, imperf. of btnbcn, to bind. 
 
 SanbC, f., band ; gang. 
 
 .^onfen, banks (where money is 
 deposited). 
 
 'iPaar, pair ; ^aor, a few. 
 
 ^arfc^ (SarS), m., perch. 
 
 •Sartc, f., unprepared whale- 
 bone. 
 
 '^0,% m., passport. 
 
 pa|t, pres. third pers. sing, of 
 paffen, to fit. 
 
 baumen, Dat. pi. of 53aiim, tree. 
 
 Sebiinten, n., opinion, thinking ; 
 beblinfcn, to seem, appear. 
 
 Sbixun, pi. of Stir, m., bear. 
 
 Sett, n., bed 
 
 ^ein, f., pain. 
 
 befebern, to feather ; befiirbent, 
 to forward. 
 
 betteibcn, to clothe. 
 
 bcfel)ren, to convert. 
 
 be'^aden, to hoe. 
 
 be^arren, to persevere ; S3e{)ar= 
 rert, n., perseverance. 
 
 25eifa|j, m., addition. 
 
 beijen, to corrode. 
 
 befriegen, to make war upon. 
 
 btiadm, to varnish. 
 
 beledfen, to nibble, to lick. 
 
 benageln, to stud with nails. 
 
 bepfix{)lcn, to stake, prop. 
 
 be^jfliigen, to plow. 
 
 53crgen, Uat. pi. of Serg, m., 
 mountain. 
 
 befet)en, to look at. 
 
 befdjlDiiren, to swear to, to con- 
 jure. 
 
 bbfer (2Rann), bad (man). 
 
140 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 bcftai^ten, to steel, 
 beftei^en, to quilt, to bribe. 
 
 Befttcfen, to embroider. 
 
 bettn, to pray. 
 
 •Scter, one who prays. 
 
 beteereit, to tar. 
 
 bewa^ren, to preserve, to pro- 
 tect ; bcmaijrai, to verify, to 
 confirm. 
 
 bewaflen, to hill. 
 
 bcjaumen, to bridle ; bejaiineit, 
 to fence. 
 
 bCjeigett, to express (joy). 
 
 bieber, honest; Steter, m., bidder. 
 
 Sieberfett, honesty. 
 
 btegen, to bend. 
 
 SSitm, {., bee. 
 
 Sienett, pi. of Sienc. 
 
 SSitii, {., ball (billiards). 
 
 bieten, to offer. 
 
 bis, till, to. 
 
 •Slafc, f., bladder, blister. 
 
 Statt, n., leaf. 
 
 •Soben, m., ground, earth. 
 
 So^lc, {., plank ; SSoXOli, f., bowl, 
 bofjleil, to plank ; So^Ien, pi. of 
 
 SSotjk. 
 borgcn, to borrow. 
 bvai), fallow. 
 
 braffcn, to brace (Mar.) 
 braiien, to brew. 
 •33rot, n., bread. 
 SSnd), n., book. 
 
 .beftel)lcn, to rob. 
 
 bcftedcn, to stick with, to deck 
 with. 
 
 beftUden, to furnish with can- 
 nons. 
 
 53ctten, pi. of Setf, n., bed. 
 
 '^etet, Peter. 
 
 bet^oren, to fool, infatuate. 
 befaf)ren, to travel over, to fre- 
 quent. 
 
 befallen, to befall. 
 befSumen, to hem. 
 
 bejeugeu, to attest, 
 bitter, bitter, 
 ^ttterfett, bitterness, 
 biiden, to bow. 
 Siifine, f., stage. 
 33itt)nen. pi. of 53itl)nc; binncu, 
 within (a certain time). 
 
 W^i, f; pill. 
 
 bitten, to ask, request. 
 
 ^\% m., bite (of a dog, etc). 
 
 blafe ! imp. of btafen, to blow. 
 
 ptatt, fiat. 
 
 ^Otcn, pl.ofSote m., messenger; 
 
 boteit, imperf. pi. of btetCtt. 
 'iJJote, m., a native of Poland, 
 buljleii, to coquet. 
 
 ^orfen, pi. of Sorfc, f., bark, 
 brac^, imperf. of brec^en,to break, 
 
 to vomit. 
 )3ra|'fen, to gluttonize. 
 Srauen, pi. of 53raue, f ., eye-brow. 
 Srut, f., breed, incubation. 
 ®ud}e, f., beech-tree. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 141 
 
 5Bu{)(e, m. and f., gallant, para- -Sude, f., edict of the pope ; 
 
 mour. 53ltlte, m., bull (animal) 
 
 ®ltnb, m., band, union. tuint, of many colors. 
 
 ben, ace. of bev, the. 
 ba'ntm, therefore. 
 
 baS, neuter article. 
 Daube, f., stave. 
 beljnen, to stretch. 
 
 T)etd), ra., dike. 
 
 be«, Gen. of ber and ba« ; 'l}e6 
 (Mus.) D flat. 
 
 ©tester, m., poet. 
 
 bid), thee. 
 
 Eide, f., thickness. 
 
 bingen, to hire ; biittgen, to man- 
 ure. 
 
 3>infel, m., spelt. 
 
 bir, dat. of bu, to thee. 
 
 T)ad), n., roof. 
 
 ®01tt, m., dome, cathedral. 
 !Dorf, n., village. 
 !©orn, m., thorn, 
 brei, three. 
 Sritte, (the) third. 
 
 ©ro^nen, pl.of 33ro^ne, f., drone. 
 35roft, m., upper-bailiff. 
 !iDrU(f, m., pressure, print. 
 ®une, f., bank of sand. 
 IDiinfte, pi. of Sunft, vapor, 
 bu'rdibo^ren, to bore through. 
 bll'rc^brecfien, to break through. 
 
 bu'rc^brtttgen, to get through. 
 
 bu'r(^l'(I)auett, to look through, 
 bu'ri^filjen, to wear out by sit- 
 ting upon. 
 
 bcnn, conj., for, then. 
 
 bant'm, for it ; id) gebe itid)t« 
 
 barum ; I care nothing for it. 
 bap, conj., that. 
 Zanbt, f., dove, 
 benen, pron., Dat. pi. of ber, to 
 
 these, to those. 
 S^etd), m,, pond. 
 be|, for beffen, pron., whose. 
 
 bid)ter,comp. of bti^t, tight, solid. 
 
 bid, thick. 
 
 XMe, f., malice. 
 
 biitifen, to fancy, (e« bitntt mid), 
 
 methinks). 
 !J)iinfel, m., presumption. 
 jTiei", n., animal, 
 borl), yet, however ; ®od)t, m., 
 
 wick, 
 bumm, stupid. 
 Slorf, m., turf, peat. 
 tSXXZn, to dry, torrefy, 
 treu, faithful. 
 
 Jritte, pi. of 2:ritt, m., step. 
 t()r[men, to throne. 
 Xroft, m., comfort, 
 trug, imperf. of tragen, to bear. 
 'Ciinnc, f., thinness 
 SDietifte, pi. of ©ienft, m., service. 
 burc^bol)'rcn, to pierce, to stab. 
 burd)brc'd)eH, to pink. 
 bitrd)brin'gen, to penetrate. 
 burc^fd)au'eit, to discern, 
 burc^fi'^eil, to pass sitting. 
 
U-' 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 bu'rd)fptelen, to play through, 
 bn'rc^fledjen, to cut through, dig 
 
 through, 
 bu'rc^ftopen, to push through, 
 bu'rdjftreic^en, to cancel, erase, 
 bu'rdjtanjen, to dance through. 
 bu'rd)tretcn, to tread through. 
 bu'rd)Wa(5en, to wear out by 
 
 waltzing. 
 
 bu'rc^jte^en, to draw (pull) 
 
 through. 
 JiU^enb, n. dozen. 
 
 buri^lptc'len, to pass playing, 
 biirdifte'd^en, to pierce, to transfix. 
 
 bitrc^fto'Ben, to stab through. 
 burt^ftret'(^en, to ramble about, 
 blll'cbtan'sen, to pass dancing, 
 blirc^tfe'ten, to work by treading. 
 bur^roa'Iseu, to waltz through. 
 
 burc^jiefj'en, to pass, march, travel 
 
 through. 
 bu3cn, to thou. 
 
 ebbcn, to ebb, fluctuate. 
 
 S(fe, f., corner. 
 
 (Sge(, m., leech. 
 
 &)(, f., wedlock. 
 
 et)ent, brazen. 
 
 ei ! interj., ay. 
 
 (Sic^e, f., oak tree. 
 
 (5i(^en, pi. of &6)t. 
 
 &k, {., haste. 
 
 eilen, to haste. 
 
 eiiieit, ace. masc. of ettl, a. 
 
 cin'fat^, single, simple. 
 
 iSin'fatl, m , a falling in, an idea. 
 
 ©n'ftu^, m., influx, influence. 
 (Stn'gong, m., entrance. 
 
 ©n'gebcv, m., suggester. 
 (Stn'grtff, m., encroachment. 
 (Sin'gu|, m., infusion. 
 
 ein'fiaten, to hook in ; ein'^aden, 
 
 to hew into 
 (5ill'f)0tt, m., pause, restraint, 
 cinijer', along, forth. 
 
 ebeil, even, just. 
 
 @gge, f., harrow. 
 
 Sfel, m., nausea, disgust. 
 
 ti)t, ere, before. 
 
 e^rcn, to honor. 
 
 ®, n., egg. 
 
 (St(f)e, f., gauge. 
 
 eid)en, to gauge. 
 
 (Sitle, f., owl. 
 
 (Sulen, pi. of (Sule. 
 
 cinen, to unite. 
 
 ein r^ad), n., a shelf. 
 
 ctn gait, m., a fall ; ©nfalt, f., 
 
 simplicity, 
 ein gluB/ m., a river, 
 ein ®ang, m., a walk, a round 
 
 (boxing), 
 ein ®eber, m , a giver, 
 ein ®riff, m., a handle, a grasp, 
 ein ®u|, m., a founding ; a 
 
 shower (rain) 
 ein ^afen, m., a hook. 
 
 ein §cilt, m., a hold, stop, 
 ein |)eer, n., an army ; etn $err, 
 a gentleman. 
 
PARONYMS OK THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 143 
 
 ©U'^orn, n., unicorn, 
 etn'terben, to notch. 
 (Stn'flang, m., harmony, unison. 
 (Sin'Iagcr, n., cantonement. 
 
 eiii'mal, once. 
 
 ®n'nal)mc, f., conquest, receipt, 
 dit'raljmen, to frame, 
 ©n'nt^ter, m., arranger, 
 ©n'l'ttt, m., entry on horseback, 
 ein'riicfen, to insert, to march 
 
 into. 
 ®n3, f., a unite, number one. 
 <5tn'fol5, m., stake (in play). 
 (5tn'fd)iag, m., weft. 
 iSiltlc^IuB, m., inclusion. 
 
 (5tn'f(^u|, m., weft, 
 etn'fingen, to sing asleep. 
 
 &n'iipxei)tv, m., exceptor. 
 
 (Sin'fprucf), m., protest. 
 
 etn'lreffen, to arrive. 
 
 ©n'tritt, m., entrance. 
 
 einroei^en, to soak. 
 
 gin'rourf, m., objection. 
 
 ©n'5Ug, m., a marching in, mov- 
 ing in. 
 
 ©ter, m., pus. 
 
 <Snbe, n., end. 
 
 <Snge, f., closeness. 
 
 (Stigcl, m , angel. 
 
 entgegen, towards, contrary. 
 
 fntfegen, to depose ; fii^ ent= 
 fe^en, to be amazed. 
 
 entoeii^en, to escape. 
 
 crbieten, to offer. 
 
 grb'riiden, m., ridge (land). 
 
 ein $ovn, n., a horn. 
 
 etntijrben, to hive. 
 
 ein £tang, m., a sound. 
 
 ein Sagev, n., a bed, camp, stra- 
 tum. 
 
 etn 3Jtal, n., a mole (body), ein 
 SWatjl, n., a meal. 
 
 etn 9Jame, m., a name. 
 
 etn 9?at)men, m., a frame. 
 
 ein diii^kV/ m., a judge. 
 
 etn 9{ttt, m., a ride. 
 
 etn Mrfen, m., a back. 
 
 etnft, once. 
 
 etn @a^, m., a sentence (Gram.). 
 
 ein ©i^iag, m., a blow. 
 
 ein @i^lu|, m., a conclusion, 
 
 end. 
 ein Bd)U% m., a shot, 
 ein Singen, a singing ; ein'fintcn 
 
 to sink in. 
 ein S^re^er, m., a speaker, 
 etn Spruct), m., a sentence, 
 ein Sreffen, n., a battle, 
 etn 2rttt, m., a -step, 
 etnraei^en, to consecrate, 
 etn 3Burf, m., a throw, 
 ein 3^9/ m.,. a draught, a train 
 
 ©Uter, n., udder. 
 
 @nte, f., duck. 
 
 @n!e, f., hind. 
 
 Snfel, m., grand-son ; ankle. 
 
 entgegnen, to reply. 
 
 @nt[e^en, n., horror. 
 
 entroeiljen, to profane, 
 erbttten, to supplicate, 
 erbru'den, to crush. 
 
144 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 erfreien, to acquire by marriage, 
 crtjarten, to grow hard, 
 crfatten, to grow cold, to cool, 
 eriogen, untrue, 
 erma^ncn, to admonish, 
 ernci^cn, to earn by sewing. 
 CVlCormen, to grow warm, 
 cffe, pres. first pers. sing, of 
 efjen, to eat. 
 
 gadeln, pi. of ^add, f., torch, 
 gaben, m., thread. 
 
 fa[)I, fallow, pale. 
 
 gafine, f., flag, 
 j^atjre, f., furrow. 
 
 ptlc, pi. of gall, m., fall. 
 
 fanb, imperf. of finbcil, to find. 
 
 gari'e, m., a young bull. 
 
 gorfe, f., heifer ; iJevfe, f., heel. 
 
 ?feber, f., feather, pen. 
 
 jjeter, f., celebration, holiday. 
 
 feiern, to celebrate. 
 
 ffeige, f., fig. 
 
 fetl, to be sold. 
 
 gette, f., file. 
 
 getb, n., field. 
 
 Seft, n., feast. 
 
 fetter, comp. of fett, fat. 
 
 giber, f., fibre. 
 
 gettfter, n., window. 
 
 fing, imperf. of fangeu, to catch. 
 
 girff, m., or gtrfte, f., ridge, (of 
 
 house) summit. 
 flicEeu, to patch, 
 gltegc, f., fly. 
 
 erfreueit, to delight, tomake glad, 
 erprtcn, to verify by oath, 
 crfaiten, to catch cold, 
 crtugen, to invent a lie. 
 crmannen, to take courage, 
 ernaljren, to support, 
 ermdrmen, to make warm, 
 tiffc, f., forge. 
 
 facfeln, to flare, to trifle. 
 'iPfaben, Dat. pi. of ^fab, m.,_ 
 
 path. 
 ■iPfal)!, m., post, stake ; gati, fall, 
 ^fanne, f., pan. 
 
 gatjrc. f., ferry ; go^re, f., fir. 
 getle, pi. of gell, n., skin ; ^feflc,. 
 
 f., minnow. 
 ■iPfanb, n., pledge ; gant, ni.,. 
 
 youngster, 
 ^farre, f., parsonage. 
 
 iiJerfe, pi. of 3Ser8, m., verse. 
 better, pi. of 3Sater, father, 
 geuer, n., fire. 
 feiiern, to fire, lium. 
 feige, adj., coward, 
 ^feil, m., arrow. 
 
 "iPfeile, pi. of ^fetl. 
 
 feint, pres. third pers. sing of. 
 
 fallen, to fall. 
 feft,^dj., firm. 
 25etter, m., cousin, relation, 
 gieber, n., fever. 
 fiufter, adj., dark, 
 gint, m., finch, 
 gitrft, m., prince. 
 
 pfliicEen, to pluck, 
 flltgge, adj., fledged^ 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 145 
 
 gliegen, pi. of Sltege. 
 
 i^Itcfen, pi. of gtkfe, f., flag-stone. 
 
 gto^, m., flea. 
 
 l^or, m., blossoming, crape. 
 
 t^o|, n., raft ; fIo§, imperf. of 
 
 fliejjen, to flow. 
 gloffen, pi. of gloffe. 
 
 flott, afloat, merry. 
 
 i^Iurf), m., curse ; glug, m., flight. 
 
 forbem, to demand, 
 fort, away, 
 guber, n., load. 
 fit^Ien, to feel, 
 fur, for. 
 
 5urrf|e/ f., furrow, wrinkle ; 5ur= 
 (f)en, pi. of gurdie. 
 
 ©abet, f., fork. 
 
 @abbe, m., whiting, (sea-fish). 
 
 gii^ren, to ferment. 
 
 ®e{)ren, m., slope. 
 
 ®on8, f., goose. 
 
 gar, done (meat). 
 
 ©am, n., yarn. 
 
 ©arteit, m., garden. 
 
 ®ofe, pi. of ®a8, n., gas. 
 
 ©ebad, n., pastry, bread, 
 gebaren, to bring forth (man), 
 ©ebe't, n., prayer ; ©ebe'tt, n., 
 
 bedding. 
 ®ed, m., fool, 
 ©efaflen, m., liking, pleasure ; 
 
 ©eflee^t, n., basket-work. 
 ®efii^(, n., sense of feeling ; 
 feeling. 
 
 fltegcn, to fly ; ^f[ilgen, to plow, 
 flte^en, to flow ; gtiiffen, dat. pi. 
 
 of glufe. 
 fto(), imperf. of flie^ejt, to flee. 
 f^Iur, f., fields ; m., flooring. 
 §Iu^, m,, river ; f^foffe, f., fin. 
 
 floffen, imperf. pi. of flte^ett. 
 
 glottc, f., fleet. 
 
 ^fliig, m., plow ; flog, imperf. of 
 
 fliegen. 
 forbern, to further. 
 I^ort, n., fort ; SBort, n., word, 
 gutter, n., fodder, 
 futlen, to fill ; gltdcn, n., foal, 
 oter, four. 
 O'urte, f., fury, hag ; gurtett, 
 
 (iVIyth.) the Furies. 
 
 StaM, n., cable. 
 @atte, m., husband, 
 jci^ren, to be a year, 
 te^ren, to sweep, 
 ganj, whole, not broken. 
 SoilV, n., year. 
 
 barren, m., cart ; f'arren, to cart. 
 
 ft'arten, pi. of Sarte, f., card. 
 
 ©affe, f , lane ; Saffe, f., money- 
 box. 
 
 ®epM{i), n., baggage. 
 
 geberben, fid), to carry one's self. 
 
 ge'bet! imperative pi. of gebett, 
 to give. 
 
 fed, bold. 
 
 gefatlen, to please ; and partic. 
 past of fallen, to fall. 
 
 gefledt, spotted. 
 
 ©etoij^l, n., throng. 
 
146 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GEI^MAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 gefunbcn, panic, past of finben, 
 
 to find. 
 ®eifcr, m., slaver, foam, 
 getl, rank, lustful. 
 ®et|, f., goat ; OetJ, ra., avarice. 
 ®et[el, m. and f., hostage. 
 ®eta(^, n., (continual) laughter. 
 ®elb, n., money. 
 ®ele(fe, n., (continual) licking, 
 
 kissing. 
 gelel)rt, learned. 
 ®etnoc^, n., room. 
 ®ent(J, n., neck ; ©CtticEe, n., 
 
 (continual) nodding, 
 gerben, to tan. 
 ®eri(^t, n., mess, court, 
 gern, like, 
 ©efc^td, n., skill, fate. 
 
 ®efpenft, n., spook. 
 ®e)ptelc, m., play-mate. 
 gefiit)rt, partic. past of fit^ren, to 
 
 guide. 
 ®iXDai)t, f., security. 
 ®en)anb, n., garment. 
 
 ©ejttc^t,, n., brood ; ®e[id|t, n., 
 
 face. 
 ®tebel, ni. gable, 
 gtrren, to coo. 
 ©tocfe, f., bell, 
 gbnnen, not to begrudge. 
 ®ram, m., grief. 
 ®ron, m , grain (weight). 
 ®rate, f., fish-bone. 
 ®rau8, ni., horror, rubbish ; 
 
 ®arau3, m., utter ruin. 
 ®ret8, m., an old man. 
 ©renje, f., boundary. 
 
 gewuttben. twisted. 
 
 Setfer, m., scolder, 
 ffeit, m., wedge. 
 ®eift, m., ghost, spirit. 
 ®et|el, f., whip. 
 ®elag, n., banquet, 
 gett ! interj., is it not so ? 
 ®e(ege, n., layer, 
 
 geteert, emptied. 
 
 gemad), adv., gently, slowly. 
 
 ®enitge, f., sufficiency. 
 
 ferben, to notch. 
 
 ®eriti^t, n., rumor. 
 
 Sera, m., kernel. 
 
 gefc^icft, adj., fit, qualified; and 
 
 part, past of fi^tden, to send. 
 ®e)pinft, n., spun yarn. 
 ®efpu(e, n., dishwater. 
 ®eBiert, n., quadrate. 
 
 ®imijX, n., gun. 
 
 geiBOnbt, adj., clever ; and par- 
 
 ticip. past of Irenbett, to turn. 
 ge5t[(^t, partic. past of Jtfd^eit, 
 
 to hiss. 
 Mbd, m., bucket, 
 ftrren, to tame. 
 ®lu{fe, f., clucking hen. 
 fonneti, to be able. 
 Strain, m., haberdashery. 
 Sra^n, m., crane. 
 
 ®rete, abbr. of SQfJargarete. 
 !rau«, adj., curly ; Sraufe, f., 
 
 ruffle. 
 SretS, m., circle 
 Sriinje, pi. of S?ronj, m., wreath. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 147 
 
 '(Srtedien, pi. of ©ricc^e, Greek, 
 grimmen, to rage, to gripe; ®rim= 
 
 men, n., griping, 
 '©ritbe, f., pit. 
 ®rit^, m., salutation, 
 ©rii^e, pi. of ®ru^. 
 ■®t(be, f., guild. 
 
 giilbift^, (Min.) containing gold. 
 'Ounft, f., favor. 
 ®urt, m., girdle. 
 ■@Up, m., casting. 
 
 .l^aaren, to cast the hair, 
 ^dgen, to fence, (hedge). 
 §at'en, m., hook, to hook. 
 Jpafen, pi. of §)afe, m., hare. 
 ■§aft, {., haste. 
 
 ■§au[en, m., sturgeon, 
 ■^ant, f., skin. 
 
 .^iiute, pi. of §aut. 
 iiciuttg, adj., membranous. 
 ■§eer, n., host ; ^e^r, sublime. 
 
 ■^efe, f., dregs, yeast. 
 
 ^tii, n., welfare. 
 
 J^eiten, to heal. 
 
 ;§etler, m , healer. 
 
 I)eifer, adj., hoarse ; i}d^n, comp. 
 
 of l)d% hot. 
 i^ei^en, to call, name. 
 ■§etb, m., hero. 
 
 ^tUt, £., light, clearness, 
 .^engft, m., stallion. 
 
 §erb, m., hearth; ^ort, pres. third 
 pers. sing, of i)6ritt, to hear. 
 
 frtecften,. to creep. 
 frUmmen, to bend. 
 
 ®rm3)3e, f., group, 
 gro^, great, large. 
 ®rU^e, f., peeled barley, 
 ©iitte, f., ground-rent, 
 gijitig, legal. 
 Sunft, f., art. 
 Surt, (a man's name). 
 Su^, m., kiss. 
 
 barren, to wait. 
 
 ^egen, to foster. 
 
 (jaden, to chop. 
 
 l^affen, to hate. 
 
 l)aft, pres. second pers. sing, of 
 l^aben, have. 
 
 ^au[en, to reside, dwell. 
 
 f)ant, pres. third pers. sing, of 
 fatten, to strike, hew. 
 
 ^eute, to-day. 
 
 Ijeuttg. of this day. 
 
 ^er, hither ; ^err, m., sir, gen- 
 tleman, 
 
 §ofe, pi. of §of, m., yard, court, 
 halo. 
 
 ifdi, adj., unhurt, whole. 
 
 ^eulen, to howl. 
 
 §eu(cr, m., whiner. 
 
 |)iiufer, pi. of ^au8. 
 
 ^etjen, to heat. 
 
 t)citt, pres. third pers. sing, of 
 
 fatten, to keep. 
 §blte, f., hell ; ^bijU, f., cave, 
 ^iiltgft, pres. second pers. sing. 
 
 of pngen, to hang. 
 §erbe, f., herd. 
 
148 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 ]^errfii)ert, to rule. 
 
 §errcf)en, n., dim. of §err, little 
 
 master. 
 §tcbe, pi. of §ieb, m., blow. 
 §of, m., yard, court, etc., 
 
 ^Ol^rt, m., scorn. 
 
 |)ummer, f., lobster. 
 
 ^ute, pi. of §Ut, m., hat. 
 
 ^iiteil, to guard. 
 
 iljm, pron., (dat. of er) to him. 
 
 t^n, pron., (ace. of er) him. 
 
 Sacfen, pi. of -Sadc, f., jacket, 
 jiingft, lately. 
 3ute, m.. Jute. 
 
 £aber, m., double chin, 
 ifaffcr, m., Caffre. 
 Ualjtl, m., skiff. 
 
 tarn, imperf. of tommen, to come. 
 
 ffarte, f., card. 
 
 Kafte, f., caste. 
 
 Setter, f., wine-press. 
 
 fenneji, to know, (i6) fenne, I 
 
 know), 
 tenner, m., knower. 
 Slerbe, f., notch. 
 £irc^e, f., church. 
 Sti'jen, n., pillow. 
 i!tfte, f., chest, box ; S'iifte, f., 
 
 coast. 
 Sllinge, f., blade, sword, 
 ftingen, to sound. 
 U\o^, m., lump, 
 ^tabe, m., boy. 
 foc^en, to cook. 
 Sober, m., bait. 
 Sio^, m., 'cabbage, 
 fradjen, to crash. 
 
 §t^})e, f., ^^. scythe. 
 
 |)uf, m., hoof ; $ufe, f., hide of 
 
 land. 
 ^ui)n, n., hen. 
 junior, m., humor. 
 |)utte, f., hut. 
 |)iitten, pi. of ^iitte. 
 im, contraction of in bcm, in the. 
 in, prep., into. 
 
 jagen, to hunt, drive. 
 
 jiingft, superl. of jung, young 
 
 ^fiitte, f., anchor-lifter. 
 
 5later, m., he-cat. 
 Soffer, m., trunk, 
 fann, pres. first and third pers. 
 
 smg. of liJnnen, can. 
 Samm, m., comb, 
 farrte, imperf. of tarren. to cart. 
 Saften, m., chest, 
 falter, comp. of toft, cold, 
 fonnen, to be able ; x6) fann, I 
 
 can. 
 Odnner, m., patron. 
 Sbrbe, pi. of Sorb, m., basket. 
 Sirf(^e, t., cherry, 
 fiiffen, to kiss. 
 fii|te, imperf. of fiiffen. 
 
 Stinfc, f., latch. 
 
 flinfen, to move the latch. 
 
 SIo^, m., log. 
 
 Snnppe, m., armour-bearer. 
 
 Sut^cn, m., cake. 
 
 Soter, m., cur. 
 
 So^Ie, f., coal. 
 
 Sragen, m., collar. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 149 
 
 :^a^e, f., scraper. Ux'di^t, f., itch. 
 
 ttkd)tn, to creep. Wcgett, to get ; to make war. 
 
 Sieger, m,, warrior; Sned)cr, llruger, m., tavern-keeper, 
 m., cringer. 
 
 laben, to refresh. 
 Sadje, f., pool, laughter. 
 
 lai^en, to laugh. 
 
 8abe, f., chest. 
 
 laben, to load, invite ; Soben, 
 
 m., shutter, store. 
 Ici^nt, lame. 
 8aib, loaf (bread). 
 ^aiiji, {., spawning ; tai(I)en, to 
 
 spawn. 
 
 ^anbmann, peasant. 
 
 tang, long ; tange, long (while 
 
 or time). 
 Wngen, to lengthen. 
 tcingS, along. 
 Sar(^e, f., larch (tree). 
 (aS, imperf. first and third pars. 
 
 sing, of tefeu, to read. 
 tofen,iraperf. firstand third pers. 
 
 pi. of Ie[en. 
 8aft, f., burden, 
 loffig, idle, 
 taut loud. 
 !i*aute, f., lute, 
 tauten, to ring. 
 
 leden, to lick. 
 
 ^et)re, f., teaching, doctrine. 
 
 lel)ren, to teach. 
 
 legmen, to loam over. 
 
 teibcn, to suffer. 
 
 ^etnt, m., glue. 
 
 happen, m., rag, patch. 
 
 8age, f., position, site ; Safe, f., 
 
 brine. 
 Mm, n., sheet (bed). 
 8atte, f., lath, 
 fatten, pi. of 8atte. 
 
 8amm, n., lamb. 
 
 Mh, m., body. 
 
 Set(f)e, f., corps ; Setc^en, pi. 
 
 SanbSmann, m., fellow-country- 
 man. 
 
 Sange, length ; tangen, to reach, 
 to suffice. 
 
 (en!en, to direct, guide. 
 
 liingft, long ago. 
 
 8erit)e, f., lark. 
 
 Ia| ! imperative sing, of taffen. 
 
 loffen, to let (cause or have). 
 
 taft ! imperative pi. of taffen. 
 tSfltg, burdensome. 
 Saut, m., sound. 
 Saute, pi., of 8aut. 
 Seuteu, dat. pi. of Seute, folks, 
 people. 
 
 (egen, to lay. 
 
 8eere, f., emptiness. 
 
 teeren, to empty. 
 
 latjmen, to cripple. 
 
 tetten, to lead. 
 
 Setn, m., flax ; Seine, f ., line, rope. 
 
150 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 tcife, noiseless, soft. 
 
 Setften, m., (shoemakers) last. 
 
 Senfer, m., ruler, disposer. 
 
 tefen, to read. 
 
 8ewi^ter, m., candle-stick. 
 
 8td)t, n., light. 
 
 8tb, n., eye-lid. 
 
 8ie6e, f., love ; Itefien, to love. 
 
 Sift, f., cunning. 
 
 8og, n., (Mar.) log. 
 
 locfen, to decoy, to curl. 
 I'oS, n., lot, chance. 
 Io[en, to draw lots, 
 i'iide, f., gap, opening. 
 
 8aufe, pi. of 8au§, f., louse, 
 leiften, to do, accomplish, 
 langer, comp. of (ang, long, 
 lofen, to solve, to untie, 
 leii^ter, adj. comp. of letrflt, easy. 
 lil^t, adj. and adv., clear, light 
 ?teb, n., song. 
 
 8tppe, f., lip ; gippen, pi. 
 
 t'ifle, f , list. 
 
 log, imperf. of litgett, to lie ; 8oc^^ 
 n., hole. 
 
 ?o(fen, pi. of 8o(fe, f., curl. 
 
 Io8, loose, released. 
 
 lofen, to loose, to solve. 
 
 SiJge, f., lie ; 8ute, f., dormer- 
 window, hatch. 
 
 aJZad)t, f., might ; mai^t, pres. 
 third pers. sing, of maiden, 
 to make. 
 
 $Kabe, f., maggot ; DJiabcn, pi. 
 
 SDfaljl, n., meal ; Wtal, n., mole 
 (on the body). 
 
 ma^Iett, to grind. 
 
 ma^nen, to remind, to ask pay- 
 ment. 
 
 Wannm, pi. vassals. 
 
 2Jiami, m., man. 
 
 9JfattbeI, f., almond. 
 
 SJJarber, m., marten. 
 
 Wave, f , (3JJarii)eu), story ; 
 Wal)Xi, L, horse. 
 
 SJfape, pi. of. 9J?a|, measure. 
 
 SJfeer, n., ocean. 
 
 Jtieincn, to think, opine, guess. 
 
 3)?ei[e, f., titmouse. 
 SWenge, f., quantity ; great 
 number. 
 
 SJfagb, f., maid-servant. 
 
 aWattc, f., mat ; Wlatttn, pi. 
 9JJal, n., mai, time. 
 
 malen, to paint. 
 
 ajianen, pi, (Myth.) manes. 
 
 matinen, to man a ship. 
 
 man, pron. indef. third pers., one. 
 
 9Sante(, m., mantle. 
 
 DJkrter, f., torture. 
 
 Thtve, pi. of iOJeer, n., ocean. 
 
 aJZafje, f., mass, bulk. 
 
 mel)r, comp. of tJtel, (much) more. 
 
 mctnen, pron. ace. masc. of mein, 
 
 mi n e. 
 ajJciufe, pi. of 2J?au8, mouse, 
 inenge, pres. first pers. of tneiigen,. 
 
 to mix, mingle. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 151 
 
 5IJ?enfd), m., man. 
 ajfen|d)en, men. 
 ineffen, to measure. 
 
 2J?tene, f., mien. 
 
 SDJinett, pi. of Wm, mine. 
 
 aJitete, f., rent, hire. 
 
 SUJol^r, m., a moor, (black man). 
 
 mobe'ni, modem. 
 
 3J?onb, m., moon. 
 
 9JJoo8, n., moss ; 3J?U8, n., mar- 
 malade. 
 
 SIRudc, f., a freak, to whim. 
 
 muden, to stir ; (nic!^t muden, 
 not to stir). 
 
 SD'iU'^me, f,, aunt, female rela- 
 tive. 
 
 munben, to relish. 
 
 ajJufe, f.. Muse ; SKu^e, f., lei- 
 sure. 
 
 Sflaiiftn, m., skiff. 
 
 nol)en, to draw near, come near. 
 
 3lad)t, f , night. 
 
 9Jamen, pi. of 9Jame,' m., name. 
 
 92abel, ra., navel. 
 
 neden, to tease. 
 
 yitdtr, m., teaser. 
 
 ndben, to envy. 
 
 neirt, no. 
 
 S}k\t, n., nest. 
 
 9Jonc, f., (Mus.) the ninth ; 
 (Rom. church) nones. 
 
 ^Ota, f., (commerce) bill, state- 
 ment. 
 
 ober, adj., upper. 
 Dbc, f., ode. 
 
 SDfbnrf), m., monk. 
 
 SOJanndjen, dim. of aJiann, man. 
 
 SOi'effen, pi. of 3J?effe, f., mass, 
 
 (church) ; a fair. 
 Time, f., mine ; aRtnne, f., love, 
 mtnnen, to love. 
 3Kt)tt)e, f., myth ; SRitte, 
 
 center. 
 SD?oor, n., marsh, 
 mo'bcrn, to putrefy. 
 a)?unb, m., mouth. 
 mu|, pres. first pers. of mUffetl ; 
 
 ic^ mu|, I must. 
 SJiiide, f., gnat. 
 SUfiiden, pi. of mUe. 
 
 SRumme, f., a mask, mum ; Wtn= 
 
 mie, f., mummy, 
 iniinben, to disembogue. 
 3«oofc, pi. of ajJoo«. 
 
 nagen, to gnaw; 9taden, m., nape, 
 nii^eit, to sew. 
 
 nagt, pres. third pers. of nageti. 
 na^tnen, imperf. first and third 
 
 pers. pi. of nct^men, to take. 
 9Jebet, m., mist, fog. 
 ntden, to nod. 
 
 9Jtder, m., a nodder, winker, 
 inetben, to shun, avoid, 
 tteim, nine. 
 9ie^, n., net. 
 
 9fonne, f., nun. 
 
 ^JcOte, f., note, memorandum ; 
 9fot, f., need ; adv., necessary. 
 
 Dper, f., opera, 
 bbe, adj., desolate. 
 
152 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 Ober, or ; Dber, f., (river) Oder. 
 Dfcn, m., stove, oven ; (city) 
 
 Buda. 
 £)f)V, n., ear ; DijX, n., eye 
 
 (needle). 
 Drfaen, m., order ; badge or cross 
 
 of an order. 
 Drgan, n., organ, (a medium of 
 
 communication ). 
 Dft, m., east. 
 
 ^ac^t, f., lease, tenure. 
 
 ^0|ia, m., papa. 
 
 ^artei, f., party, faction. 
 
 $Ote, m , god-father, 
 ^fu^t, m., pool, puddle, 
 ^funb, n., pound. 
 ^tcE, m., cut, thrust ; ^tet, n., 
 spade (cards). 
 
 ^lan, m., plan, plot, 
 ^odie, f., mallet ; :t)0(^c! impera- 
 tive sing, of poi)in, to rap. 
 ^0l)(, m., nap (on cloth). 
 
 «Pofe, f., quill. 
 
 ^often, m., post, station, lot 
 
 (goods), etc. 
 lj>tai)kll, to boast, brag, 
 prangen, to shine, sparkle. 
 
 ^reifen, to praise. 
 
 ^rima, upper-class. 
 
 ^jurrcn, to pur. 
 
 puften, to blow, to breathe hard. 
 
 Quabbe, f., dew-lap. 
 Quo!, f., pain, torment. 
 
 Dtter, f., otter, 
 offeit, open. 
 
 it, he ; tf)tt, sooner. 
 
 orbnen, to regulate. 
 
 Orf'on, m., hurricane. 
 
 2lft, m., branch 
 
 ^aft, m., agreement. 
 
 '^appt, f., paste. 
 
 ^artte, f., lot (of goods) ; com- 
 pany. 
 
 ^ater, m., father (church). 
 
 ^fiil^t, n., bolster, pillow. 
 
 O^imb, m., the thing found. 
 
 ^ite, f., pike (lance); a grudge 
 (against) ; ^tqu6, m., (read 
 'ipife'), quilting, marseille. 
 
 'i|3lanc, f., tilt, covering. 
 
 ^ogge, f., toad : ^ode, f., pock. 
 
 ^ol, m., (Astron.) pole ; ^ote, 
 
 m., native of Poland, 
 ^offe, f., farce (Theater), 
 ^often, pi. of ^oft, f., post (mail). 
 
 ))ratlen, to bounce, rebound, 
 ^ronfen, pi. of ^ratite, f., (lions) 
 
 paws, clutches. 
 "ilSreu^cn, Prussia. 
 'i|3nme, f.,(Mus. and Typ.) prima, 
 ^oren, pi. of ^ore, f:, pore. 
 ^3U^en, to dress, adorn, trim. 
 
 Quap^Je, f., quab, tadpole. 
 Quatt, m., moving force (of the 
 water). 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 153 
 
 Qliotle, f., medusa, sea-nettle. Quetle, f., source, spring. 
 
 qualen, to torment, to afflict. queHett, to spring (water) ; Quet 
 
 ten, pi. of Quelle. 
 Ouar're, f., a squalling child. Quarre, n., (Milit.) square. 
 Quinta, the fifth class (school). Quinte, f., (Music) the fifth, 
 quitt, quit, even. Quttte, f., quince. 
 
 diabi, m., raven. 9ta}3pe, m., black horse. 
 
 Stabatt, m., discount. 9?abatte, f., facing (garments) ; 
 
 border-bed. 
 9?a(i)cn, m., throat. ' diadjt, f., revenge. 
 
 9tab, n., wheel. 9tat, m., advice. 
 
 ataben, m., (Bot.) darnel. raben, to sift, to root out ; raten, 
 
 to advise. 
 
 9?a^in, m., cream ; Siamtll, m., '3i6l)mm, m., frame. 
 
 ram. 
 
 ragmen, to frame ; to cream. ratlltnen, to ram. 
 
 dtain, m., green boundary of rein, clean, pure ; 9t^etn, (river) 
 
 fields. Rhine. 
 
 9tang, m., rank. 5Range, m., good for nothing 
 
 boy ; Siante, f., tendril. 
 
 rangen, to romp. ranfen, to climb (as a plant). 
 
 9?afen, m., sod ; cafen, to rage. Staffen, pi. of SRafje, f., race,» 
 
 breed. 
 
 9taft, f., rest. 9?eft, m., remnaiit. 
 
 9tate, f., installment; rate! imper. 9tatte, f., rat ; 3?0tte, f., rabble. 
 
 sing, of raten, to guess, 
 
 raten, to advise, to guess. 9?attett, pi. of Siatte. 
 
 rauben, to rob. Staupen, pi. of 9toupe, f., cater- 
 pillar. 
 
 9{aube, f., (Med.) itch ; dtanbt, dianti, f., (Bot.) rue. 
 
 f., scab. 
 
 3taufC, f., flax-comb, rack (in SRaufer, m., fighter. 
 
 stables). 
 
 riiunten, to evacuate, to clear retmen, to rhyme. 
 
 away. 
 
 ?lieii)in, m., rake, rack (clothes) ; rijd^cn, to revenge ; rec^nen, to 
 
 rec^en, to rake. reckon. 
 
 9tebe, f., speech. 5Reebc, f., road-stead. 
 
154 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 9?ate, pi., of $Rat, m., councilor, 
 rebcn, to speak. 
 9?fge, f., activity. 
 9?egen, m., rain. 
 SRe'gel, f., rule, precept. 
 9?etf, m., white-frost, hoop, ring. 
 dttiijttt also ^eigett, m., dance. 
 8Jet8, m., rice ; n., twig, scion, 
 reifeii, to travel ; reiBen, to tear, 
 
 to pluck. 
 ret|enb, adj., rapid (stream). 
 9?ennen, n., racing, 
 rtc^ten, to direct, to judge, etc. 
 9?tff, n., reef. 
 
 9ttnb, n., heifer. 
 
 9ftnten, m., great ring, buckle. 
 
 9tiimen, pi. of 5Rinne, f., gutter, 
 
 furrow. 
 9tt6, ra., a crack, gap ; MkQ, n., 
 
 ream ; 9ttefe, ra., giant. 
 $Ro(fen, m., distaff. 
 
 roben, to grub up. 
 
 dio\e, f., rose. 
 
 $R(J«lcin, (long o) n., little rose. 
 
 roftett, to rust. 
 
 JRiicfen, m., back. 
 
 5Riicf^atI, m., re-echo. 
 5y^ul)m, m., fame, glory, 
 ritljmett, to praise. 
 9tutir, f., dysentery. 
 JRutne, f., ruins 
 rupen, to soot. 
 9?Ute, f., rod, whip. 
 
 9ii)te, f., redness. 
 
 roten, to redden ; retten, to save. 
 
 rege, adj., lively, industrious. 
 
 regen, to stir. 
 
 9?ega(', n., shelf (books), stand. 
 
 retf, adj., ripe; Stetfe, f., maturity. 
 
 rei^en,to place in a row, to range. 
 
 3{etJ, m., charm, irritation. 
 
 reijen, to excite, to irritate, to 
 
 provoke, 
 retjenb, charming, 
 rennen, to run. 
 red)ten, to argue, to dispute, 
 rief, imperf. first and third pers. 
 
 of rufen, to call. 
 SRtnbe, f., bark (tree), 
 lingen, to wring, wrestle, strive, 
 rtnnen, to leak, to drop. 
 
 3ftg, m., a scratch ; 9?i^e, f.. 
 
 cleft, crevice, 
 atoggen, m., rye ; 9togen, m., 
 
 spawn, 
 rotten, V. refl , to collect together 
 
 for an evil purpose. 
 SRoffe, pi. of dio^, n., steed. 
 SRdBlein, (short O) n., little horse, 
 rotten, to roast, to toast ; riiften, 
 
 to prepare for. 
 riiden, to move, to march ; 
 
 riigen, to reprove. 
 i)fucEl)a(t, m., support, reserve. 
 dimn, ra., rura. 
 iliiemen, m., strap. 
 diotjV, n., reed, cane. 
 dinm, {., runic letter, 
 afufl'cu. pi. of 9\uffe, Russian. 
 9iOtte, f., gang. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 155. 
 
 ©aat, f., sowing, seed. 
 
 ©ai^e, f., thing ; ©agC, f., saying, 
 
 legend ; ®Sge,f., saw. 
 [Sen, to sow. 
 ©iier, m , sower, 
 fagen, to say ; fiigen, to saw. 
 ©ago, m., tapioca, 
 fatttg, {in compounds) having so 
 
 many strings. 
 'Baiht, f., salve. 
 ®amt (Sommet), m., velvet. 
 
 fang, innperf. of fittgen, to sing. 
 
 ®ang, m., song. 
 
 ®a^ or @affe, m., freeholder. 
 
 fauber, clean. 
 
 faubern, to clear ; fciubera, to 
 
 clean, 
 faugett, to suck. 
 ©OUte, f., pillar, 
 ©aunt, ra., hem, edge. 
 
 [aumeil, to hem, to tarry, 
 faufcn, to rush, to howl (wind). 
 Scene (©s), f., scene. 
 ©C^aben, m., loss, damage ; f(i^a= 
 
 ben, to harm, hurt. 
 ®d)oi, n., sheep. 
 ©d)afe, pi. of @(^af. 
 
 @i)afen, dat. pi. of @d)af. 
 @(f)aft, m., shaft. 
 
 fd)al, adj., stale, flat ; S^awl, 
 
 (read ©C^aal) m., shawl. 
 fif)alen, to plank, to wainscot. 
 |(J)a(en, to peel. 
 
 fott, satiated. 
 
 fage ! imperative sing, of fogett, 
 to say. 
 
 fe^en, to see. 
 
 @ef)er, m., seer. 
 
 faden, to sack, to bag. 
 
 <3agu, m., (Zool.) sai (monkey). 
 
 jettig, early, timely. 
 
 ©albei, f., (Bot.) sage. 
 
 \a.mt, together, (allefamt, all to- 
 gether). 
 
 fan!, imperf. of finfcn, to sink. 
 
 3anf, m., quarrel. 
 
 fa^, imperf. of fi^en, to sit ; 
 @a§, m., sentence, dregs, etc. 
 
 3auber, m., charm, spell, magic. 
 
 jaubern, to conjure. 
 
 faugen, to nurse (babe). 
 Seite, pi. of ©eil, n., rope. 
 3aiim, m., bridle, reins, re- 
 straint. 
 5Ciumen, to bridle, to restrain, 
 jaitfen, to touse. 
 3a()ne, pi. of ^oAjXi, m., tooth. 
 
 ©C^atten, m., shadow, shade. 
 
 ©C^off, n., (pTovinc.) tub. 
 f(i)a|fe, pres. first pers. of f(^affen, 
 
 10 create, work, 
 fc^affen, to create, to produce, 
 f^afft, pres. third pers. sing, of 
 
 fcbaffen. 
 3d)all, m., sound ; ©d)ale, f., 
 
 bowl, shell. 
 frfjaHcn, to sound, to echo, 
 fdjellen, to ring the bell. 
 
156 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 ®(f)arcn, pi. of @c^ar, f., host, 
 
 multitude, 
 fd^arren, to scrape, to scratch 
 
 (hens, horses), 
 fl^aucit, to look, to see, to gaze, 
 ©l^ouer, m., shower, shivering. 
 fdEiauern, to shiver, to shudder. 
 Sdietbe, f., disk, pane (of glass), 
 
 target, 
 fd^eitern, to wreck, 
 fdialten, to rule, 
 ©c^emet, m., foot-stool. 
 ©C^en!, m., butler. 
 
 (g^enfcn, pi. of ©i^enfe. 
 
 ®d)t(i)t, f., layer, stratum. 
 
 fd)tef, oblique, inclined. 
 @cf)tefe, f., obliquity, crooked- 
 ness, 
 ©(fltefer, m., slate. 
 
 ®cf)tlb,m., shield; n., sign-board; 
 f(i^ttt, pres. third pers. sing, of 
 
 fc^etten. 
 
 t(f)t(bern, to picture, to describe, 
 
 to stand sentry. 
 ©C^tmmel, m., mould, white horse, 
 fc^immeln, to mould, 
 ©l^tnbel, f., shingle. 
 fd)trren, to harness. 
 @tf)Iaf, m., sleep, 
 fdjlafejt, to sleep. 
 Sc^Iag, m., blow. 
 
 @d)Iage, f., a beater, tool. 
 jc£)tagen, to beat. 
 
 fd^aren, to flock together, 
 ©{^arren, m., shambles. 
 
 fc^euen, to shun, avoid, to shy. 
 
 @(i)eiier, f., barn, corn-house. 
 
 fdieuern, to scour. 
 
 ©(^etbe, f., sheath, line of separa- 
 tion. 
 
 f^etteln, to part the hair. 
 
 [l^etten, to scold, to reproach. 
 
 (S(i)emen, m. phantom. 
 
 ®(f)ente, f., tavern ; (fc^enf ein ! 
 fill the glass !). 
 
 ft^enfen, to present ; to fill, to 
 pour (etn[i^enfen). 
 
 \d)\dt, pres. third pers. sing, of 
 fd)t(fen, to send. 
 
 ®dE)iff, n., ship. 
 
 ©d^iffe, pi. of @cf)tff. 
 
 fdliefer, comp. of fii)tef ; @d)tffer, 
 
 m., sailor, 
 fi^telt, pres. third pers. sing, of 
 
 fd)teten, to look asquint. 
 
 fl^ittern, to vary colors, gtitter. 
 
 ©dimmer, m., glimmer, glimpse, 
 frfltmmcrn, to sparkle. 
 ©(f)tnber, m., flayer, 
 fl^iiren, to poke (fire), to stir up. 
 fc^taff, adj., lax, loose. 
 fd)Iaffen, to slacken, to relax. 
 ©dllacE, m., sediment ; adj., 
 
 drossy, 
 ©(^tade, f., dross, 
 ©djlacfen, pi. of ©djlade ; fc[)(af= 
 
 fen, to give dross. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 15T 
 
 fdjlammen, to depose or deposit 
 
 mud. 
 ©flange, f., serpent. 
 
 @d)Ie^e, f., wild-pfum. 
 
 (Sd)tetfeu, pi. of ®(|(etfe, f., tie, 
 
 bow. 
 (Sif)Ieim, m., slime. 
 (3tf|Iep)3en, pi. of @d)lep^e, f., 
 
 trail. 
 ®^Io§, n., lock, castle ; fc^tog, 
 
 iiriperf. of fcl)ltc|en, to lock, 
 ©l^melj, m., enamel ; (gcfimolj, 
 
 n., grease. 
 ©Comers, m., pain. 
 f(f)mtegen, to bend, to cling to. 
 @cf)ntU(f, m.. ornament, jewels. 
 ®6)nad, m., chit-chat. 
 
 ®(f)naU5e, f., snout, muzzle ; 
 
 [(f)naU5en, to snarl (at), 
 fi^netben, to cut. 
 SlilueUe, f., rapidity, rapids, 
 ©c^neflen, pi. of <S6)mUe. 
 ©^Itttt, m., cut, incision. 
 ®d)nittc, f., slice. 
 ©C^nupfen, m., cold(inthehead). 
 fi^niireit, to string, to lace. 
 fd)oit, already. 
 f(f)onen, to spare, 
 [(^opfen, to tuft. 
 ©diopfer, m., creator. 
 
 @d)Op^ett, m., measure for wine. 
 ©(i)0|, m., (long 0), pi. @d)8|e, 
 lap. 
 
 ©(^Ote, f., pod. 
 
 fdjlcimmen, to clear of mud ; 
 
 fd)lemmen, to carouse. 
 fd)ltutfe, adj. fdjlanf, slender, thin, 
 
 (fdjianfe 3)ame). 
 ©d)let^e,f., tench (fish); ©Colder, 
 
 m., veil. 
 fd)(etfen, to whet, to drag. 
 
 @d)tamm, m., mud. 
 
 fd)(ep)3en, to drag, to be bur- 
 dened. 
 
 ©(i^(o§e, f., hail-stone ; ©c^Iu|, 
 m., close, end, conclusion. 
 
 ©dimetjC, f., melting. 
 
 ©d)ma§, m., smack, a loud kiss, 
 fi^miidcn, to adorn, decorate. 
 fd)mml, adj., spruce, neat. 
 ©C^ttafe, f., gnat ; ©djltede, f., 
 
 snail. 
 fd^nttUjeit, to snuff (candle) ; to 
 
 blow (the nose). 
 I'c^neten, to snow, 
 ©dinalle, f., buckle. 
 fd)nctlen, to jerk, to fillip (one). 
 fd)nttt,iraperf. of fd^ttetbeti, to cut. 
 ©C^nitter, m., reaper. 
 f(^niipfen, to snuff. 
 fd)nurren, to rattle, to hum, to pur. 
 fd)iJn, beautiful. 
 fd)bncn, to clarify (wine), 
 fc^ijpfett, to draw water. 
 ©d)Opfer, m., one who draws 
 
 water from a well. 
 ©(^U)3pen, m., shed (for cart). 
 ©d)OB, m., (short o), pi. ©^(iffe, 
 
 shoot ; story (house); fd)o|, 
 
 imperf. of fd)iegen, to shoot. 
 ©C^Otte, m., Scotchman. 
 
158 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 ifc{)ragen, to cut oblique. 
 
 Sdjranf, m., cupboard, chest. 
 Stored, m., terror, fright. 
 @(^UppC, f., scale (fish). 
 ®d)nppia, pi. of (Sc^uwe- 
 
 !grf)U|, ra., shot. 
 
 (Sd)lDamm, m., sponge, mush- 
 room. 
 
 ®(^tt)ang, m., swinging motion ; 
 fc^toang, imperf. of fi^rttngen, 
 to swing. 
 
 fdjroanfen, to waver, to stagger. 
 
 (Si^lDar, n., abscess. 
 
 fd)tt)aren, to suppurate. 
 
 jif)tt)drig, suppurative. 
 
 fc^roarjen, to blacken. 
 
 (Sdjmeife, m., sweat. 
 
 fc^toetcn, to smoulder. 
 
 fdiroeinmett, to float (wood) ; to 
 water (horses). 
 
 (Sl^Wtnbet, m., dizziness ; swin- 
 dle. 
 
 (S(J)tt)iitc, f., sultriness. 
 
 ©eele, f., soul. 
 
 ©cclen, pi. of @eele. 
 
 ©egett/ m., blessing. 
 
 ®eI)Cr, m., seer, prophet. 
 
 ®el)ne, f., sinew ; ®6ijm, pi. of 
 ®o^n, son. 
 
 fe^nen, v. refl., to long for ; <Biij' 
 nen, pi. of ©e^ne ; n., longing. 
 
 fcib, pres. second pers. pi. of 
 fetn, to be. 
 
 Setbe, f., silk ; (geite, f., side. 
 
 fctl)en, to filter. 
 
 Setfc, pi. of <5eU, n., rope. 
 
 @(^rogen, m., trestle, stall 
 
 (butcher). 
 ©C^ranfe, f., bar, barrier. 
 @tf)ri(I, m., flaw, cleft. 
 @cf)Uppe, f., sKovel. 
 ft^U^Jpen, to scale fish ; [(^iippeil, 
 
 to shovel 
 @C^U^, m., protection, shelter. 
 fi^tDamm, imperf. of fififttmtnen, 
 
 to swim, 
 ©djftanf, m., a prank ; fcf)Wan!f 
 
 adj., pliant, flexible. 
 
 f(^iD(jnten, (or f(f)menfen) to rinse 
 
 (glasses), 
 firmer, adj., heavy? hard. 
 f(f)tt)C)rcn, to swear 
 fc^Wierig, difficult. 
 fcflWaljcn, to talk, prattle, 
 ©dinjetj, f:, Switzerland, 
 fc^icellen, to swell. 
 fd)niimmen, to swim. 
 
 fd)lt)inben, to disappear, vanish. 
 
 ©dimtele, f., callosity, 
 ©cite, pi, of ®Oat, m., hall. 
 ;ial)Ien, to count, 
 fngen, to saw. 
 [el)l", very much. 
 ©Cline, ni., cow-keeper (Switzer- 
 land). 
 
 (SB^nen, dat. pi. of ®o^n ; '@en= 
 
 nen, pi. of ©enne. 
 fett, since ; ^dt, f , time. 
 
 @ClttC, f., string (mus. instr.) 
 jetfien, to accuse. 
 3eile, f., line (book). 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 159 
 
 ©eiten, pi. of 2eite ; ©aiten, pi. S>^iUn, pi. of 3eit. 
 
 of Satte. 
 
 fengen, to singe. fentcn, to sink, 
 
 ©enter, m., one who sinks ; layer, ©iinger, m., singer. 
 
 (plant). 
 
 Sefel, m., (Bot.) seseli. ©effel, m., chair, 
 
 fic^ern, to secure. fidern, to trickle, ooze. 
 
 fie(f)ett, to languish under disease. fiegen, to vanquish, 
 
 fieben, to seeth, boil. ©ubett, ra., (®iib) south, 
 
 ©teget, n., seal (document) ; 3*^9^'' ™> brick ; SH^^/ ™-: 
 
 ©t(^el, f., sickle. rein, 
 
 ©tel, n., sluice. B^^^/ " . aim, end. 
 
 ©tele, f., horse-collar. Si^dt, pi. of ^tel. 
 
 [ielen, to lead off (water) ; ©tlen, |uf)ten, to wallow ; jtetett, to aim 
 
 ni , (Myth.) Silenus. at. 
 
 fittgen, to sing. finfen, to sink ; jittfeil/ to adorn 
 
 with branches. 
 
 ©inn, m., sense 3™"- "•> ''"• 
 
 ©tnne, pi. of ©inn. 3^ni, f., battlement. 
 
 finnen, to meditate, muse. Jtnnen, to tin. 
 
 ©ippe, f., kin, relatives. B^PP^' f-' mavis (bird). 
 
 Si^, m., seat. B^ij, m., printed calico, chintz. 
 
 ©ol, (Mas.) sol G.; foU, shall ; ©oil, n., (Com.) debit ; ^olt, m., 
 
 inch, toll. 
 
 ©O^Ie, f., sole. ©0le,f., salt water (from a spring). 
 
 foUen, to be obliged, (wir [ollen, jotlen, to pay duty. 
 
 we shall), 
 
 ©onne, f., sun ; ©O^ne, dat. sing. 3""^/ f-i zone. 
 
 of ©O^n, son. 
 
 ©^3an, m., thin piece of wood. ©pann, n., team ; m., instep of 
 
 human foot ; ©|ionne, f.. span, 
 
 fparen, to spare, save. ©^jarren, m., rafter, 
 
 ©^ag, m., joke ; fpa|en, to joke. <Spai^, m., sparrow ; ©^aljen, pi. 
 
 \pat, late. ©^Ot, m., spar, spavin, 
 
 ©peere, pi., of ©peer, m., spear. ©:|3crre, f., shutting, embargo. 
 
 ©pte|, m., spear, javelin. p^, pointed ; <Sp\^, m., a dog. 
 
 f^jrengen, to force open, to j^rtngen, to leap, to break sud- 
 
 sprinkle. denly (glass). 
 
 ©pro|, m., sprout, offspring. ©:proffc, f., rundle. 
 
160 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 'Split, 111., disturbance, spook. Spitde, f., spittle. 
 
 fpufen, to haunt. \pndtn, to spit. 
 
 \pVLkn, to spool. fpiilen, to wash (glasses); f^ielen, 
 
 to play. 
 
 Star, m., starling ; cataract, ©tar, m., ram ; ftarr, stiff, rigid, 
 (eye). 
 
 @taot, m., state, pomp ; ©tobt, Statt, f., place, abode ; ftatt, 
 
 f., city. instead. 
 
 ©tal^I, m., steel ; ftO^I, imperf. StaK, m., stall, stable, 
 of ftel^Ien, to steal. 
 
 <£tajtb, m., stand, standing, po- ftanb, imperf. of fte^en, to stand, 
 sition. 
 
 (gtaub, m., dust. Staupe, f., a disease, flogging. 
 
 ftauben, to raise dust, to free ftaupcn, to flog, 
 from dust. 
 
 fte^en, to sting, prick. ftecEen, to stick ; Steden, m., 
 
 stick, cane. 
 
 <gtetg,m.,('®teg) path, foot-path, ©teige, f., (Stiege) stair, ascent. 
 
 fte[)Ien, to steal. fta^Ien, to steel, Jiarden. 
 
 fteUcn, to place, set. fltUeti, to still, calm. 
 
 Stellc, f., place, spot. gttiflc, pi. of Stall, m., stable. 
 
 ftemmen, to stem, dam (water), ftimincn, to tune, to be in tune, 
 
 to agree. 
 
 (gtcnge, f.. top-mast ; Stangc, f., (gtengel, stalk, boll, 
 pole. 
 
 <Stern, m., star. €ttrn, f., fore-head. 
 
 <Stte(, m., handle, stick (broom), Sttl/ m., style, manner of writ- 
 stalk, ing ; ftttt, still. 
 
 ftodcn, prop, to stagnate. ftocEett, to provide witji sticks. 
 
 ftrofen, to punish. fttaffen, to tighten. 
 
 gtrcinge, pi. of Strang, m., rope. Strenge, f., severity. 
 
 ©tra^e, f., street, strait. Strafe, (StrajjC) f., waste-book, 
 
 waste-silk. 
 
 (Streif(en), m., stripe, band, strip. Stl'dfe, f., instrument for chan- 
 neling, fluting. 
 
 •Strid), m., stroke, line. Stl'icE, rope, cord. 
 
 ^tttU, f., room, chamber. etubbe, f., (or (gtubbeit, m.,) . . . 
 
 stump, stub. 
 
 gtum^f, m., stump (of a tree). ftum|)f, adj., blunt, dull (knives). 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 161 
 
 ftU^en, to butt, spruce, clip. ftii^eit, to support, recline. 
 
 Sucftc, f., search. fuc^e ! imperative sing, of fud)en, 
 
 to seek. 
 
 €u(i)t, f., (short u) disease, dis-' fu^t, (long u) pres. third pers. 
 
 temper. sing, of fud)en. 
 
 Sub, m., seething, a brewing. <£ub, m., south. 
 
 Swmmen, pi. of Summe, sum, fummen, to hum, buzz; to tingle 
 
 amount. (ears). 
 
 <£mibe, pi. of (gunb, m., strait ; (gottbe, f., (Chir.) probe ; (Mar.) 
 
 eiinbe, f., sin. sounding-lead; 
 
 Xatt, m., (Mus.) time, measure, tagt, from tagen to dawn; C8 tagt, 
 
 it dawns, the day breaks. 
 
 5ralg, m., tallow. 5talf, m., talc. 
 
 Zanm, f., fir-tree ; Zmnt, f., Slonne, f., cask, barrel, ton, tun. 
 
 barn-floor. 
 
 STaffe, f., cup ; "Hafti, f., key STa^e, f.. paw, claw. 
 
 (piano), 
 
 taften, to touch. Jaften, pi. of S:afte. 
 
 tauc^en, to dive, to duck. taugen, to be fit for. 
 
 taufdien, to exchange. tciufrfien, to deceive. 
 
 Za^, (layuS), m., yew. 2;aje, f., set price, tax, rate. 
 
 'Xeid), m., pond. 2;eig, m., dough. 
 
 Seufe, f., (Min.) depth. Sloufe, f., baptism. 
 
 S^eitl, m., bloom (a mass of crude 2;eil, m. and n., volume, part, 
 
 iron). portion, 
 
 t^attic^, adj. or adv., actual, vio- tdbltd), adj. or adv., mortal, fatal, 
 
 lent. deadly. 
 
 Xi)OX\, m., ciay. SEon, m , tune, sound, tone. 
 
 5E^ran, m., train-oil. !Jl)ron, m. throne. 
 
 Zi)UV, f., door. Zkt, n., animal. 
 
 2;ob, m., death. tot, dead. ' 
 
 Zvab, m., trot. Ztapp, m., trap, (a rock). 
 
 Slreffen, n., battle, fight. trcffen, to hit, strike. 
 
 Srieb, m., instinct, impulse. trteb, imperf. of tretben, to drive. 
 
 Shrift, f., drift, herd, pasturage, trieft, pres. third pers. sing, of 
 
 trifft, pres. third pers. sing, of trtefen, to drip. 
 
 treffcn. 
 
 Ztitt, m., step, pace. tritt, imperf. of treten, to tread. 
 
162 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 jUrog, m., trough ; S^ritg, m., 
 
 deceit. 
 STro^, m., troop, baggage (of an 
 
 army). 
 %X0%, m., spite, stubborness. 
 JTrumjjf, m., trump (at cards). 
 2;rm3^m.,body of soldiers, flock. 
 2;Und)e, f., whitewash. 
 S^Ute, f., cornet (of paper); horn 
 
 (to blow). 
 STufi^, m., fanfare. 
 
 trug, imperf. of tragen, to bear. 
 
 35rU(I, m., pressure, print. 
 2^roft, m., comfort, consolation. 
 
 tro^, prep, in spite of. 
 5Lriunt))^, m., triumph. 
 ^tUppt, f., troop, company. 
 5Cunfe, f., sauce. 
 S^iite, f., cornucopia, paper bag. 
 
 ZVL\6)i, {., Indian ink. 
 
 ii'berfe^en, to set across, 
 ijbttg, customary. 
 U^r, f., clock.watch; Dfir, n., ear. 
 Um'fa^ren, drive by around about 
 
 way ; run down by driving. 
 Ultt'gel^eit, have intercourse with. 
 um'graben, to turn up the ground. 
 Um'pngcn, put on, to hang anew, 
 um'fletben, to dress anew. 
 um'Iegen, to place differently, to 
 
 careen, shift, 
 um'nftl^en, to sew (over) again. 
 um':padEen, to repack, 
 um'^jflanjen, to replant. 
 
 Um'^jftaftem, to pave (over) again, 
 um'reiten, to ride over (down), 
 um'fiigejt, to saw down. 
 um'fd6tffen, to transship. 
 um'i^Utten, to overturn. 
 
 um'fe^en, to transplant, to set 
 
 otherwise, 
 um'fpannen, to change horses. 
 Um'fptnnen, to spin anew, 
 um'frrtngen, to veer, (the wind). 
 Utn'ftetten, to place in a different 
 
 manner. 
 
 iiberfe'ljen, to translate. 
 
 iibrig, left, remaining. 
 
 Ur or 3luero(|8, m., (Zool.) bison. 
 
 Utnfa'{)Vett, to sail round, circum- 
 navigate, drive round. 
 
 untge'Ijen, to go round, to evade. 
 
 umgra'ben, to dig round about. 
 
 uml)a'ngen, to hang round. 
 
 UtnHet'ben, hang round, decorate. 
 
 umle'gcn, to lay round, to sur- 
 round with. 
 
 umna'fien, to sew round, to hem. 
 
 Um^od'cn, pack (all) round. 
 
 umpftan'setl, to plant round. 
 
 umpfla'ftern, to pave round. 
 
 umret'ten, to ride round. 
 
 umfa'gen, to saw (all) around. 
 
 umfi^i'ffen, to sail round. 
 
 um[ii)iit'ten, to cover round about 
 (with earth). 
 
 umfe'ljen, to set, put, or plant 
 round about. 
 
 umi>an'nen, to span about. 
 
 UmfjJin'nen, to spin (all) around. 
 umf^Jritt'gen, to leap, jump round. 
 umftel'Ien, to beset, surround 
 with. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 163 
 
 um'tDcl^en, to blow down. 
 
 um'toerfen, to upset, capsize. 
 Ullt'lt)t(feIn,windorwrap up again, 
 um'jte'^en, to remove, to change 
 
 one's clothes, 
 un'gar, not sufficiently boiled. 
 un'ter:^otten, to hold under. 
 
 3Safe, f., vase. 
 
 tjerolten, to grow obsolete ; t)er= 
 
 l^alten, hold back, 
 oerattlaffen, to cause, to occasion. 
 
 tierarbettett, to manufacture into, 
 
 to work up. 
 OerauScjaben, to pay away, spend, 
 tterbaden, to consume in baking. 
 
 cerbannen, to banish, 
 derbauen, to obstruct by build- 
 ing ; to build badly. 
 Oerbetett, to pass in prayer. 
 
 oerbeugen, to make a bow. 
 
 oerbteten, to forbid. 
 
 Oerbilbcn, miseducate, form fault- 
 ily. 
 
 SBerbitbung, miseducation, faulty 
 formation. 
 
 Oerbtnbcn, connect, dress (a 
 wound); berbiinbeil, to confed- 
 erate. 
 
 Derbtafen, to recover one's 
 breath ; blow (glass). 
 
 OerbO^ren, to bore wrongly, to 
 fasten with pins (carpenter). 
 
 umtte'^en, to blow around, (po- 
 etically) to inspire. 
 
 ummer'fen, to throw round. 
 
 umroid'ctn, to wrap round, 
 umjie'^en, to overcast (with 
 
 clouds). 
 Un'gor, (nasal n) Hungafrian. 
 unter^aPten, converse, support. 
 
 ^^ofe, f., phase. 
 
 33eri)a(ten, n., demeanor ; borl&at 
 
 ten, hold before. 
 Borantaffen, permit to pass on be- 
 fore, 
 tiorarbeiten, to work before one, 
 
 to prepare work. 
 borauSgebeit, to give in advance. 
 UVpadm, to pack (up), pack 
 
 wrongly, to lose by packing, 
 borba^nen, to clear the way for. 
 Dorbauen, to build before, take 
 
 precaution against. 
 Dorbeten, to pray before, to lead 
 
 in prayers. 
 Borbeugen, to bend forward, to 
 
 prevent, obviate, 
 berbttten, to deprecate; tiXUt' 
 
 tern, to embitter. 
 Dorbttben, to model, to school. 
 
 SBorbtlbung, f., modeling, school- 
 ing. 
 
 borbinben, to tie before (on), to 
 put on. 
 
 oorblafen, play before ; berblaffen, 
 
 to turn pale, ^g. to expire. 
 Dorbo^ren, to bore before. 
 
1G4 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 oerbotcn, p. p. of oevbieten, to 
 
 prohibit. 
 t)ei'bve(i)en, to commit a wrong, 
 
 crime ; 33erbrec^eit, n., crime, 
 tierbringcn, to spend, squander. 
 95ei"bac^t, m , suspicion. 
 t)Cl"baii)ttV(, suspicioOs. 
 Cerbammen, to condemn. 
 
 cevbecfen, to cover. 
 Dei'bvciltgcu, push away, supplant. 
 Bcrbienen, to earn. 
 Derblirften, to die with thirst. 
 loex-edtn, to get all his branches 
 
 (stag), 
 teretgneu, to transfer to another, 
 oer^dnigcn, to unite, join. 
 Bei"=eil"en, to cover with iron ; 
 
 glaciate. 
 Cereitcln, to frustrate. 
 Cevfol^ven, to drive the wrong 
 
 way, to deal with. 
 
 93ei'faII,ra., decline, deterioration. 
 Oertallcn, fall into ruins ; fall off. 
 berfaffen, to compose (a book). 
 
 Berfed)ten, to defend, to content, 
 to plead one's cause. 
 
 SSerfec^ter, m., defender, cham- 
 pion. 
 
 tJerfil^reil, lead astray, seduce. 
 
 Oevgallen, to change into gall. 
 
 Oevgcbeit, to give away, to for- 
 give. 
 
 Bcrgebttcf), vain, pardonable. 
 
 t)erge[)en, to pass away, to van- 
 ish ; SBerge^en, n., ofifence. 
 
 3}orboteii, pi. of SSerbote, m., fore- 
 runner, 
 oorbredjen, to break forth. 
 
 Borbnngen, to bring forward. 
 
 ii3orbad), n., projecting roof. 
 
 bebcitfitig, considerate. 
 
 Berbammen, to dam up ; Berbam= 
 itievn, to die away in twilight. 
 
 Bcrbtrfen, to thicken. 
 
 Borbl"angen,pressor push forward. 
 
 Berbiiimcn, to thin, dilute. 
 
 BCrbiiftern, to darken, to obscure. 
 
 Ber=red'en, to die (vulgar expres- 
 sion). 
 
 Borcigneit, to reserve. 
 
 be=feintgeu, to make clean. 
 
 Devsfeifen, to go on a journey. 
 
 Bereitcnt, to suppurate. 
 58ertat)ven, n., procedure ; Bor= 
 
 faljrcn, to drive up to ; i^or= 
 
 fa^ren, ancestors, 
 i^orfalt, m., occurrence. 
 Borfallen, to occur. 
 Borfoffen, to preconceive ; BOf' 
 
 gefajjte 93?etnung,preconceived 
 
 opinion. 
 BorfeiJlten, to fight in the van ; 
 
 to fence before one. 
 i'orfei^ter, m., first combatant, 
 
 usher in a fencing school. 
 Borfu()ven, bring out, to produce. 
 Bergalkn, (greube) embitter (joy). 
 BOVgebcn, to give points, to pro- 
 pose, to pretend. 
 Boigeblii), pretended, would be. 
 Borgel)en, to go on, to go before. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 165 
 
 cergraben, to bury. 
 
 Bevgreifen, seize wrongly, violate. 
 t)eri}a(feu, to mince, to chop up. 
 CCl"£)atlen, to die away (sounds); 
 
 Oert^alteit, to hold back, to be 
 
 (in a certain state), 
 i^cr^att, m., fact, circumstance. 
 
 t)ei"l)angeit, to cover with some- 
 thing (by hanging). 
 t)erf)eipen/ to promise, 
 oertaiifen, to sell. 
 
 »ertcl)reil, to traffic, to have in- 
 tercourse with. 
 Cerflingen, to die away (sounds). 
 
 Oertommen, perish, go to ruin. 
 oerlabcn, to load. 
 SSerlabimg, f., shipping, 
 oerlangen, to desire, wish. 
 Bertaffen, to leave, to forsake. 
 33erlauf, m., lapse (of time), 
 
 course, flowing off. 
 3SerIaut, m., rumor, (common) 
 
 report. 
 
 Cerlegett, transplace, postpone, 
 to publish ; damaged by lying; 
 fi^. perplexed. 
 
 S3erlcger, m., publisher. 
 
 Berleiben, to be sick of some- 
 thing ; render disagreeable. 
 
 Bedcjen, read aloud, read wrong- 
 ly- 
 
 SSerkfung, f., reading aloud. 
 
 Berte^t, adj., wounded, injured. 
 
 Dorgraben, to dig before ; 33or= 
 graben, m., first ditch, fosse. 
 
 Borgreifen, forestall, encroach. 
 
 Beri)atcil, to fasten with hooks. 
 
 Bor^olten, to hold before, to re- 
 proach. 
 
 23or[)aIt, m., remonstrance, re- 
 proach ; SSor^alle, f., vestibule. 
 
 Borljangen, to hang (up) before, 
 to put on (a lock). 
 
 Bertjeijen, to bum up (in heating). 
 
 Bcrtaufen, to buy before others, 
 to forestall. 
 
 Borteljren, to provide, (in order 
 to prevent). 
 
 BortUngen, to sound stronger, 
 to be more audible. 
 
 Borfommen, come forth; occur. 
 
 Bortaben, to summon. 
 
 25ortabltUg, f., summons. 
 
 Borlangen, to reach forth. 
 
 Borlaj'fen, admit, give access to. 
 
 23orIauf, first runnings, unpress- 
 ed wine. 
 
 Bortaut, adj., clamorous, saucy; 
 33oi"laut, m., predominant 
 sound. 
 
 Borlcgen, to lay before, to sub- 
 mit. 
 
 SBoi'Icger, m., helper, carver (at 
 
 the table.) 
 Berleiten, to lead astray, mislead. 
 
 Bortcfetl, to read to, to lecture. 
 
 aSortefung, f., lecture. 
 Borte^t, last but one. 
 
166 
 
 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 Berttegen, to spoil by lying too 
 
 long, 
 bertocfien, to provide with holes. 
 Cerma^en, to bequeath. 
 
 cerma^Iett, to grind up ; oermtu 
 
 ten, to paint up. 
 Ceniieffen, to survey ; adj., dar- 
 ing ; oermiffen, to miss, 
 oermijgen, to be able. 
 texntiftntn, to hear, to perceive, 
 
 to examine (at court), 
 tjerptaubern, to chatter away, to 
 
 let out a secret, 
 tierpuften, to recover breath. 
 23errat, m., treason, treachery. 
 t)erre(i)nen, to place to account, 
 
 to miscalculate, 
 oerreben, to make a slip of the 
 
 tongue. 
 Oerrennett, to bar one's passage, 
 tjerrinnen, to run off (out), to pass 
 
 away. 
 t)errt(f)ten, to perform. 
 Dcrriiden, to derange, to displace. 
 
 oerrufen, to defame, to decry. 
 
 Cerfagen, to deny one's self a 
 thing, to refuse, miss fire (of 
 a gun) ; Der[Sgett, to saw up or 
 wrongly. 
 
 S3erfal3, m., pawning, pledge. 
 
 Derf(^alen, to furnish with hand- 
 les. 
 
 Derfc^icfen, to send (away). 
 
 t)erf(^te6en, to shove away, to 
 derange, postpone. 
 
 Ijerfi)tebett, different. 
 
 tiodtegen, to lie or be before ; 
 Oorlijgen, to tell one a lie. 
 
 oertocEen, to allure. 
 
 Dormoc^ett, to show how to do ; 
 to impose upon ; SSormageit, 
 m., crop (birds). 
 
 »eimal){en, to marry (to) ; t)or= 
 ntalen, to show how to paint. 
 
 DOrmeffen, to measure out to (be- 
 fore); Dermtf(f)en, mix, mingle. 
 
 33ennogen, n., faculty, wealth. 
 
 Coine^men, to undertake, to take 
 up. 
 
 Dorptaubern, to chat to. 
 
 Oerpu^cn, to squander on dress. 
 iBorrat, m., provision, stock. 
 Dorredinen, to count before, to 
 
 enumerate, 
 toorreben, to talk to, to make 
 
 believe, 
 oorrennen, to run before, 
 oerrtngern, to diminish. 
 
 Dorrtcfiten, to prepare. 
 
 DOrviicEen, advance, move for- 
 ward. 
 
 Borrufen, to call forth, up. 
 
 Dorfagen, to dictate to ; tierjagen, 
 to despair. 
 
 3Sor[a|5, m., design, purpose. 
 Deri'djatten, to cease sounding. 
 
 »orf(^tcfen, to send before. 
 Corf(|teben, to push forward. 
 
 Derfcf)etben, to expire. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 167 
 
 berfditffen, to ship. Derfd)tl|cn, cover or fill with 
 
 reeds. 
 berfct|te|en, to fade, to exhaust t)Orfli)ic|en, to hem, to advance 
 
 in shooting. (money). 
 
 t)erf(f)tafctt, sleep away, miss by Derfc{)laffett, to render or to get 
 
 sleeping ; adj., sleepy. flabby. 
 
 25erfd)lag, m., partition. 23or[(i)(ag, m., a motion, propo- 
 
 sition, first stroke. 
 ttcrfc{)Iagen, to fasten with nails, oorf(i)Iagen, to propose. 
 
 to board up ; adj., cunning. 
 berfi)netben, to carve (meat) ; t)Ol-f(^neiben, to cut before, cut 
 
 to prune, to cut wrongly. first. 
 
 oerfi^onen, to spare. Berfi^onern, to embellish. 
 
 t)er[d)ragen, to surround with Oerfcf)r(igen, to slope. 
 
 trestles. 
 
 t)erfd)rei&en, to prescribe, to write tiorfcf)retben, to give a copy, to 
 
 wrongly. dictate. 
 
 SSerfc^ub, m., delay. 3Sorf(|ub, m., assistance, aid. 
 
 t)er[^iitten, to spill, to bury. t)Orfd)Utten, to pour out before, 
 
 to give fodder, 
 
 tierfc^toa^cn, to chat away. borfctinjal^en, to chat to, to make 
 
 believe. 
 
 t)erfif)n)tmmen, to vanish by de- Oorf(^«tmmen, to swim before, 
 
 grees. to outswim. 
 
 tierfc^lDOren, to forswear, to con- Borfdimbren, to swear before, to. 
 
 spire. 
 
 Berfe^en, see wrongly, to supply. Borfel)en, to foresee, to take heed. 
 
 Berfe^en, to displace, to promote. BOrfc^ett, to set or place before, 
 
 to set over. 
 
 Ber[eiigen, to singe. Bcrfenfen, to sink. 
 
 Berfieben, to sift. Bcrfieben, to consume in boiling. 
 
 Berfi^cn, sit away, lose by sitting. Borfi^ett, to preside. 
 
 Berfpannen, to overstrain, to Borfpannen, to put horses etc. 
 
 harness on wrongly. to. 
 
 Berfptclen, to loose (at play). Borfptelen, play before, prelude. 
 
 Berfpreif)cn, to promise. Borfprec^en, to give a call, to 
 
 speak before one. 
 
 Berfpringen, to sprain by leaping. Borfprtngetl, to jut, to rush forth. 
 
168 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 SBerftanb, m., sense, understand- 3Sorftanb, ra., director, prin- 
 
 ing. cipal. 
 
 Ceiftiinbig, sensible, intelligent. Oerftanbtii^, intelligible, distinct, 
 tterftci^en, to dam, mend. tierfteden, to hide. 
 
 Uerfte^en, to understand. DorfteI)en, stand before ; manage, 
 
 tterftetlen, to displace, to dis- Oorftetleti, to place before, to 
 
 guise represent, to fancy. 
 
 SSerftellung, f., disguise, pretense. SSorftellung, f., representation, 
 
 performance. 
 OeiftOpfcn, to obstruct, to plug up. borftopfen, to stuff before. 
 35erfto|, m., blunder, mistake. SSorfto^, m., edging (tailor), pro- 
 
 jection. 
 OerftO^en, to disinherit, to reject. tiorfto^en, push forward, to edge, 
 berftrtden, knit up, to entangle. Borftrtdetl, to show how to knit, 
 berfu^en, to try, to tempt. borfuc^ett, to search for, bring 
 
 forward by searching, 
 bertanjen, to spend with or in bortanjcn, to lead in dancing. 
 
 dancing, 
 bert^un, to waste, spend. bortf}Un, i)ut before, to disting- 
 
 uish. 
 aSerirog, m., treaty, agreement. 3Sortrag, m., (Rhet.) delivery, 
 
 recital, 
 bertragcn, to carry off, to agree, bortragen, to recite, to propose, 
 bertreten, to stand in one's way, bortteten, to step forth. 
 
 to act for. 
 berurteileii, to condemn or sen- borurtdlen, to prejudge. 
 
 tence. 
 bertoatteit, to manage. bormatteit, to predominate, 
 
 beribanbt, related. 3Sorroanb,m., outer- wall, pretext, 
 
 berroe^rett, to hinder, oppose. born)eI)Ven, to guard against, be- 
 
 fore hand. 
 25crmet3, m., rebuke. 3Sortbet§, m., passport, letter of 
 
 credence. 
 berJbetfen, to reprove, to expa- borJbcifen, to show forth, pro- 
 
 triate; berJbaifen, to become duce. 
 
 an orphan, destitute. 
 
 33cribetfung, reference, banish- aSortbdfung, f., showing (forth). 
 
 ment. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 169 
 
 tierWerfen, to reject, to throw in DorWerfen, to throw before, to 
 
 a wrong place. reproach. 
 
 BerlDUnben, to wound, injure. OerlDUnbevn, to astonish. 
 
 Bersetd)nen, to register. oorjeidinen, draw before, trace 
 
 out. 
 
 tierjte^en, distort ; spoil (child- dorsie^cn, to draw forth, to pre- 
 
 ren). fer. 
 
 SBerjug, m., delay. SSorjltg, m., preference. 
 
 33etter, m., cousin, relation; 3Bet= fetter, adj., comp. of fctt, fat; 
 
 tei", m., wagerer ; n., weather. 33atei', pi. of SSatet. 
 
 Ciet, much. fiet, itnperf. of fallen, to fall, 
 
 tjter, four. iDtr, we. 
 
 Ooran, before, in front ; 23oraI)n, icorou, whereby, whereon. 
 
 m., great ancestor. 
 
 BorauS, before, in advance. tt)Orau§, from what. 
 
 Bor^abett, to intend, to have on 25orf|aben, n., intention, plan. 
 
 (an apron). 
 
 Borf)er, before. ttoljer, whence. 
 
 Bor^ttt/ a little while ago. Wof)tn, whither. 
 
 SSorlage, f., what is laid before. 25orIager, n., front of a camp. 
 
 SBorna^me, f., intention, design. SSomamc, m., christian name. 
 
 BorneJim, of rank. Borne^ltien, to intend, undertake. 
 
 Borfte(^etl, to pierce before Borflecfen, to stick, put, fix before 
 
 (holes), to jut. (in front). 
 
 toad), awake. ^(^d), n., drawer, shelf, profes- 
 sion. 
 
 Wac^eit, to wake ; ttageit, to focI)en, to form into compart- 
 venture. ments. 
 
 ftadeltt, to waggle. facEeln, to flare, to trifle ; gadeln, 
 
 pi. of Sadel, f., torch. 
 
 SSBabc, f., calf (of the leg). 2Bate, f., seine, large net ; SBatte, 
 
 f., wadding. 
 
 SEBaben, pi. of SBabe. iBOtcn, to wade. 
 
 SBagen, m., wagon. JfiBaogeii, pi. of SBage,* f., scales. 
 
 *NoTE.— To avoid misunderstanding, „5®age scales," may be 
 written with aa in the plural and in some compounds ; thus : 
 SBaageitfabrtf, scale-factory, but : SBagcnfabrif, wagon -factory, etc. 
 
170 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 SBa^I, f., choice, election ; SBoI, 9Bo(I, m., rampart, wall. 
 
 m., whale. 
 
 SBa'^n, m., delusion, false opin- iDOnit? when? 
 
 nion. 
 
 ma^r, true. war, imperf. sing, of fetlt, to be. 
 
 mal^ren, to guard, preserve. toarcn, imperf. pi. of fein. 
 
 tt)al)ren, to last, to endure ; iDftren roe^ren, to check, thwart. 
 
 imperf. subj. pi. of fettt. 
 
 Joa^r'^aft, real, positive ; tDix^V' We^r^aft, capable of defending 
 
 f)aft, durable. one's self. 
 5GBat[e, f., orphan; SBetfe, m., roetfe, adj., wise; 3Bei|e,f., white- 
 sage ; f., mode, manner. ness. 
 SBatfen, pi. of SBatfe ; SBeifen, icetfett, to show ; wet^en, to 
 
 pi. of ber and bte aBetfe. whiten ; 2Set;jen, m., wheat, 
 
 hjallen, to heave, to boil. fallen, to fall, 
 
 ttialf^, adj., Italian, French, lDeI(f), pron., what. 
 
 Welsh. 
 
 watten, to rule ; fatten, to fold, gatten, pi. of galte, f., wrinkle, 
 
 plait, 
 
 ttatjen, to roll, roll out, to waltz; fotjen, to fold up, to furrow. 
 
 loatjen, to revolve, to wallow. 
 
 SBaljer, m., waltz. l^ltjer, m., folder. 
 
 SBatjer, m., roller. ^fiitjer, m., native of the Pala- 
 tinate. 
 
 SlBanb, f., wall. ttjanb, imperf. sing, of totnben, 
 
 to wind. 
 
 SOBangen, pi. of SGBange, f., cheek, waufen, to stagger, 
 
 ftannen, to winnow ;adv.,whence. 5l8annen, pi. of SBonne, f., van. 
 
 SBarte, f., watch-tower. WartC, pres. first pers. sing, of 
 
 ftarten, to wait. 
 
 SBafen, m., sward. 33afen, pi. of 93ofe, f., vase, 
 
 weden, to wake. SSeden, pi. of SBede, f., roll (of 
 
 bread). 
 
 SOBcg, m., way. Weg, adv., away, off. 
 
 3BeI)en, pi. of SBetje, n., pang. toel^en, to blow. 
 
 SOBet)r, SSel^re, f., defejice, resist- SBe^V, n., wear, hedge. 
 
 ance, bulwark. 
 
 SBet^en, pi. of SBeictie, f., groin, n)et(^en, to soften, to yield 
 
 flank. 
 
PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 171 
 
 tDCil, conj., because. 
 
 tDeig, adv., Wet8ma(^en, to make 
 believe. 
 
 SKetfer (cm), a wise man, shower. 
 
 Wetlen, to weld. 
 
 tten, pron. ace. of ttei", who. 
 
 SBevg, n., oakum, tow. 
 
 inert, adj., worth. 
 
 SBefen, n., being, substance. 
 
 SBeften (SBeft), m.. West, Occid- 
 ent. 
 
 toett, adv., even ; fetlt, to be 
 
 quit. 
 
 SBtbber, m., ram ; hJtber, prep. 
 ace, against. 
 
 SBiege, f., cradle. 
 
 IBie'ber^olen, to fetch again. 
 
 SBtefe, f., meadow. 
 
 2Btlb, n., beast of chase, game. 
 
 SBinbe, f., windlass, winch. 
 
 SBinfel, m., angle, corner. 
 
 SStnter, m., winter. 
 
 IDtrfen, to operate, work, to effect. 
 
 SBirfer, m., worker, weaver. 
 
 SBirtet, m., spindle-ring, whirl. 
 
 SBifd), m., mop ; @tro^ , wisp. 
 
 tDif(f)en, to wipe, to rub. 
 
 2Bi[(f)er, m., he that wipes, wiper. 
 
 SSJoc^e, f., week ; SEBoi^ett, pi. 
 
 tt)Of)I, adv. and adj., indeed, well. 
 
 tliotlen, to will, want, desire. 
 
 SBonne, f., delight ; tto|nc, pres. 
 first pers. sing of ttO^ltfJt, to 
 dwell. 
 
 SBrad, n., wreck. 
 
 SBunbe; f., wound. 
 
 SOBuft, m., chaos, rubbish, trash. 
 
 SliSeite, f., while. 
 Wei^, white. 
 
 SB3et§er, m., whitewasher. 
 Sffiellen, pi. of SBcKe, f., wave. 
 tDeitn, conj., when. 
 SBerf, n., work, deed. 
 3Bert, m., value, 
 weffen, gen. of wer, who. 
 aSeften, pi. of SBefte, f., vest. 
 
 fett, adj., fat. 
 
 ttieber, adv., again. 
 
 SBtcfe, f., vetch. 
 roieberfio'Ien, to repeat. 
 SBicfel, n., weasel. 
 IDtlb, adj., wild, savage. 
 SSinbe, pi. of SBinb, m., wind. 
 SBinter, m,, winker. 
 SBinber, m., winder, 
 iritrgen, to choke, strangle. 
 SDBiJrger, m., strangler, murderer. 
 SJteitel, n., one-fourth, quarter, 
 gtfc^, m., fish, 
 fifc^en, to fish. 
 f^if(^er, m., fisher-man. 
 SBoge, f., wave ; 2Bogcn, pi. 
 SBol^t, n., weal, welfare. 
 Wotlen, adj., woollen. 
 SKaittte, f., van, winnowing 
 basket. 
 
 S^racf, m., dress-coat. 
 2Bunber, n., wonder, marvel. 
 iDlift, adj., waste, desert, con- 
 fused. 
 
172 PARONYMS OF THE GERMAN LANGQAGE. 
 
 SBiifte, f., (long u) wilderness. mii|te, (short ii) imperf. subj of 
 
 IDtffen, to know. 
 
 iaijZ, adj., tough. S^¥> f-. loe. 
 
 ^aifl, {.J number. ®aal, m., hall, large room. 
 
 3angen, pi. of ^an^i, f., (pair janten, to quarrel. 
 
 of) tongs. 
 3aunt, m., reins ; @aum, m., S^mi, m., fence, hedge. 
 
 hem, edge. 
 3e^n, f., a ten (in cards). S'^^W> pl- of S^^''^> ™-. tooth, 
 
 ^eii^en, n., sign, mark. jetgeit, show, point out, indicate. 
 
 3etle, f., cell. ^oK^, pi. of ^oU, m., toll, duty. 
 
 3euge, m., witness. B^i'S^/ P'- of 3^"9' "-. stuff, etc. 
 
 jeugen, to testify, to beget. jetgen, to show. 
 
 3eitger, m., procreator. 3^19^1^; m., exhibitor, hand (of a 
 
 clock). 
 3iege, f., goat. 3uge, pi. of 3ug, m., feature, 
 
 procession, train, 
 jte^cn, to draw, pull. jet^en, to accuse. , 
 
 3ober, (3uber), m., wooden-tub. B'lWber, m., charm, magic ; foU= 
 
 ber, neat, clean. 
 3ote, f., obscenity. B^tte, f., shag, tuft (of hair). 
 
 jUcEett, to shrug, to move con- jUdetl, to draw (the sword) ; 
 
 vulsively. judertl, to sugar. 
 
 3uflud)t, f., refuge. 3"P"9/ ™-. a flying to or to- 
 
 wards. 
 3u'fu^r, f., importation, supply. SltOO'r, adv., before, previously. 
 3ug, m., train, procession, B^^' ™-. ^ quick motion, jerk. 
 
 draught. 
 ^Wtd, m., aim, scope. 3>l'Cffe/ f-, peg, tack ; 3'"''^' ™-. 
 
 pinch, 
 jioerc^, adv. athwart, crosswise. 3*''ft'g, m., dwarf. 
 3ttliJtge, f., vise. Sttitnge. pres. first pers. sing, of 
 
 jrotngcK, to force. 
 
 3lDtri, m., twirl. Sl^'im, m., thread. 
 
ORDER OF WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 
 
 173 
 
 X i 
 
 n 
 
 < s 
 
 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Is 
 
 .11 
 
 •a o 
 
 
 tea W 
 
 "^1 
 
 (33 C35 
 
 3 3 § S s-3 'S-3 =-a 
 en «-• «_, _ 
 
 > 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 liliiii fill 
 
 '5j 'S Sj aj ' 
 
 w roS si's 
 <1 ^o !^ 
 
 > 
 < 
 
 a 
 
 u 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Cd 
 
 3 o o 
 
 S 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 PS 
 > 
 
 
 
 %»w ^rt pJo CS*^ ^O 
 
 C fT( tT, W * CS3 in aj l-H CjJ ~ 
 
 E^ ^tt 2 S ^" 2 S 
 
 > 
 w 
 
 H 
 
 td q» -" OO 4-. 
 
 o 
 
 n 
 
 
 U 
 Id 
 
 m 
 
 c 
 
 1 
 
 ^6 
 
 ^9 
 
 '11 
 
 1^6 
 
 '■St 
 
 
 1l 
 
 3 o 
 
 ft* OJ 
 
 glSi 
 
 T3 S 
 
 O S 
 
 O t) 
 
174 
 
 ORDER OF WORDS rN THE SENTENCE 
 
 3 
 
 
 a 
 
 M 
 
 a 
 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 
 &> 
 
 
 
 sO 
 
 ® c -2 a 
 
 Oi 
 
 ^ 
 
 (I) 
 
 a 
 
 Q 
 
 >a 
 
 Pi 
 
 &) 
 
 O 
 
 R 
 
 
 a 
 
 Q 
 
 *<a 
 
 
 1 
 
 Di 
 
 ^ 
 
 Ui 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 '^ 
 
 QJ 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 &> ts 
 
 a >-■' a 
 H .Si- -5 
 
 B fi 
 
 Q 
 
ORDER OF WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 
 
 175 
 
 U 
 Ui 
 
 h 
 
 z 
 
 tn 
 
 ui 
 X 
 H 
 
 I— I 
 
 tn 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 (I. 
 o 
 
 Q 
 O 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 ■g « 
 
 i&.s g s; ^1 5-.g .g-l 
 I- 
 
 i-6 
 
 S3 "3 
 o o 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 B 
 
 « 3 
 o O 
 B S! 
 
 
 W 
 H 
 < 
 
 u 
 
 *-* 
 
 a 
 
 oi 
 
 g|l III tuff 1^ 1 1^ 
 
 «^T3 'S-^ tr^ SjO S)J= XI vO J3 
 t33 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 3^ -eo "B-o -ffo 'B" "Bo 
 
 
 H 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 feine lufgobe 
 his lesson 
 
 feine Slufgabe 
 his lesson 
 
 3 o 3 g a 
 
 tB» 4) «» OJ tip 
 
 jo'i3 jatj jQ 
 
 g 
 
 > 
 < 
 
 
 S 
 
 H 
 
 fa 
 O 
 
 ia 
 a; 
 
 
 
 WXI a-^ 3T3 stj 
 kCO *=3^0 JS-O J3-0 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 H 
 
 
 5 
 
 w 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 feiner ajtuttcr 
 (to) his mother 
 
 feiner 3J£utter 
 his mother 
 
 fetncr aJJutter 
 
 his mother 
 
 g 
 
 1--.= 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 ber finabe 
 the boy 
 
 ber S'nabe 
 the boy 
 
 er 
 he 
 
 er 
 he 
 
 er 
 
 he 
 
 RELATIVE 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 who 
 roetifier 
 
 ber 
 who 
 
 
 6 
 
 P 
 
 8- 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 PQ PQ 
 
 Ml 
 
 tn fi) 
 
 
 
 0^ 
 
176 
 
 ORDER OF WORDS IN THE SENTENCE. 
 
 U 
 
 h 
 
 X 
 h 
 
 05 
 
 Q 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 Oi 
 Ui 
 Q 
 P^ 
 O 
 
 < 
 
 > 
 < 
 
 << 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 H 
 <! 
 O 
 
 e 
 
 11^1 11 It It It 11 1-^ 
 
 (0 
 
 w 
 
 
 -a o 
 
 • 
 
 
 = a 3 3 
 ®| ®^ 
 
 3 H 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 M 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 ■S ta .g d .S rt .2 la 
 
 <u aj a- ej 
 
 
 w" 
 
 >; 
 < 
 
 a 
 
 OS 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 ® s •§■§ 
 = - ®s 
 
 ^x S o 
 
 s 
 ^ >, 
 
 l-?, 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 < E S H B s| 
 
 Bi 
 
 u 
 
 H 
 
 fa 
 O 
 
 CQ 
 
 oi 
 
 > 
 11 
 
 
 
 ^iTi !-. T3 ^ T3 UTS 
 a>»-i ojC oji^ ejj-, 
 
 *i±« (trw ftL^ (jr-u 
 
 mS ^B »S »^ 
 >^ >^ p.^ >, 
 
 > 
 
 s 
 
 a; 
 
 « «.s ■Sm S.tJ 
 o 
 
 H 
 O 
 
 u 
 
 cq 
 en 
 
 is?,®?,®?,®?,®?,®?, is?, is?,is?,®?. 
 
 I! 
 
 
 1^1 
 
 
 :> V ; 
 
 s it-Ell 
 
 Ss; 
 
 - C 4-. B 
 
 •^^ ^^ S^